BANCROFT LIBRARY 
 
 o 
 
 THE LIBRARY 
 
 OF 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY 
 OF CALIFORNIA 
 
 J. Porter Shaw Collection 
 
 Gift of 
 Marguerite Bachrach 
 
HAND-BOOK 
 
 ACTIVE SERVICE; 
 
 CONTAINING 
 
 f ractol Instnttte in topip $ntits. 
 
 IPOR THEE USE OF VOLUNTEERS. 
 
 EGBERT L. VIELE, 
 
 LATE U.S. A., 
 CAPTAIN ENGINEERS, SEVENTH REGIMENT, N.O. 
 
 NEW YORK: 
 D. VAN NOSTKAND, 192 BROADWAY. 
 
 1861. 
 
ENTERED, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1S61, by 
 D. VAN XOSTEAND, 
 
 in the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the United States for the Southern 
 District of New York. 
 
 JOHN F. TROW, 
 FRITTER, 5T1IREOTYPER, AXD ELECTROTYPES, 
 
 46, 48 & 50 Greene Street, 
 New York. 
 
TO 
 
 Ijve j^imtilj geginwtt, 
 
 OJ^ NEW YORK, 
 
 WHICH, 
 
 BY ASSIDUITY, DISCIPLINE, AND ESPRIT DU CORPS, 
 NO LESS THAN BY ITS EMINENT PATRIOTISM, 
 
 HAS BECOME 
 THE MODEL REGIMENT OF CITIZEN SOLDIERS, 
 
 THIS BOOK 
 IS RESPECTFULLY INSCRIBED. 
 
NEW YORK, 21s* February^ 1861. 
 
 CAPTAIN E. L. VIELE, 
 
 Engineer, etc. 
 
 SIR: I Lave read with great satisfaction, the advance sheets of 
 the "Hand Book for Active Service" sent me. A practical work 
 of this description is greatly needed, and will be prized by the sol- 
 diers composing our militia throughout the States. Teaching the 
 soldier how to prepare his food in the most economical and expe- 
 ditious manner is certainly not the least important part of your in- 
 teresting volume. Knowledge thus disseminated will, in case of 
 service in the field, save many lives, and add to the efficiency of the 
 force, while the general information upon military subjects, given 
 in a concise and familiar style, I doubt not will be highly appre- 
 ciated. 
 
 I am, my dear Sir, 
 
 Your friend and servant, 
 
 MARSHALL LEFFERTS, 
 
 Col 1th Regiment, N. G. 
 
PKEF ACE. 
 
 THERE are at this moment in the United States 
 3,000,000 of organized troops, all of them more or 
 less accustomed to the use of arms, and many of 
 them have been drilled in military tactics. Very 
 few have been in actual service, and are therefore 
 unaccustomed to the fatigues, and unacquainted 
 with the duties, of camp and garrison life. "Were 
 any number of them to be brought suddenly into 
 the field, this want of experience would be at once 
 felt by officers as well as soldiers, and a great deal 
 of useless labor, unnecessary privation, and per- 
 sonal suffering would be gone through with before 
 they would become sufficiently accustomed to the 
 entire change in their mode of life. "With a view 
 to avoid these difficulties as much as possible, and 
 set before the soldier in a familiar manner that line 
 of conduct to be pursued in a campaign which would 
 enable him to husband his physical resources and 
 
8 PREFACE. 
 
 at the same time render him most effective in every 
 way for any duty, these pages have been prepared ; 
 the author claiming no originality or merit beyond 
 a desire to aid his fellow-citizens in acquiring more 
 thorough information on the subject of military 
 duties. 
 
 The large amount of intelligence and active 
 energy which the volunteer brings with him into 
 the field is frequently thrown away and wasted for 
 the want of knowledge in daily routine, which, to- 
 gether with a strict obedience to order, makes the 
 chief value of the regular soldier. "When this 
 knowledge is once acquired, volunteers have in 
 many respects the advantage over regular troops. 
 
 YOEK, March, 1861. 
 
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. 
 
 TO FACE PAGE 
 
 FORMATION OF A REGIMENT AND COMPANY, . . 37 
 
 PLAN OF ENCAMPMENT, FOR A REGIMENT OF INFANTRY, . 58 
 
 THE PORTABLE FIELD COOKING STOYE, . . .90 
 PROFILE AND OUTLINE OF A BASTION FRONT FIELD WORK, . 93 
 
 REDAN, CREMAILLERE, LINE AND STAR FORTS, . . 102 
 
 MOUNTAIN HOWITZER AND LIMBER, . . . .157 
 
 24-POUNDER ON A SlEGE CARRIAGE, . . . 182 
 
 SIEGE MORTAR AND MORTAR-BED, . . . .216 
 
 24-POUNDER ON A BARBETTE CARRIAGE, . . . 222 
 
 8-IxCH COLUMBIAD ON A CASEMATE CARRIAGE, . . 244 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 CHAP. PAGE 
 
 I. INTRODUCTION, . . . . . .11 
 
 If. THE RECRUIT, . . . . 15 
 
 III. THE COMPANY,. ..... 28 
 
 IV. THE REGIMENT, ..... 37 
 V. THE MARCH, . . . . . .48 
 
 YI. THE CAMP, 57 
 
 VII. GUARDS AND GUARD MOUNTING, . . .64 
 
 VIII. RATIONS, AND MODE OF COOKING THEM, . . 77 
 
 IX. FIELD FORTIFICATIONS, . . . .92 
 
 X. ARTILLERY, ..... 149 
 
 XL MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY, . . .157 
 
 XII. MANUAL FOR HEAYY ARTILLERY, . . . 178 
 
 XIII. AYMUNITION, . . . . . .250 
 
HAND-BOOK FOR ACTIVE SERVICE. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 AN effective organization of troops for all purposes, is 
 composed of three arms : Infantry, Cavalry, and Artil- 
 lery. Upon a due proportion of each of these arms de- 
 pends their capacity for attack or defence. 
 
 INFANTRY. Experience has taught us that the most 
 reliable arm under all circumstances is infantry ; it is 
 more capable of endurance, and of being manoeuvred on 
 every ground, even where the other arms would be ut- 
 terly useless. 
 
 The proportion of this arm in a complete organiza- 
 tion would be four-fifths of the entire force. 
 
 Infantry is subdivided into " Infantry of the Line," 
 " Light Infantry," and Kiflemen. The duties of each arc 
 distinct. In an engagement the Infantry of the Line bears 
 the brunt of the battle ; moving in mass when acting on 
 the offensive, it delivers its fire in line, and overwhelms 
 the enemy by its force and energy, driving him from his 
 position at the point of the bayonet ; and on the defensive 
 it forms in square to repel the charge of cavalry, and 
 
12 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 upon the coolness and determination with which it re- 
 ceives the shock of attack, depends its success ; to waver 
 is half a defeat. 
 
 The duties of light infantry are to act as flankers on 
 the march, to open an engagement, to draw the enemy's 
 fire, to unmask his batteries, and generally to develop his 
 strength and expose the weak points of his position, to 
 feign attacks, and in every way to annoy, worry, and dis- 
 comfit him. They are selected for picket and outpost 
 duty, advance and rearguard. The French Zouave is the 
 best model of a light infantry soldier. 
 
 The efficiency of riflemen depends upon the locality 
 at which they are posted ; if so placed that they can de- 
 liver their fire with deliberation and precision, they be- 
 come most valuable auxiliaries, and are often able to hold 
 their position against a vastly superior force. They 
 should be selected from those who are known as good 
 shots, otherwise their principal value would be lost. 
 
 CAVALRY. Cavalry is placed second in importance 
 to infantry, although modern warfare has developed such 
 perfection in artillery, that it has in many instances turned 
 the tide of battle, and saved the other arms from a crush- 
 ing defeat. Well-drilled cavalry, however, saves the 
 strength of an army, which, in the absence of it, would be 
 broken down by the advanced post duties, patrol and de- 
 tachment service, and many other duties which, at the 
 best, infantry would but be able imperfectly to perform. 
 Its chief value is felt when the infantry is exhausted by 
 fatigue; coming freshly upon the ground in an engage- 
 ment, it gives the other troops time to recover their 
 strength, and the commands to reform. The nature of 
 country in which a campaign is undertaken, determines 
 the relative proportion of cavalry to infantry. In an open 
 country, the cavalry can be increased with advantage. As 
 
INTRODUCTION. 13 
 
 a general rule, however, one regiment of cavalry to four 
 regiments of foot is a proper proportion, since cavalry, 
 unless well supported by infantry, would at times be 
 utterly powerless and unable to protect itself. To render 
 it perfect, it should be composed of strong, skilful, bold 
 and reckless riders, well-trained and well-built horses, 
 so that, dashing forward on an instant, and moving with 
 celerity upon the enemy, it rides him down before he has 
 time to prepare to meet the shock. 
 
 ARTILLERY. Artillery is an arm of great power, and 
 in skilful hands the most effective arm of the service ; it 
 inspires confidence in the troops, and if the fire is de- 
 livered with precision and rapidity, it is next to impossible 
 to withstand it. On the other hand, if not well supported 
 by infantry, it falls readily into the enemy's hands, giving 
 him an immense advantage in an instant. To this end, 
 care should be taken not to have it out of proportion to 
 the arms. Two batteries of six (6-pounders) field pieces 
 to one division or four foot regiments, will generally be 
 found a due proportion. When the character of the 
 ground is favorable, the nature of the service may re- 
 quire an increase of the artillery to three batteries. Upon 
 this basis, then, an effective organization or army corps 
 would be composed of about 5,000 men : 
 
 2 regiments of infantry of the line .... 1000 each 
 
 1 regiment of light infantry 1000 
 
 1 regiment of riflemen 1000 
 
 1 regiment of cavalry 1000 
 
 2 batteries (six pieces) of artillery, or 4 batteries of 4 
 
 pieces if mountain howitzers are used. 
 
 This disposition of the several arms is predicated 
 upon the supposition that the troops are well drilled and 
 disciplined, since the whole value of the arrangement is 
 dependent on this discipline. Hence the necessity, in the 
 
14: INTRODUCTION. 
 
 case of volunteer forces brought suddenly into active ser- 
 vice, of making up for their want of experience by a close 
 attention to the leading points of military instruction. 
 For this purpose, the following paragraphs have been so 
 arranged that each soldier can follow step by step the 
 necessary course of instruction, and the duties which will 
 devolve upon him. 
 
 An intelligent mind becomes restive under the routine 
 of the daily drill, unless it can appreciate the object to be 
 gained by such discipline. By setting before the volun- 
 teer the whole theory of army organization, it is believed 
 that he will the more readily comprehend the great value 
 of discipline in sustaining that organization, and under 
 such impulses will arrive more rapidly at proficiency in 
 drill, and yield a more ready obedience to orders. The 
 minor details which are most generally learned in the 
 field, are after all the most important to the personal 
 health, comfort, and efficiency of the troops ; and the 
 sooner the volunteer becomes acquainted with these de- 
 tails, the sooner will he be fitted for the active and ardu- 
 ous duties of a campaign. 
 
CHAPTER II. 
 
 THE RECRUIT. 
 
 THE patriotic desire of every good citizen to serve his 
 country, is the natural result of our form of government. 
 Yet it is absolutely impossible for every man to perform 
 all the duties of a soldier, no matter what may be his nat- 
 ural impulses ; and to fill the ranks by accepting the ser- 
 vices of all that offer themselves, would jeopardize the 
 best interests of the service, and in many cases would 
 impede, if not frustrate, the very objects of a campaign. 
 Hence, there devolves upon the officer who recruits or 
 organizes a company of men for active service, a very 
 large share of responsibility ; his duty to the individual 
 who offers, no less than to the service he seeks to enter, 
 compels him to exercise the wisest discretion in the selec- 
 tion of his men. Even where a company of volunteers 
 already organized in time of peace is called upon to take 
 the field, each man should be submitted to a critical 
 medical examination, and if there is any defect in his physi- 
 cal organization which would render him unfit to with- 
 stand the fatigues of an active campaign, or any evidence 
 of a susceptibility to disease, he should be rejected without 
 hesitation. 
 
 " An able-bodied soldier " should be of good character, 
 sound in body and mind, of good appearance, well formed, 
 
16 THE RECRUIT. 
 
 and fit in every particular to perform the duties required 
 of him ; he should be over 18 years of age and under 40, 
 and the greatest care should be taken to inform him with 
 regard to the nature of his duties, the term of service, 
 pay, clothing, rations, and other allowances, before he is 
 finally received into the service. This will prevent re- 
 gret and dissatisfaction, and secure efficiency. 
 
 "THE SQUAD." 
 
 As fast as the men are enrolled, they should be in- 
 structed three times a day in the school of th@ soldier : 
 much of a soldier's subsequent efficiency depends upon his 
 first " setting up." 
 
 For the purpose of instruction, the companies are di- 
 vided into " squads " of 10, and are first drilled in the 
 " Position of a Soldier." Formed in one rank, about one 
 pace apart, the instructor places them in position as fol- 
 lows : 
 
 POSITION OF THE SOLDIER. 
 
 Heels on the same line, and as close together as the 
 conformation of the man may permit ; the feet forming 
 with each other something less than a right angle, the 
 toes equally turned out ; the knees straight, without stiff- 
 ness ; the body erect on the hips, the upper part inclining 
 a little forward ; the shoulders square and falling equally ; 
 arms hanging naturally, elbows near the body, the palm 
 of the hand turned a little to the front, the little finger 
 behind the seam of the pantaloons, or the centre of the 
 thigh ; the face well to the front, the chin a little drawn 
 in without constraint, and the eyes striking the ground 
 at the distance of fifteen paces. 
 
THE RECRUIT. 17 
 
 Remarks on the Position of the Soldier. 
 Heels on the same line ; 
 
 Because, if one were in rear of the other, the shoulder 
 on that side would be thrown back, or the position of the 
 soldier would be constrained. 
 
 Heels more or less closed ; 
 
 Because, men who are knock-kneed, or who have legs 
 with large calves, cannot, without constraint, make their 
 heels touch while standing. 
 Toes equally turned out, and not forming 1 too large an angle ; 
 
 Because, if one toe were turned out more than the 
 other, a shoulder would be deranged, and if both toes be 
 too much turned out, it would not be practicable to in- 
 cline the upper part of the body forward without rendering 
 the whole position unsteady. 
 
 Knees extended without stiffness; 
 
 because, if stiffened, constraint and fatigue would be 
 unavoidable. 
 
 The body erect on the hips ; 
 
 Because, it gives equilibrium to the position. The 
 instructor will observe that many recruits have the bad 
 habit of dropping a shoulder, of drawing in a side, or of 
 advancing a hip, particularly the left, when under arms. 
 These are defects which he will labor to correct. 
 
 The upper part of the body inclining forward ; 
 
 Because, commonly recruits are disposed to do the 
 reverse, to project the belly, and to throw back the shoul- 
 ders when they wish to hold themselves erect great in- 
 conveniences in marching, as will be explained in the 
 remarks on the principles of the step. The habit of in- 
 clining forward the upper part of the body is so impor- 
 tant to contract, that the instructor must enforce it at the 
 
18 THE BECEUIT. 
 
 beginning, particularly with recruits who have naturally 
 the opposite habit ; 
 
 Shoulders square; 
 
 Because, if the shoulders be advanced beyond the line 
 of the breast, and the back arched, (the defect called 
 round-shouldered, not uncommon among recruits,) the 
 man cannot align himself nor use his musket with address. 
 It is important, then, to correct this defect, and necessary 
 to that end that the coat should set easy about the shoul- 
 ders and arm-pits ; but, in correcting this defect, the in- 
 structor will take care that the shoulders be not thrown 
 too much to the rear, which would cause the belly to pro- 
 ject, and the small of the back to be curved. 
 
 The arms hang-ing- naturally, elbows near the body, the palm 
 of the hand a little turned to the front, the little finger 
 behind the seam of the pantaloons ; 
 
 Because, these positions are equally important to the 
 shoulder-arms, and to prevent the man from occupying 
 more space in a rank than is necessary to a free use of 
 the musket ; they have, moreover, the advantage of keep- 
 ing in the shoulders. 
 
 The face well to the front, the chin a little drawn in, without 
 constraint ; 
 
 Because, if there be stiffness in the latter position, it 
 would communicate itself to the whole of the upper part 
 of the body, embarrass its movements, and give pain and 
 
 fatigue. 
 
 Eyes cast direct to the front ; 
 
 Because, this is the surest means of maintaining the 
 shoulders in line an essential object, to be insisted on 
 and attained. 
 
 Too much attention cannot be paid to this first lesson 
 in tactics, and the drill officer should be constantly on the 
 watch throughout the whole progress of instruction, in the 
 
THE KECRTJIT. 19 
 
 use of arms, company and battalion drills, that every man 
 should always maintain " the position of the soldier." 
 
 ARM EXERCISE. 
 
 In order to accustom the recruit more readily to the 
 position of a soldier, and at the same time to render him 
 more supple for acquiring a proficiency in the manual of 
 arms the following exercises should precede the regular 
 drill. Formed in one rank at one pace apart, the in- 
 structor will give the command : 
 
 Arms UPWARD. 
 i 
 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 First motion. Bring the forearms to a vertical posi- 
 tion, the fingers closed, and hands against the right and 
 left breasts. 
 
 Second motion. Extend the arms vertically over the 
 head, open the fingers and place the palms together. 
 
 Arms DOWNWARD. 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 First motion. Bring the arms to the first position of 
 arms upward. 
 
 Second motion. Drop the hands with force to the side. 
 
 Arms FORWARD. 
 One time and motion. 
 
 Extend the arms horizontally in front of the body, the 
 palms of the hands touching. 
 
 Arms DOWNWARD. 
 One time and two motions, as before. 
 
20 THE EECEUTT. 
 
 Arms BACKWARD. 
 One time and one motion. 
 Carry the hands behind the body, the palms touching. 
 
 Arms FRONT. 
 Carry the hands quickly to the side. 
 
 Arms SIDEWAYS. 
 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 Extend the arms horizontally to the right and left. 
 
 Arms DOWNWARD. 
 
 As before. 
 
 The instructor will now command in rapid succession, 
 Arms sideways ! forward ! upward ! downward ! back- 
 ward ! front ! all of which will be executed as directed. 
 By continuing this exercise for 10 or 15 minutes at the 
 commencement of every drill without arms, a remarkable 
 improvement will soon be observed in the carriage of the 
 men. 
 
 SALUTING. 
 
 Saluting with the right or left hand is executed in one 
 time and four motions. The instructor commands : 
 
 Right hand SALUTE. 
 
 First motion. Extend the arm horizontally to the 
 right, palm down. 
 
 Second motion. Carry the hand to the visor of the 
 cap. 
 
 Third motion. Carry the arm back to the horizontal 
 position. 
 
 Fourth motion. Drop the hand quickly to the side. 
 
THE RECRUIT. 21 
 
 Left hand SALUTE. 
 
 The same as for the right. 
 
 The salute should always be made with the hand op- 
 posite to the person saluted. 
 
 Having thoroughly impressed upon the men the above 
 rules, the instructor commands : 
 
 1. Eyes EIGHT. 2. FRONT. 
 
 At the word right , the soldier will turn his head gen- 
 tly, so as to bring the inner corner of the left eye in a line 
 with the buttons of the coat, the eyes fixed on the line of 
 the eyes of the men in the same rank. At the command 
 front, the head will resume the direct or habitual position. 
 The instructor will take care that the movement of the 
 head does not derange the squareness of the shoulders, 
 and that the men do not acquire a habit of throwing down 
 the head in dressing. 
 
 The movement of Eyes Left, will ~be executed, by inverse means. 
 
 FACINGS. 
 
 Facing to the right and left will be executed in one 
 time, or pause. The instructor commands : 
 
 1. Squad. 2. Right (or left) FACE. 
 
 At the word face, raise the right foot slightly, turn on 
 the left heel, to the right, (or left,) raising the left toe a 
 little, and then replace the right heel beside the left, and 
 on the same line. The face should always be through a 
 right angle, and should be executed by the feet and legs, 
 the body moving around to the right (or left) without 
 twisting or constraint. The instructor should labor to keep 
 the body steady, and to prevent the formation of the habit 
 of bending the knees, or springing. 
 
Z5P THE 
 
 The full face to the rear is always to the right, and is 
 executed in two times, or pauses. The instructor com- 
 mands : 
 
 1. Squad. 2. ABOUT FACE. 
 
 First Motion. At the word about, the soldier will 
 turn far enough on the left heel to bring the left toe di- 
 rectly to the front, at the same time carrying his right 
 foot to the rear, the hollow opposite to, and full three 
 inches from the left heel, the feet square to each other. 
 The back of the right hand is placed a little above the 
 right hip, and the body is turned to the right sufficiently 
 to give ease to the position. 
 
 Second Motion. At the word face, the soldier raises 
 his toes a little, turns upon both heels, faces to the rear, 
 keeping his legs straight, and draws back the right heel 
 by the side of the left, at the same time dropping his 
 right hand by his side. 
 
 BALANCE STEP. 
 
 Before commencing the march the soldier should al- 
 ways be instructed in the balance step, the object of which 
 is to teach him the free movements of his limbs, while he 
 at the same time preserves perfect squareness of the shoul- 
 ders, with the greatest steadiness of the body ; no labor 
 should be spared to attain this object, which lies at the 
 very foundation of good marching. 
 
 The squad being at attention, the instructor com- 
 mands : 
 
 Left foot FORWARD. 
 
 At this command the soldier will throw his left foot 
 gently forwards, about twenty-four inches, balancing his 
 body well on the right foot without changing the position 
 of the shoulders, and without the body losing its erect 
 
THE RECRUIT. 23 
 
 position. The toe should be turned out as in the position 
 of the soldier, the foot about three inches from the ground 
 and very nearly parallel to it, the toe being very slightly 
 depressed. 
 
 At the command : 
 
 Left foot REAR. 
 
 The left foot is brought gently back, the ball of the 
 left foot close to the right heel, the leg straight, toe raised, 
 and heel depressed. 
 
 As soon as the soldier becomes steady in the new po- 
 sition, the instructor repeats the command, left foot for- 
 ward, then left foot rear, for several times, and then 
 commands : 
 
 HALT ; 
 
 at which the left foot, cither advanced or to the rear, is 
 brought to the right, as in the position of the soldier. 
 
 The instructor then causes the soldier to balance on the 
 left foot, by advancing and retiring the right, as has been 
 directed for the left. 
 
 THE DIRECT STEP. 
 
 After the soldier is sufficiently instructed in the bal- 
 ance step to execute it on either foot without losing his 
 balance, the instructor will proceed to instruct him in the 
 mechanicsm of the direct step. For this purpose he will 
 command : 
 
 1. By the numbers Forward. 2. ONE. 
 
 At the command, one, the soldier will throw forward 
 the left foot as in the position of left foot forward, the in- 
 structor then commands : 
 
 Two. 
 
 At this command, the weight of the body is thrown 
 
24 THE RECRUIT. 
 
 forward, the left foot striking the ground without shock, 
 at the distance of twenty-eight inches from the right ; the 
 body assumes the perpendicular position, and the right 
 foot is brought up to the position of right foot rear. 
 
 The right foot is then brought forward at the com- 
 mand one, and the step completed at the command two ; 
 thus the squad is made to advance step by step. The 
 halt is executed as in the balance step. 
 
 When the squad is sufficiently instructed in the me- 
 chanism of the direct step, the instructor will cause it to 
 take up the march in common time ; for this purpose he 
 will command : 
 
 1. Squad forward Common time. 2. MARCH. 
 
 At the command forward, the soldier will throw the 
 weight of his body on the right leg, without bending the 
 left knee. 
 
 At the command march, he will smartly, but without 
 a jerk, carry straight forward the left foot twenty-eight 
 inches from the right, the sole near the ground, the leg 
 extended, the toe a little depressed, and both it and the 
 knee slightly turned out ; he will at the same time throw 
 the weight of the body forward, and plant flat the left 
 foot, without shock, precisely at the distance where it 
 finds itself from the right when the weight of the body is 
 brought forward, the whole of which will now rest on the 
 left foot. The soldier will next, in like manner, advance 
 the right foofc and plant it as directed for the left, the heel 
 twenty-eight inches from the heel of the left foot, and thus 
 continue the march without crossing the legs, or striking 
 one against the other, without turning the shoulders, and 
 always preserving the face direct to the front. Common 
 time is executed at the rate of ninety steps to the 
 minute. 
 
THE RECRUIT. 25 
 
 When the instructor wishes to arrest the march, he 
 commands : 
 
 1. Squad. 2. HALT. 
 
 The command halt, should be given just as one foot 
 has come to the ground, and the other is raised for making 
 the next step ; the soldier instinctively completes the 
 pace with the raised foot, and brings the other firmly to 
 its place beside it. By careful attention to this rule a 
 large command may as readily be halted at the same in- 
 stant, as a single individual. 
 
 The principles of the step in quick time are the same 
 as for common time ; it is executed, however, at the rate 
 of 110 steps per minute. After the soldier is well estab- 
 lished in the length and swiftness of the step at common 
 time, he should be practised in quick time, as it is the 
 pace best adapted to marches, the manoeuvres, etc. 
 
 The instructor wishing the squad to march in quick 
 time, commands : 
 
 1. Squad forward. 2. MARCH. 
 
 PRINCIPLES OF THE DOUBLE QUICK STEP. 
 
 The length of the double quick step is thirty-three 
 inches, and its swiftness is at the rate of 165 steps per 
 minute. This step is designed especially for light troops, 
 such as light infantry and riflemen, and to them it is in- 
 dispensable ; its utility has, however, been so frequently 
 demonstrated of late years, as to make it proper that it 
 should form a part of the instruction of all infantry 
 troops. 
 
 The instructor wishing to teach his squad the prin- 
 ciples and mechanism of the double quick step, com- 
 mands : 
 
 1. Double quick step. 2. MARCH. 
 2 
 
20 THE EECEUIT. 
 
 At the command double quick step, the soldier will 
 raise his hands to a level with his hips, the hands closed, 
 the nails towards the body, the elbows to tire rear, and 
 well drawn in towards the body. 
 
 At the command march, he will raise his left knee as 
 high as possible without derangement of the body, keep- 
 ing his leg from the knee down in a vertical position, the 
 toe depressed ; he will then replace his foot in its former 
 position. At the command two, he will execute with the 
 right leg what has just been prescribed for the left, and 
 the alternate movement of the legs at the command one, 
 two, will be continued until the command : 
 
 1. Squad. 2. HALT. 
 
 At the command halt, the soldier will bring the foot 
 which is raised by the side of the other, and at the same 
 time dropping his hands by his side will resume the posk 
 tion of the soldier without arms. 
 
 When the squad has learned to execute the step prop- 
 erly, the instructor will repeat the words one, two, in 
 more rapid succession, and will finally drop them, leaving 
 the files to execute the step in their own time. The in- 
 structor will see that the step is taken in rapid succession, 
 and that none of the files lose the step. 
 
 The soldier being sufficiently established in the prin- 
 ciples of this step, the instructor will command : 
 
 1. Squad forward. 2. JDouble quick. 3. MARCH. 
 
 At the command forward, the soldier will throw the 
 weight of his body on the right leg, without bending the 
 left knee. 
 
 At the command double quick, he will place his arms 
 as indicated above. 
 
 At the command march, he will carry forward the left 
 
THE BECRUIT. 27 
 
 foot, and plant it, the toe first, at the distance of thirty- 
 three inches from the right, the leg slightly bent, and the 
 knee somewhat raised ; he will then execute with the 
 right foot what has just been prescribed for the left. This 
 alternate movement of the legs will take place by throwing 
 the weight of the body on the foot that is planted, and by 
 allowing a natural, oscillatory motion to the arms. The 
 feet should not be raised too much, a common fault with 
 beginners, and the body should incline slightly forward. 
 
 The double quick step may be executed with different 
 degrees of swiftness. Under urgent circumstances, the 
 cadence of this step may be increased to 180 per minute. 
 At this rate a distance of 4,000, yards would be passed 
 over in about twenty-five minutes. 
 
 The men should also be exercised in running ; the 
 principles are the same as for the double quick step, the 
 only difference consisting in a greater degree of swiftness. 
 
 It is recommended in marching in double quick time, 
 or the run, that the men should breathe as much as pos- 
 sible through the nose, keeping the mouth closed. 
 
 NOTE. The Manual of Arms is the next step of instruction in 
 the school of the soldier ; for this Tactics will be referred to, as the 
 brevity of this work will not admit of its insertion. 
 
CHAPTER III. 
 
 THE COMPANY. 
 
 IN an organization, the smallest number complete in 
 itself, is the company, which varies in number from 50 to 
 100 rank and file, 
 
 NOTE. The general principles of organization are the same for 
 all arms. The variation in the Cavalry will be referred to, and that 
 for Artillery will be found in the Manual for Light and Heavy Guns. 
 
 A captain, two or more lieutenants, from four to six 
 sergeants, and as many corporals, are attached to every 
 company. The captain and lieutenants are the officers, 
 and the sergeants and corporals the non-commissioned 
 officers of the company. 
 
 The captain is responsible for the instruction, disci- 
 pline, general efficiency, and moral tone of the company. 
 
 The lieutenants assist the captain in the maintenance 
 of discipline, and in the instruction. 
 
 The company is divided into two equal parts, which 
 are designated as the first and second platoon, counting 
 from the right ; and each platoon is, in like manner, di- 
 vided into two sections. 
 
 The company is formed into two ranks in the follow- 
 ing manner : the corporals on the right and left of pla- 
 toons, according to height ; the tallest corporal and the 
 
THE COMPANY. 29 
 
 tallest man from the first file on the right, the next two 
 tallest men from the second file, and so on to the last file, 
 which is composed of the shortest corporal and the short- 
 est man. 
 
 The odd and even files, numbered as one, two, in the 
 company, from right to left, form groups of four men, 
 who, when they act as light troops, are designated com- 
 rades in battle. 
 
 The officers and non-commissioned officers of the com- 
 pany are posted in the following manner : 
 
 The captain, on the right of the company, touching 
 with the left elbow. 
 
 The first sergeant, in the rear rank, touching with the 
 left elbow, and covering the captain. In the manoeuvres 
 he is denominated covering sergeant, or right guide of the 
 company. 
 
 The remaining officers and sergeants are posted as file- 
 closers, in the rank of file closers, two paces behind the 
 rear rank. 
 
 The first lieutenant, opposite the centre of the fourth 
 section. 
 
 The second lieutenant, opposite the centre of the first 
 platoon. 
 
 The third lieutenant, opposite the centre of the second 
 platoon. 
 
 The second sergeant, opposite the second file from the 
 left of the company. In the manoeuvres he is called the 
 left guide of the company. 
 
 The third sergeant, opposite the second file from the 
 right of the second platoon. 
 
 The fourth sergeant, opposite the second file from the 
 left of the first platoon. 
 
 The fifth sergeant, opposite the second file from the 
 right of the first platoon. 
 
30 THE COMPANY. 
 
 The corporals are posted in the front rank. 
 
 The company in cavalry is denominated the troop ; it is 
 organized upon the same principles as that of* infantry ; 
 its habitual formation is in two ranks. 
 
 When the company is in line, and acting singly, the 
 officers and non-commissioned officers are posted as fol- 
 lows : 
 
 The captain in front of the centre, one pace from the 
 front rank. 
 
 The first lieutenant in rear of the centre, in the rank 
 of file-closers. 
 
 The second lieutenant commands the first platoon ; in 
 the absence of a third lieutenant, the second platoon is 
 commanded by the senior sergeant. The chiefs of platoons 
 are posted one pace in front of the centres of their re- 
 spective platoons. 
 
 The first sergeant in rear of the right, in the rank of 
 file-closers. 
 
 The second and third sergeants on the right and left 
 of the company, and denominated the guide of the right, 
 and guide of the left, respectively. 
 
 The fourth sergeant is on the left of the first platoon, 
 in the front rank, and counted in the rank ; \hzfifth ser- 
 geant is in a corresponding position on the right of the 
 second platoon. 
 
 Corporals on the flanks of platoons. 
 
 Buglers twenty paces in rear of the centre. 
 
 Two companies of cavalry united constitute a squad- 
 ron. Each squadron is composed of four platoons, distin- 
 guished by the denomination of first, second, third, and 
 fourth, commencing on the right. 
 
 The first and second platoons form the first division, 
 the third and fourth form the second division. 
 
 The senior captain of the squadron is denominated the 
 
THE COMPANY. 31 
 
 captain commanding, the junior captain tho second cap- 
 tain. 
 
 When the squadron is in line, the officers and non- 
 commissioned officers are posted as follows : 
 
 The captain commanding at the centre of the squadron, 
 the croup of his horse one pace in front of the heads of 
 the horses of the front rank. 
 
 The second captain three paces in rear of the centre of 
 the squadron. He is charged with the alignment of the 
 rear rank and line of file-closers. 
 
 The senior first lieutenant commands the first platoon; 
 the junior first lieutenant commands the fourth platoon. 
 
 The senior second lieutenant commands the second 
 platoon ; the junior second lieutenant commands the third 
 platoon. 
 
 Each of these officers is posted at the centre of his 
 platoon, with the croup of his horse one pace in front of 
 the heads of the horses of the front rank. 
 
 The senior sergeant is posted behind the first file from 
 the right of the first platoon ; he is the principal guide 
 when the column of squadrons is left in front. 
 
 The second sergeant is behind the third file from the 
 left of the fourth platoon ; he is principal guide when the 
 column of squadrons is right in front. 
 
 The third sergeant is posted on the right of the front 
 rank of the squadron ; he is the guide of the right, and is 
 not counted in the rank. 
 
 The fourth sergeant on the left of the front rank ; ho 
 is guide of the left, and not counted in the rank. 
 
 The fifth sergeant on the left of the first platoon, and 
 counted in the rank. 
 
 The sixth sergeant on the right of tho second platoon, 
 also counted in the rank. 
 
 The seventh sergeant on the right of the third platoon ; 
 
32 THE COMPANY. 
 
 the eighth sergeant on the right of the fourth platoon 
 both are counted in the rank. 
 
 The heads of the horses of the file-closers are at one 
 pace from the croup of those of the rear rank. 
 
 The corporals are in the front rank, on the right and 
 left of their respective platoons, and supply the places of 
 sergeants when necessary. 
 
 When guidons are used, they are carried by the non- 
 commissioned officers on the left of the first and third 
 platoons. 
 
 As the company is the unit of a military organization, 
 the efficiency of that organization depends upon the effi- 
 ciency of the unit ; and the captain or commanding officer 
 of a company should always bear in mind that there is no 
 position in the service, second in importance to his. He 
 should be thoroughly familiar with tactics. He should 
 strive to acquaint himself with the individual character 
 and habits of his men, so as to know how much he can 
 depend upon them ; and to be able to make from them a 
 selection of any number at any time for important ser- 
 vice. While he is personally responsible for the proper 
 care and preservation of the arms and accoutrements, he 
 should also feel himself responsible for the proper cloth- 
 ing and diet of his men. In order the more effectively to 
 carry out a rigid supervision of the personal conduct and 
 comfort of the men, he will cause them to be numbered in a 
 regular series, including the non-commissioned officers, and 
 divided into several squads, each to be put under the 
 charge of a non-commissioned officer. As far as practicable, 
 the men of each squad should be quartered together. 
 
 Each of the lieutenants is charged with a squad for the 
 supervision of its order and cleanliness ; and captains 
 should require their subalterns to assist them in the per- 
 formance of all company duties. 
 
THE COMPANY. DO 
 
 The utmost attention should be paid by captains to 
 the cleanliness of their men, as to their persons, clothing, 
 arms, accoutrements, and equipments, and also as to their 
 quarters or tents. 
 
 The name of each soldier should be labelled on his 
 bunk in quarters, and his company number should be 
 placed against his arms and accoutrements. 
 
 The arms are placed in arm-racks, the stoppers in the 
 muzzles, the cocks let down, and the bayonets in their 
 scabbards, the accoutrements suspended over the arms, 
 and the swords or sabres, when these are worn, hung up 
 by the belts on pegs. 
 
 The knapsack of each man should be placed at the 
 foot of his bunk when he is in quarters, packed with his 
 effects, and ready to be slung ; the overcoat rolled, strap- 
 ped, and placed under the knapsack ; the cap on a shelf, 
 and his boots well cleaned. Dirty clothes should be kept 
 in an appropriate part of the knapsack ; nothing to be 
 put under the bedding. 
 
 Cooking utensils and table furniture should be clean, 
 and in their appropriate places ; blacking and brushes out 
 of sight ; the fuel in boxes. 
 
 The cleaning up should take place at least once a 
 week. The chiefs of squads should cause bunks and bed- 
 ding to be overhauled, floors cleaned, and arms, accoutre- 
 ments, etc., all put in order. 
 
 Non-commissioned officers in charge of squads, should 
 be held immediately responsible that their men observe 
 what is prescribed above ; that they wash their hands and 
 faces daily ; that they brush or comb their heads and 
 beards ; that those who go on duty put their arms, accou- 
 trements, dress, etc., in the best order. 
 
 Commanders of companies should see that the arms 
 and accoutrements in possession of the men are always 
 2* 
 
34: THE COMPANY. 
 
 kept in good order, and that proper care is taken in clean- 
 ing them. 
 
 Arms should not be taken to pieces without permission 
 of an officer. Bright barrels should be kept clean and free- 
 from rust, without polishing them ; care should be taken 
 not to bruise or bend the barrel. After firing, wash out 
 the bore, wipe it dry, and then pass a bit of cloth, slightly 
 greased, to the bottom. In these operations, a rod of wood 
 with a loop on one end is to be used instead of the ram- ' 
 mer. The barrel, when not in use, should be closed with 
 a stopper. For exercise each man should keep himself 
 provided with a piece of sole leather to fit the cap or 
 countersink of the hammer, to prevent breaking the nipple. 
 
 All field pieces in the possession of artillery companies 
 should be kept clean and dry ; their vents frequently 
 examined, to see that they are clear ; the elevating screw 
 wiped clean, worked, and oiled. "When tarpaulins are 
 placed over them, they should occasionally be removed, 
 the guns and carriages brushed off, and, if damp, allowed 
 to dry. 
 
 The implements should all be kept clean and under 
 cover, the harness and leather articles should be brushed 
 and greased with neats foot oil as often as their condition 
 requires it, and if they have a reddish hue, mix a little 
 lampblack with the oil. First brush the leather, then 
 pass over it a sponge wet with warm water, and apply 
 the oil before the leather is quite dry. 
 
 Arms should not be left loaded in armories, quarters, 
 or tents, or when the men are off duty, except by special 
 orders. The ammunition in the possession of the men 
 should be inspected frequently, and any damaged, wasted, 
 or lost by neglect, should be paid for. 
 
 Knapsacks should be black ; they should be marked 
 on the outside with the number of the regiment, and on 
 
TIIE COMPANY. 35 
 
 the inside with the letter of the company, and the number 
 of the soldier, on such part as will readily be seen at in- 
 spections. 
 
 Haversacks should be marked on the flap with the 
 number and name of the regiment, the letter of the com- 
 pany, and the number of the soldier. 
 
 Both officers and men should wear the prescribed uni- 
 form in camp or garrison. 
 
 In camp or quarters, the officers should visit the kitch- 
 en daily and inspect the kettles, food, etc., and at all times 
 carefully attend to the messing and economy of their com- 
 panies. 
 
 The company rations are usually taken charge of by 
 the orderly sergeant, and issued daily to the cooks, by 
 whom they are prepared and served to the company. The 
 men of the company serve in turn as cooks, two being the 
 usual number serving at once. When in camp, the men 
 present themselves at meal times to the cooks, who issue 
 to each man in turn his proper allowance ; in garrison or 
 quarters the tables are set out, and the cooks place each 
 man's ration on his plate, and in his cup, before the com- 
 pany is marched in. 
 
 When not actually in the field the ration is in most cases 
 more than sufficient, so that by care on the part of the 
 orderly sergeant and cooks, there is more or less saved on 
 the rations of the company ; this saving is sold for the 
 benefit of the company, and constitutes what is denomi- 
 nated company fund. 
 
 When a militia company is enrolled for active service 
 the captain should, at the earliest possible moment, have 
 it properly uniformed and equipped, and taught how to 
 take care of its arms, clothing, etc. ; each man should be 
 provided with his knapsack, haversack, blanket, knife and 
 fork, spoon, tin plate, and cup. 
 
36 TI1K COMPANY. 
 
 Canteens are also necessary in most cases tliey are 
 worn^over the haversack. 
 
 Each man should also be provided with the following 
 articles : 
 
 Two woollen undershirts. 
 
 Two pair thick cotton drawers. 
 
 Four pair woollen socks. 
 
 Two pair stout shoes, with broad, thick soles, for 
 footmen. 
 
 One pair boots, and one pair shoes for horsemen. 
 
 In starting out on a campaign, an amount of clothing 
 equal at least to one-fourth the strength of the company, 
 should be transported with the company's equipments. 
 The uniform for active service should consist of a simple 
 fatigue dress of durable material, a plain and substantial 
 overcoat with a cape, and a forage cap. 
 
 COMPANY BOOKS. 
 
 Every company should be provided with 
 
 1. A morning report book, showing the strength of 
 the company every morning, the number for duty, the 
 number sick, and all the casualties that may occur. 
 
 2. A clothing book, showing the clothing issued to 
 each man, the date of issue, and price. 
 
 3. A roster, arranged in alphabetical order, from 
 which the details for guard duty and other service are made, 
 each man being credited with his tour, and the duty fairly 
 distributed. 
 
Formation of a IRegiment and. Company. 
 
 ^u s. 
 
 S9 
 
 a 3 
 
 g * 
 
 a 
 a 
 
 X 
 
 1 
 
 Is 
 
 *^ to 
 
 a 
 D 
 D 
 
 
 n 
 a 
 D 
 
 5? 
 
 r 
 
 o 
 
 5i 
 CM 
 
 a 
 a 
 
 
 
 a 
 a 
 D 
 
 fc 
 
 ^ I 
 S S 
 
 to 
 
 a 
 n 
 a 
 a 
 a 
 a 
 
 D 
 
 X 
 
 J 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 1 A 
 
 a V 
 
 ol i 
 
 5 & S 
 
 10 
 
 S s 
 
 a ^ 
 a u - 
 
 Li 
 
 a 
 a 
 n 
 
 **: 
 
 n 
 a 
 a 
 a 
 a 
 a 
 a 
 
 | 
 
 5* 
 
 R| 
 
 a 
 a 
 a 
 a 
 n 
 a 
 a 
 
 v| 
 
 <*: jEi 
 
 01 r 
 
 e 
 
 a 
 a 
 a 
 a 
 a 
 a 
 a 
 
 1 
 
 I 
 
 & * 
 O> u 
 
 1 
 
 g * 
 
 a co 
 
 *g 
 
 i." ~ 
 
 IE 
 
 r 
 i 
 
 DS 
 
 <o 
 
 I 
 
 DEI 
 
 nf 
 
 U 
 
CHAPTER IV. 
 
 THE REGIMENT. 
 
 A REGIMENT is composed of ten companies, which are 
 habitually posted from right to left, in the following 
 order : first, sixth, fourth, ninth, third, eighth, fifth, tenth, 
 seventh, second, according to the rank of the captain. 
 With a less number of companies the same principle will 
 be observed, viz. : the first captain commands the right 
 company, the second captain the left company, the third 
 captain the right centre company, and so on. 
 
 The companies thus posted are designated from right 
 to left, first company, second company, etc. This designa- 
 tion is observed in all the manoeuvres. 
 
 The first two companies on the right, whatever their 
 denomination, form \ho, first division ; the next two com- 
 panies the second division ; and so on to the left. 
 
 In all exercises and manoeuvres, every regiment, or 
 part of a regiment, composed of two or more companies, 
 is called a battalion. 
 
 Every regiment is provided with a color, which is 
 posted with its guard, to be designated hereafter, on the 
 left of the right centre company ; that company, and all 
 on its right, belongs to the right wing of the regiment, or 
 battalion ; the remaining companies constitute the left 
 icing. 
 
38 THE KKGDIENT. 
 
 To each regiment are attached a colonel, who com- 
 mands it, and is responsible for its general discipline and 
 instruction; a lieutenant-colonel, two majors, a quarter- 
 master, commissary, paymaster, surgeon, and frequently 
 an assistant surgeon, an adjutant, sergeant-major, quarter- 
 master-sergeant, and commissary sergeant. The four first 
 named of these officers are the field officers of the regi- 
 ment ; the others constitute its commissioned and non- 
 commissioned staff. 
 
 POSTS OF FIELD OFFICERS AND REGIMENTAL STAFF. 
 
 The field officers are supposed to be mounted, and 
 on active service must be on horseback; the adjutant, 
 when the battalion is manoeuvring, is on foot ; when on 
 the march, or in action, he is mounted. 
 
 The colonel's post is thirty paces in rear of the file- 
 closers, and opposite the centre of the battalion. The 
 lieutenant-colonel and senior major are behind the centres 
 of the right and left wing respectively, the junior major 
 behind the centre of the battalion, all twelve paces in 
 rear of the file-closers. 
 
 The adjutant and sergeant-major are opposite the 
 right and left of the battalion respectively, and eight 
 paces in rear of the file-closers. They assist the lieu- 
 tenant-colonel and major, respectively, in the manreuvres. 
 
 The quartermaster, surgeon, and other staff officers, 
 are in one rank on the left of the colonel, and three paces 
 in his rear. The quartermaster-sergeant is on a line with 
 the front rank of the field music, and two paces on its 
 right. 
 
 PIONEERS, FIELD MUSIC, AND BAND. 
 
 The pioneers (one for each company) are drawn up 
 in two ranks, and posted on the right, having their left 
 
THE KEGLMENT. 39 
 
 four paces from the right of the first company. A cor- 
 poral of pioneers, selected from the corporals by the 
 colonel, is posted on the right of the pioneers. 
 
 The field music (two musicians to each company) is 
 drawn up in four ranks, and posted twelve paces in rear 
 of the file-closers, the left opposite the centre company. 
 
 The principal musician is two paces in front of the 
 field music. , The regimental band, (not to exceed sixteen 
 musicians,) if there be one, is drawn up in two or four 
 ranks, according to its numbers, and posted five paces in 
 rear of the field music, having a principal musician at its 
 head. 
 
 COLOR GUARD. 
 
 The color guard of a regiment or battalion is com- 
 posed of eight corporals, posted on the left of the right 
 centre company, of which company, for the time being, 
 the guard forms a part. 
 
 The front rank is composed of a sergean^ selected by 
 the colonel, who is called the color-bearer, with the two 
 ranking corporals on his right and left ; the rear rank is 
 composed of the three corporals next in rank ; the three 
 remaining corporals are posted in rear in the rank of file^ 
 closers. The left guide of the color company, when the 
 three last named corporals are in the rank of file-closers, 
 is immediately on their left. 
 
 In battalions of less than five companies, there should 
 be no color guard, and no display of colors, except at re- 
 views. 
 
 GENERAL GUIDES AND MARKERS. 
 
 There should be two general guides in each battalion, 
 selected by the colonel from among the sergeants (other 
 than first sergeants) for their accuracy in marching. These 
 sergeants are denominated right and left general guide , 
 
40 THE REGIMENT. 
 
 respectively, and are posted in the line of file-closers ; the 
 first in rear of the right, and the second in rear of the left 
 flank of the battalion. 
 
 Three markers are required to every battalion ; they 
 are posted behind the first company in the rank of file- 
 closers, when the battalion is in line, and behind the lead- 
 ing company or division whenever it is in column. 
 
 TO FORM THE REGIMENT OR BATTALION. 
 
 At the signal, called the adjutant's call, the companies 
 are marched from the company parades by their captains, 
 the music playing. The color company serves as the basis 
 of the formation, and is the first to form ; the color guard 
 being at the point where the centre of the line is to rest, 
 one marker is placed in front of it, his elbow touching the 
 right corporal of the color guard, and another on the line 
 at a little less than company distance from him, on his 
 right, and facing towards him ; the color company is 
 halted three paces behind this line, faced to the front, and 
 dressed up upon the line by the captain, who aligns it to 
 the left. 
 
 The company on the left of the color is the next to 
 take its post ; it is halted three paces behind the line, its 
 right nearly behind the left file of the color guard, and 
 faced to the front. As soon as it halts, the left guide of the 
 company throws himself out, so as to be opposite one of 
 the three left files of the company, faces to the right, and 
 aligns himself upon the two markers ; the captain then 
 places himself on the left of the color guard, on a line with 
 its front rank, and aligns the company to the right. The 
 company on the right of the colors forms next upon the 
 same principles ; the right guide posts himself upon the 
 line opposite one of the three right files of the company, 
 
THE REGIMENT. 41 
 
 and faces to the left ; the captain places himself on the right 
 of the color company, and aligns his company to the left. 
 The remaining companies take their posts on the left 
 and right in succession, and when the formation is com- 
 plete, the adjutant commands, Guides post ; at this com- 
 mand the guides on the line retire to their places by 
 passing through the intervals between the companies, and 
 those captains who are on the left of their companies 
 shift to the right. 
 
 DRESS PARADE. 
 
 There shall be daily one dress parade, at troop or re- 
 treat, as the commanding officer may direct. 
 
 A signal will be beat or sounded half an hour before 
 troop or retreat, for the music to assemble on the regi- 
 mental parade, and each company to turn out under arms 
 on its own parade, for roll-call and inspection by its officers. 
 
 Ten minutes after that signal, the adjutant's call will 
 be given, when the captains will march their companies 
 (the band playing) to the regimental parade, where they 
 take their positions in line as directed. When the line is 
 formed, the captain of the first company, on notice from 
 the adjutant, steps one pace to the front, and gives to his 
 company the command, Order arms ; parade ; rest ; which 
 is repeated by each captain in succession to the left. The 
 adjutant takes post two paces on the right of the line ; the 
 sergeant-major two paces on the left. The music will 
 be formed in two ranks on the right of the adjutant. The 
 senior officer present will take the command of the parade, 
 and will take post at a suitable distance in front, opposite 
 the centre, facing the line. 
 
 "When the companies have ordered arms, the adjutant 
 will order the music to beat off, when it will commence 
 
42 THE REGIMENT. 
 
 on the right, beat in front of the line to the left, and back 
 to its place on the right. 
 
 When the music has ceased, the adjutant will step 
 two paces to the front, face to the left, and command : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Battalion. 3. Shoulder ARMS. 4. 
 Prepare to open ranks. 5. To the rear open order. 
 6. MARCH. 
 
 At the sixth command, the ranks will be opened ac- 
 cording to the system laid down in the Infantry Tactics, 
 the commissioned officers marching to the front, the com- 
 pany officers four paces, field officers six paces, opposite 
 to their positions in the order of battle, where they will 
 halt and dress. The adjutant, seeing the ranks aligned, 
 will command : 
 
 FRONT. 
 
 and march along the front to the centre, face to the right, 
 and pass the line of company officers eight or ten paces, 
 when he will come to the right-about, and command : 
 
 Present ARMS ; 
 
 when arms will be presented, officers saluting. 
 
 Seeing this executed, he will face about to the com- 
 manding officer, salute, and report, " Sir, the parade is 
 formed" The adjutant will then, on intimation to that 
 effect, take his station three paces on the left of the com- 
 manding officer, one pace retired, passing round his rear. 
 
 The commanding officer, having acknowledged the 
 salute of the line by touching his hat, will, after the adju- 
 tant has taken his post, draw his sword, and command : 
 
 1. Battalion. 2. Shoulder ARMS; 
 
 and add such exercises as he may think proper, concluding 
 with: 
 
 Order ARMS ; 
 
THE KEGIMKNT. 43 
 
 then return his sword, and direct the adjutant to receive 
 the reports. The adjutant will now pass round the right 
 of the commanding officer, advance upon the line, halt 
 midway between him and the line of company officers, 
 and command : 
 
 1. First Sergeants ', to the front and centre. 2. MARCH. 
 
 At the first command, they will shoulder arms as ser- 
 geants, march two paces to the front, and face inward. 
 At the second command, they will march to the centre, 
 and halt. The adjutant will then order : 
 
 1. Front FACE. 2. Report. 
 
 At the last word, each in succession, beginning on the 
 right, will salute by bringing the left hand smartly across 
 the breast to the right shoulder, and report the result of 
 the roll-call previously made on the company parade. 
 The adjutant again commands : 
 
 1. First Sergeants, outward FACE. 2. To your posts 
 MARCH ; 
 
 when they will resume their places, and order arms. The 
 adjutant will now face to the commanding officer, salute, 
 report absent officers, and give the result of the first ser- 
 geants' reports. The commanding officer will next direct 
 the orders to be read, when the adjutant will face about, 
 and announce : 
 
 Attention to Orders. 
 
 He will then read the orders. 
 
 The orders having been read, the adjutant will face to 
 the commanding officer, salute and report ; when, on an 
 intimation from the commander, he will face again to the 
 line, and announce : 
 
 Parade is Dismissed. 
 
4A THE KEGIMENT. 
 
 All the officers will now return their swords, face in- 
 wards, and close on the adjutant, he having taken position 
 in their line, the field officers on the flanks. The adjutant 
 commands : 
 
 1. front FACE. 2. Forward MARCH; 
 
 when they will march forward, dressing on the centre, 
 the music playing, and when within six paces of the com- 
 mander, the adjutant will give the word : 
 
 HALT. 
 
 The officers will then salute the commanding officer 
 by raising the hand to the cap, and there remain until he 
 shall have communicated to them such instructions as he 
 may have to give, or intimates that the ceremony is fin- 
 ished. As the officers disperse, the first sergeants will 
 close the ranks of their respective companies, and march 
 them to the company parades, where they will be dis- 
 missed, the band continuing to play until the companies 
 clear the regimental parade. 
 
 All field and company officers and men will be pres- 
 ent at dress parades, unless especially excused, or on 
 some duty incompatible with such attendance. 
 
 A dress parade once a day will not be dispensed with, 
 except on extraordinary and urgent occasions. 
 
 THE BATTALION IN COLUMN. 
 
 For the march, in many of the manoeuvres, etc., the 
 battalion is in column. The column may be one of com- 
 panies or of divisions, in rare instances it is one of pla- 
 toons. It may be a column right in front, in which case 
 the first company, or division, is in front, all the others 
 being behind it in regular succession ; or it may be a 
 
THE REGIMENT. 45 
 
 column left in front, in which the last company or di- 
 vision leads, the others following in the inverse order of 
 their numbers. 
 
 When the right is in front, the guides of the column 
 are habitually to the left, and to the right when the col- 
 umn is left in front. 
 
 The column may be one at full distance, at half dis- 
 tance, or closed in mass ; in the first case, the distance 
 between the guides of any two consecutive companies or 
 divisions ; in the second case, it is one-half the width of 
 the company or division ; and in the last case, that of 
 the column closed in mass, the distance between the 
 guides is six paces. 
 
 POSTS OF THE OFFICERS WHEN THE BATTALION IS IN COLUMN. 
 
 The colonel is on the directing flank, fifteen or twenty 
 paces from the guides, and abreast the centre of his bat- 
 talion ; the lieutenant-colonel is on the directing flank, 
 abreast with the leading company or division, and six 
 paces from the guide ; the majors are on the same flank, 
 the senior abreast with the rearmost company or division, 
 and six paces from the guide, the junior in a correspond- 
 ing position abreast the centre company ; the adjutant is 
 near the lieutenant-colonel, and the sergeant-major near 
 the senior major. 
 
 In a column of companies, the captains are two paces 
 in front of the centres of their companies ; the right guide 
 of each company is on the right of the front rank, the left 
 guide in a corresponding position on the left; the lieuten- 
 ants, and remaining sergeants, are in the rank of file-closers. 
 
 In a column of divisions, the senior captain of each 
 division is two paces in front of the centre of his division, 
 the junior captain in the interval between the two com- 
 
 
46 THE REGIMENT. 
 
 panies ; the right guide of the right company is on the 
 right of the front rank of the division, the left guide of 
 the left company is in a corresponding position on the 
 left ; the right guide of the left company is in the rear 
 rank, behind the junior captain, and the left guide of the 
 right company is in the rank of the file-closers. 
 
 Two or more regiments serving together constitute a 
 brigade, under the command of a brigadier-general. 
 
 Two or more brigades serving together constitute a 
 division, commanded by a major-general. 
 
 Two divisions serving together constitute an army 
 corps. 
 
 The army corps, when supplied with a due proportion 
 of cavalry, artillery, etc., comprises within itself all the 
 elements of a complete army, ready for any emergency. 
 
 The interval between two contiguous regiments in the 
 same brigade, division, or army corps, is twenty-two paces. 
 
 As often as one or more brigades or divisions, united 
 in the same line, manoeuvre together, each battalion will 
 be designated by its number, according to its position in 
 the line. The battalion on the right of the whole is de- 
 nominated ^rs/, that next on its left second, the following 
 one third, and so on to the battalion that closes the left of 
 the line. 
 
 In line of battle, the general (the senior major-general 
 present) has no fixed position ; he goes whithersoever he 
 may judge his presence necessary. 
 
 In column, he will hold himself habitually at its head, 
 in order to direct it according to his views. In the evo- 
 lutions, he will place himself at the point whence he can 
 best direct the general execution of the movement. 
 
 In line of battle, generals of division place themselves 
 at about seventy paces in rear of the centres of their di- 
 visions. 
 
THE REGIMENT. 4T 
 
 In column, they hold themselves on the directing flank, 
 abreast with the centres of their divisions, and at thirty 
 or forty paces from the guides. 
 
 In line of battle, generals of brigade place themselves 
 at about forty paces in rear of the centre of their brigades. 
 
 In column, they hold themselves at fifteen or twenty 
 paces outsidi the guides, and abreast with the centre of 
 their brigades. 
 
n 
 
 r- 
 
 CHAPTER V, 
 
 THE MARCH. 
 
 THE army corps drilled and organized on the princi- 
 ples thus far laid down, is in the condition for active ser- 
 vice, beginning with the march. 
 
 A badly conducted march is more injurious to the 
 health and morale of troops, than any other error that 
 can be committed in the progress of a campaign. If a 
 table of medical statistics could be formed from the his- 
 tory of various military campaigns, in which the casualties 
 incident to a march were divided from those actually oc- 
 curring in engagements, it would be found that a large 
 proportion were due to causes which might have been 
 easily prevented by the judicious management of the 
 troops on a march. Military commanders have given 
 to this subject too little reflection. There is no doubt 
 that the efficiency of French troops displayed throughout 
 every campaign, which illuminates the history of that na- 
 tion of soldiers, has been due in a great measure to their 
 capacity for maintaining a good physical condition. It is 
 wisdom, therefore, to profit by their example. 
 
 The commander of an expedition or of troops on a 
 march, should ascertain previous to moving his force, 
 
 1st. The exact quantity and quality of the provisions 
 in the hands of the commissary. 
 
THE MAKCH. 49 
 
 2d. The exact character and means of transportation. 
 
 3d. The exact quality and quantity of reserved cloth- 
 ing. 
 
 4th. The amount of reserved ammunition of all kinds. 
 
 5th. The character of the transportation for the sick, 
 and the quantity of hospital stores and medicines. 
 
 Should any of these be deficient, he should at once 
 take means to provide for the deficiency in some way at 
 the expense of a positive delay if necessary ; recklessness 
 in this respect is inexcusable, and a good commander will 
 never be guilty of it. 
 
 Besides the responsibility of the commanding officer 
 in this respect, a great deal depends upon the officers in 
 immediate command of regiments and companies. The 
 personal habits of the men should be carefully studied, in 
 order that carelessness or recklessness in regard to diet, 
 clothing, or unnecessary exposure to the climate should 
 be checked at once. 
 
 All of the preliminary arrangements for the march 
 having been carefully made, the " order of march " is 
 communicated to the several commanding officers of di- 
 visions, brigades and regiments ; but should not be pub- 
 lished in orders. The troops are distributed according to 
 the character of the country. In a very open country, a 
 large proportion of the cavalry would be at the head of 
 the column ; but generally it is distributed throughout 
 the line. The artillery should be in rear of the first foot 
 regiment. An advance and rear guard of mounted troops ; 
 one or two companies should be detailed each day, and 
 the regiment that has the right of the line one day, should 
 be the next day in the rear. 
 
 If the nature of the country will admit of it, more es- 
 pecially in passing defiles or mountain gorges, a few de- 
 tachments of flankers should be thrown out on the right 
 3 
 
50 THE MABCH. 
 
 and left of the column at the distance of one or two hun- 
 dred paces, to prevent ambuscades and to keep, a sharp 
 lookout, to give timely notice of any signs of the enemy. 
 
 The column having been formed at half or quarter 
 distance, and the baggage train assembled in the rear, 
 properly protected by a baggage guard selected from each 
 regiment for its own baggage ; the column is put in mo- 
 tion, and the march commences with precisely the same 
 regularity as would be observed by a regiment or regi- 
 ments moving in or out of a garrison town ; the bands 
 playing, the light-infantry with arms sloped, and those of 
 the riflemen slung over the shoulder, the officers with 
 swords drawn, and exact wheeling distances of the sec- 
 tions preserved, and perfect silence observed. 
 
 After having proceeded a short distance in this man- 
 ner, the word of command, " route step," is given by the 
 general at the head of the leading battalion, and this is 
 passed quickly on to the rear from company to company. 
 The captains, instead of continuing at the head of their 
 companies, drop back to the rear of them : the reasons 
 for allotting this station to them is, that they may see any 
 men of their respective companies who attempt to leave 
 the ranks without leave. The officers and non-commis- 
 sioned officers preserve the wheeling distance. The sol- 
 diers now carry their arms in any manner most conven- 
 ient. Some sling them over their shoulder, (most of 
 them, indeed, prefer this mode as the least fatiguing,) 
 others slope them, and many trail them, and they con- 
 stantly change from the right hand or right shoulder to 
 the left. Although allowed to prosecute the march in 
 this easy and unrestrained manner, a heavy penalty, 
 nevertheless, awaits the man who quits the ranks without 
 permission from the captain or officer commanding his 
 company. The captains are always provided with tickets 
 
THE MAECII. 51 
 
 bearing their own signature ; on each is written, " The 
 bearer has my permission to fall out of the ranks, being 
 unable to proceed with the regiment." Any soldier found 
 on the line of march by the rearguard, without a ticket, 
 is liable to be punished for disobedience of orders ; and 
 as no difficulty is ever experienced by men who are sick, 
 or used up, in procuring this certificate of inability to 
 keep up with their regiments, such offenders certainly 
 merit punishment. 
 
 If a soldier wants to fall out of the ranks for a few 
 minutes only, he is required to ask leave of the captain 
 to do so, and, moreover, to take off his knapsack, and to 
 give it, together with his musket, in charge of the men 
 of his own section, to be carried by them until he rejoins 
 them. This is an admirable order, and it operates in two 
 ways : first, the soldier is enabled, not being encumbered 
 with either knapsack or musket, more speedily to over- 
 take the column on its march ; and secondly, if he loiters 
 unnecessarily on the way to rejoin his comrades, who are 
 doubly armed with his arms and pack, he will be certain 
 to incur their displeasure. 
 
 About once in every hour and a quarter or half, a halt 
 is ordered, and ten or twelve minutes allowed for the 
 men to rest. When practicable, this is done on ground 
 near which there is water ; but it is almost unnecessary 
 to add, that very frequently it is not possible to find 
 such favorable spots. 
 
 Preparatory to these temporary halts, the word of 
 command, " Attention ! " is given at the head of the lead- 
 ing regiment, and passes on rapidly (as already stated) 
 from company to company. Upon this r the captains 
 move quickly from the rear of their companies to the 
 front ; the arms of the soldiers are regularly shouldered 
 or slung ; perfect silence is observed ; the dressing and 
 
52 THE MAKCH. 
 
 the wheeling distances of the sections are correctly kept ; 
 and in an instant there is a magical change from apparent 
 irregularity to most perfect discipline and order. 
 
 On resuming the march after these halts, the troops 
 observe the same extreme regularity during the first hun- 
 dred or two of yards. The words " route step " being 
 again given, they may carry their arms in any manner. 
 
 On approaching rivulets or shallow pieces of water, 
 which it is necessary should be passed, neither officers nor 
 soldiers are allowed to pick their way througn, nor is the 
 smallest break or irregularity permitted to exist in the 
 ranks ; but the column marches through by half-sections, 
 sections, or subdivisions, (according to the width of the 
 ford,) preserving the same order as if moving along a 
 road. 
 
 That this regulation is, on some occasions, too rigidly 
 enforced, has never been disputed ; still, the object at 
 which it aims, viz., that of expending as little time as 
 possible on each day's march, so as to give the soldiers 
 time to take their rest, pitch their tents or construct huts 
 in the bivouac, to draw their rations, and to cook their 
 meals, that they may be fresh for whatever fatigues hap- 
 pen to be in store for them, is indisputably a most de- 
 sirable one. 
 
 Those who have campaigned know, that in advancing 
 to attack an enemy, or in retiring before one, the passage 
 of rivers in the line of march, even if so deep as to reach 
 their middles, and under the fire of an enemy also, are 
 expected to be crossed by the troops without a greater 
 derangement taking place in their order of march than the 
 obstacles which they are in the act of encountering, must 
 necessarily produce in a greater or less degree. 
 
 With a detachment consisting of a few hundred men, 
 at a distance from an enemy, and with ample time before 
 
THE MAKCH. 53 
 
 them to get over their day's march, it will appear that 
 this order may well be dispensed with ; but with a divi- 
 sion of four or five thousand men, the case is widely dif- 
 ferent. 
 
 Let it be supposed that it has arrived at a stream 
 which admits of being passed by sections, subdivisions, 
 or even by companies ; and that, instead of proceeding 
 straight through it in this manner, every soldier is per- 
 mitted to pick his way across in any manner he may think 
 proper, and to break off from his place in the ranks, what 
 a vast loss of time this will occasion ! When would the 
 rear of the column have effected its passage ? Surely the 
 patience of those belonging to the front, centre, and rear 
 of this body of four thousand soldiers, will be pretty well 
 exhausted long before the opposite bank is gained by the 
 whole, and the march resumed. 
 
 In rugged and mountainous districts which armies 
 so frequently traverse, they encounter various defiles and 
 other obstacles, which preclude the possibility of their 
 being passed except by a very small number of men at a 
 time ; and the following mode is therefore adopted by 
 each company in making its way along : The first com- 
 pany of the leading battalion, as soon as it has disentan- 
 gled itself from the defile, or broken ground, is directed 
 to march forward, perhaps about a quarter of a mile ; 
 there to stack arms, and the men to rest. The head of the 
 next company, when it has cleared the defile, halts about 
 thirty or forty yards on the other side, until all the men 
 belonging to it come up in succession. This done, the 
 captain moves it forward independently until it joins the 
 leading company, where it stacks arms. Thus each com- 
 pany, as soon as it has cleared the obstacles, is brought 
 up en masse, and at a regular pace, without reference to 
 those in its rear. By these means, that most unmilitary 
 
54: THE MA-ROW, 
 
 exhibition of file after file running on, like a string of wild 
 geese, to catch those in their front, is entirely avoided. 
 
 Few things tend so effectually to fatigue and irritate 
 soldiers who are already jaded, as that of trotting on, 
 bending under the weight of knapsack, belts, and musket, 
 to overtake those who continue to march on in their front. 
 
 When the division is about to perform a march not in 
 the immediate vicinity of an enemy, the following ar- 
 rangements are made either for bivouacking or quarter- 
 ing it, (as the case may be,) so that no time shall be lost 
 after it has reached its destination : 
 
 A staff-officer, accompanied by the quartermaster of 
 the division, or (if other duties at that moment are re- 
 quired to be performed by the quartermaster) by a sub- 
 altern of each regiment, precede the troops on horseback, 
 so as to arrive long before them at the ground on which 
 they are to halt for the day, or at the town or village in 
 which it is intended they shall be quartered. 
 
 A whole street, or part of one, (as circumstances ad- 
 mit,) is allotted by the staff-officer to the quartermasters 
 for each of their regiments, who immediately divide the 
 street into equal portions for the different companies, re- 
 serving a house or two for the staff of the regiment. 
 
 A sergeant of every company of the division being 
 sent forward so as to arrive long before the troops, and 
 being told by his quartermaster how many and what 
 buildings are set apart for his own company, again sub- 
 divides the houses into four equal parts for each of the 
 sections. 
 
 In the event of any noise or disturbance taking place, 
 whether by day or by night, the probabilities are, that 
 the officers belonging to the companies where such irregu- 
 larities are going on, will certainly hear it, and as instan- 
 taneously put an end to it. 
 
THE MAKCH. 55 
 
 If, then, the division marches into a town, each com- 
 pany is by its sergeant conducted to the houses allotted 
 to it ; in which they are established in a very few min- 
 utes. It rarely happens, therefore, that the soldiers are 
 kept waiting in the streets for any length of time, as has 
 too often been the case. 
 
 Should it, on the other hand, be intended to encamp 
 the division, instead of putting it into houses, arrange- 
 ments of a similar nature are adopted, by sending forward 
 officers and sergeants to take up the ground ; by which 
 means each company marches at once up to its own ser- 
 geant, on whom they form in open column. 
 
 The rolls are immediately called ; the men first for 
 duty are warned for guards, (also inlying and outlying 
 pickets, if near the enemy,) for fatigue duties to draw the 
 rations, to procure wood for cooking if none is near at 
 hand, to go for water if no river flows near the encamp- 
 ment, etc., etc. 
 
 This done, and the alarm-post, or place of general as- 
 sembly, having been pointed out to every one, the men 
 are dismissed ; the arms stacked, the cooking immediately 
 commences, and all further parades are dispensed with for 
 the day, except a roll-call about sunset. 
 
 Parties to procure forage, whether green or dry, are 
 sent out in charge of an officer as soon as the troops are 
 dismissed. 
 
 Amongst the various regulations laid down for the 
 light-division, what are termed mule-guards must not be 
 omitted. 
 
 A corporal and three privates of every company, 
 mount guard at nightfall, whenever the division is en- 
 camped. The particular duty expected from the sentinels 
 of these company guards, is to keep an eye to the baggage 
 animals belonging to their officers, (which are picketed 
 
56 THE MARCH. 
 
 to the trees or fastened in some manner,) and to prevent 
 them from breaking loose. 
 
 After the establishment of these little guards, but few 
 instances will occur of whole troops of noisy mules, 
 horses, and asses, chasing each other round and through 
 the camp or bivouac, and galloping over the faces and 
 bodies of the soldiers whilst they are asleep. 
 
 Independent of their utility in this way, every com- 
 pany in the division, having its own. sentinel, is sure to 
 be instantly apprised of any alarm during the night from 
 the pickets in front ; and they are enabled, also, to com- 
 municate to their respective companies, without the least 
 delay, any orders arriving at the camp. 
 
 Those only who have witnessed it, can thoroughly 
 understand with what uncommon facility and despatch 
 the division can suddenly get under arms, form in column 
 of march, load the baggage, and proceed on the route 
 marked out for it. 
 
CHAPTER VI. 
 
 THE CAMP. 
 
 CAMP is the place where the troops are established in 
 tents, in huts, or in bivouac. Cantonments are the in- 
 habited places which troops occupy for shelter when not 
 put in barracks. The camping party is a detachment de- 
 tailed to prepare a camp. 
 
 Reconnoissances should precede the establishment of 
 the camp. For a camp of troops on the march, it is only 
 necessary to look to the health and comfort of the troops, 
 the facility of the communications, the convenience of 
 wood and water, and the resources in provisions and 
 forage. The ground for an intrenched camp, or a camp 
 to cover a country, or one designed to deceive the enemy 
 as to the strength of the army, must be selected, and the 
 camp arranged for the object in view. 
 
 The camping-party of a regiment consists of the regi- 
 mental quartermaster and quartermaster-sergeant, and a 
 corporal and two men per company. The general decides 
 whether the regiments camp separately or together, and 
 whether the police guard shall accompany the camping 
 party, or a larger escort shall be sent. 
 
 The ground selected for an encampment either on the 
 march or for a more permanent camp, should be such as 
 will enable, as near as possible, the following order to be 
 
58 THE CAMP. 
 
 carried out. Of course circumstances will compel a vari- 
 ation from it at times : 
 
 CAMP OF INFANTRY. 
 
 Each company has its tents in two files, facing on a 
 street perpendicular to the color line. The width of the 
 street depends on the front of the camp, but should not 
 be less than five paces.* The interval between the ranks 
 of tents is two paces ; between the files of tents of adja- 
 cent companies, two paces ; between regiments, twenty- 
 two paces. 
 
 The color line is ten paces in front of the front rank 
 of tents. The kitchens are twenty paces behind the rear 
 rank of company tents ; the non-commissioned staff and 
 sutler, twenty paces in rear of the kitchens ; the company 
 officers, twenty paces farther in rear ; and the field and 
 staff, twenty paces in rear of the company officers. 
 
 The company officers are in rear of their respective 
 companies ; the captains on the right. 
 
 The colonel and lieutenant-colonel are near the centre 
 of the line of field and staff; the adjutant, a major and 
 surgeon, on the right; the quartermaster, a major and 
 assistant-surgeon, on the left. 
 
 The police guard is at the centre of the line of the 
 non-commissioned staff, the tents facing to the front, the 
 stacks of arms on the left. 
 
 The advanced post of the police guard is about two 
 hundred paces in front of the color line, and opposite the 
 centre of the regiment, or on the best ground ; the pris- 
 oners' tent about four paces in rear. In a regiment of the 
 second line, the advanced post of the police guard is two 
 hundred paces in rear of the line of its field and staff. 
 
 * The pace is thirty inches, or two-and-a-half feet. 
 
PLAN OF ENCAMPMENT 
 IT or a Regiment of Infantry, 
 
 V\H^.. 
 
 :j Q Q El El E] 23 El 03 03 HI CO 123 El 03 U E3 E3 EH 
 
 j a Ej 311 D3Q1I 11 D 13 IHH Hil Hi HH 
 
 i mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm 
 
 mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm 
 
 NON-COM" STAFF. POLICE GUARD. SUTLER. NON-COM? STAFK 
 
 m xxn u m m 
 
 COMPANY OFFICERS. 
 
 m mm mm mm mm mm mm mm m m m m 
 
 AsTSuft"." MA-I. Q?M? IT COL. COL. AojT MAJ. SUR K . H 
 
 * 
 
 4-00 PACES. 
 
THE CAMP. 59 
 
 The horses of the staff officers and of the baggage train 
 are twenty-five paces in rear of the tents of the field and 
 staff; the wagons are packed on the same line, and the 
 men of the train camped near them. 
 
 The sinks of the men are one hundred and fifty paces 
 in front of the color line ; those of the officers one hun- 
 dred paces in rear of the train. Both are concealed by 
 bushes. When convenient, the sinks of the men may be 
 placed in rear or on a flank. A portion of the earth dug 
 out for sinks to be thrown back occasionally. 
 
 The front of the camp of a regiment of one thousand 
 men in two ranks will be four hundred paces, or one-fifth 
 less paces than the number of files, if the camp is to have 
 the same front as the troops in order of battle. But the 
 front may be reduced to one hundred and ninety paces 
 by narrowing the company streets to five paces ; and if 
 it be desirable to reduce the front still more, the^tents of 
 companies may be pitched in single file, those of a division 
 facing on the same street. 
 
 CAMP OF CAVALRY. 
 
 In the cavalry, each company has one file of tents; 
 the tents opening on the street facing the left of the camp. 
 
 The horses of each company are placed in a single file, 
 facing the opening of the tents, and are fastened to pickets 
 planted firmly in the ground, from three to six paces from 
 the tents of the troops. 
 
 The interval between the file of tents should be such, 
 that the regiment being broken into column of companies, 
 each company should be on the column extension of the 
 line on which the horses are to be picketed. 
 
 The streets separating the squadrons are wider than 
 those between the companies by the interval separating 
 
60 THE CAMP. 
 
 squadrons in line ; these intervals are kept free from any 
 obstruction throughout the camp. 
 
 The horses of the rear rank are placed on the left of 
 those of their file-leaders. 
 
 The horses of the lieutenants are placed on the right 
 of their platoons ; those of the captains on the right of 
 the company. 
 
 Each horse occupies a space of about two paces. The 
 number of horses in the company fixes the depth of the 
 camp, and the distance between the files of tents ; the 
 forage is placed between the tents. 
 
 The kitchens are twenty paces in front of each file of 
 tents. 
 
 The non-commissioned officers are in the tents of the 
 front rank. Camp followers, teamsters, etc., are in the 
 rear rank. The police guard in the rear rank, near the 
 centre of the regiment. 
 
 The fonts of the lieutenants are thirty paces in rear of 
 the file of their company ; the tents of the captains thirty 
 paces in rear of the lieutenants. 
 
 The colonel's tent thirty paces in rear of the captain's, 
 near the centre of the regiment ; the lieutenant-colonel 
 on his right ; the adjutant on his left ; the majors on the 
 same line, opposite the second company on the right and 
 left ; the surgeon on the left of the adjutant.* 
 
 The field and staff have their horses on the left of 
 their tents, on the same line with the company horses ; 
 sick horses are placed in one line on the right or left of 
 the camp. The men who attend them have a separate 
 file of tents ; the forges and wagons in rear of this file. 
 The horses of the train and of camp followers are in one 
 
 * When there is but one major to a regiment, the post of the colonel will 
 be in the centre of the regiment, on the line of the field and staff; and that of 
 the lieutenant-colonel in the right ^wintr, in place of the senior major. 
 
 
TJIE CAMP. 61 
 
 or more files extending to the rear, behind the right or 
 left squadron. The advanced post of the police guard is 
 two hundred paces in front, opposite the centre of the 
 regiment ; the horses in one or two files. 
 
 The sinks for the men are one hundred and fifty paces 
 in front, those for officers one hundred paces in rear of 
 the camp. 
 
 CAMP OF ARTILLERY. 
 
 The artillery is encamped near the troops to which 
 it is attached, so as to be protected from attack, and to 
 contribute to the defence of the camp. Sentinels for the 
 park are furnished by the artillery, and, when necessary, 
 by the other troops. 
 
 For a battery of six pieces the tents are in three files : 
 one for each section ; distance between the ranks of tents 
 fifteen paces ; tents opening to the front. The horses of 
 each section are picketed in one file, ten paces to the left 
 of the file of tents. In the horse artillery, or if the num- 
 ber of horses make it necessary, the horses are in two 
 files on the right and left of the file of tents. The kitchens 
 are twenty-five paces in front of the front rank of tents. 
 The tents of the officers are in the outside files of com- 
 pany tents, twenty-five paces in rear of the rear rank ; 
 the captain on the right, the lieutenant on the left. 
 
 The park is opposite the centre of the camp, forty 
 paces in rear of the officers' tents. 
 
 DUTIES IN CAMP AND GARRISON. 
 
 The duties in camp and garrison are to be conducted, 
 as far as practicable, in the same manner and on the same 
 principles. 
 
62 THE CAMP. 
 
 The Reveille is the signal for the men to rise, and the 
 sentinel to leave off challenging. 
 
 The Troop is to sound or beat at o'clock in the 
 morning, for the purpose of assembling the men for duty 
 and inspection at guard mounting. 
 
 The Retreat is to sound or beat at sunset, for the pur- 
 pose of warning the officers and men for duty, and for 
 reading the orders of the day. 
 
 The Tattoo is to be beat at o'clock in the evening, 
 after which no soldier is to be out of his tent or quarters, 
 unless by special leave. 
 
 Peas-upon-a-trencher, the signal for breakfast, is to 
 sound or beat at o'clock in the morning. 
 
 Roast-beef, the signal for dinner, is to sound or beat 
 at o'clock ; at other times it is the signal to draw pro- 
 visions. 
 
 The Surgeon's call is to sound or beat at o'clock, 
 when the sick, able to go out, will be conducted to the 
 hospital by the first sergeants of companies, who will 
 hand to the surgeon a report of all the sick in the com- 
 pany other than in hospital. The patients who cannot 
 attend at the dispensary will be immediately after, if not 
 before, visited by the surgeon. 
 
 The General is to beat, only when the whole army is 
 to march, and is the signal to strike the tents and prepare 
 for the march. 
 
 The Assembly is the signal to form by company. 
 
 To the color is the signal to form by battalion. 
 
 The March is for the whole to move. 
 
 The Long roll is the signal for getting under arms, in 
 case of alarm or the sudden approach of the enemy. 
 
 The Parley is to desire a conference with the enemy. 
 
THE CAMP. 63 
 
 ROLL CALLS. 
 
 There should be daily, at least three stated roll calls ; 
 viz., at reveille, retreat, and tattoo. They will be made on 
 the company parades by the first sergeants, superintended 
 by a commissioned officer of the company. The captains 
 should report the absentees, without leave, to the colonel or 
 commanding officer. 
 
 Immediately after reveille roll call, (after stable duty 
 in the cavalry,) the tents or quarters, and the space 
 around them, will be put in order by the men of the 
 companies, superintended by the chiefs of squads, and the 
 guard house or guard tent by the guard or prisoners. 
 
 The morning reports of companies, signed by the cap- 
 tains and first sergeants, will be handed to the adjutant 
 before eight o'clock in the morning, and will be consoli- 
 dated by the adjutant within the next hour, for the infor- 
 mation of the colonel ; and if the consolidation is to be 
 sent to higher authority, it will be signed by the colonel 
 and the adjutant. 
 
CHAPTER VII. , 
 
 GUARDS AND GUARD-MOUNTING. 
 
 ON a march continued from day to day the ceremony 
 of guard-mounting is dispensed with; the men being 
 notified the night before for the next day's guard ; and 
 the guards are formed immediately after the army is in 
 camp. On all other occasions the following forms are ob- 
 served : 
 
 At the first call for guard-mounting, the men warned 
 for duty turn out on their company parades for inspec- 
 tion by the first sergeants ; and, at the second call, re- 
 pair to the regimental or garrison parade, conducted by 
 the first sergeants. Each detachment, as it arrives, will, 
 under the direction of the adjutant, take post on the left 
 of the one that preceded it, in open order, arms shouldered 
 and bayonets fixed ; the supernumeraries five paces in the 
 rear of the men of their respective companies ; the first 
 sergeants in rear of them. The sergeant-major will 
 dress the ranks, count the files, verify the details, and 
 when the guard is formed, report to the adjutant, and 
 take two paces on the left of the front rank. 
 
 The adjutant then commands Front ; when the officer 
 of the guard takes post twelve paces in front of the cen- 
 tre ; the sergeants, in one rank, four paces in the rear of 
 
GUARDS AND GUARD-MOUNTING. 65 
 
 the officers ; and the corporals, in one rank, four paces 
 in the rear of the sergeants, all facing to the front. The 
 adjutant then assigns their places in the guard. 
 The adjutant will then command, 
 
 1. Officers and non-commissioned 2. About FACE. 
 
 officers. 3. Inspect your guards MARCH. 
 
 The non-commissioned officers then take their posts. 
 The commander of the guard then commands : 
 
 1. Order ARMS. 2. Inspection of ARMS ; 
 
 and inspects his guard. When there is no commissioned 
 officer on the guard, the adjutant will inspect it. During 
 inspection the band will play. 
 
 The inspection ended, the officer of the guard takes 
 post as though the guard were a company of a battalion, 
 in open order, under review ; at the same time, also, the 
 officers of the day will take post in front of the centre of 
 the guard ; the old officer of the day three paces on the 
 right of the new officer of the day, one pace retired. 
 
 The adjutant will then command, 
 
 1. Parade BEST. 2. Troop Beat Off ; 
 
 when the music, beginning on the right, will beat down 
 the line in front of the officer of the guard to the left, and 
 back to its place on the right, where it will cease to play. 
 The adjutant then commands, 
 
 l.Attention. 2. Shoulder ARMS. 3. Close order MARCH. 
 
 At the word " Close order," the officer will face about ; 
 at " March," resume his post in line. The adjutant then 
 commands : 
 
 Present ARMS ; 
 
 at which he will face to the new officer of the day, salute, 
 and report, " Sir, the guard is formed" The new officer 
 
66 GUAKDS AND GUARD-MOUNTING. 
 
 of the day, after acknowledging the salute, will direct the 
 adjutant to march the guard in review, or by flank, to 
 its post. But if the adjutant be senior to the officer of 
 the day, he will report without saluting with the sword 
 then, or when marching the guard in review. 
 
 In review the guard march past the officer of the day, 
 according to the order of review, conducted by the ad- 
 jutant, marching on the left of the first division; the 
 sergeant-major on the left of the last division. 
 
 When the column has passed the officer of the day, 
 the officer of the guard marches it to its post, the adjutant 
 and sergeant-major retiring. The music, which has 
 wheeled out of the column, and taken post opposite to 
 the officer of the day, will cease, and the old officer of the 
 day salute, and give the old or standing orders to the 
 new officer of the day. The supernumeraries, at the same 
 time, will be marched by the first sergeants to their re- 
 spective company parades, and dismissed. 
 
 In bad weather or at night, or after fatiguing marches, 
 the ceremony of turning off may be dispensed with, but 
 not the inspection. 
 
 Grand guards and other brigade guards are organized 
 and mounted on the brigade parade by the staff officers 
 of the parade, under the direction of the field officer of 
 the day of the brigade, according to the principles here 
 prescribed for the police guard of a regiment. The de- 
 tail of each regiment is assembled on the regimental pa- 
 rade, verified by the adjutant, and marched to the brigade 
 parade by the senior officer of the detail. After inspec- 
 tion and review, the officer of the day directs the several 
 guards to their respective posts. 
 
 The officer of the old guard, having his guard paraded, 
 on the approach of the new guard, commands : 
 Present ARMS. 
 
GUARDS AND GUARD-MOUNTING. 67 
 
 The new guard will march, in quick time, past the 
 old guard, at shouldered arms, officers saluting, and take 
 post four paces on its right, where, being alligned with 
 it, its commander will order : 
 
 Present ARMS. 
 
 The two officers will then approach each other and 
 salute. They will then return to their respective guards, 
 and command : 
 
 1. Shoulder ARMS. 2. Order ARMS. 
 
 The officer of the new guard will now direct the de- 
 tail for the advanced guard to be formed and marched to 
 its post, the list of the guard made and divided into three 
 reliefs, experienced soldiers placed over the arms of the 
 guard and at the remote and responsible posts, and the 
 young soldiers in posts near the guard for instruction in 
 their duties, and will himself proceed to take possession 
 of the guard-house or guard-tent, and the articles and 
 prisoners in charge of the guard. 
 
 During the time of relieving the sentinels and of call- 
 ing in the small posts, the old commander will give to 
 the new all the information and instruction relating to his 
 post. 
 
 The first relief having been designated and ordered 
 two paces to the front, the corporal of the new guard will 
 take charge of it, and go to relieve the sentinels, accom- 
 panied by the corporal of the old guard, who will take 
 command of the old sentinels, when the whole are relieved. 
 
 If the sentinels are numerous, the sergeants are to be 
 employed, as well as the corporals, in relieving them. 
 
 The relief, with arms at a support, in two ranks, will 
 march by a flank, conducted by the corporal on the side 
 of the leading front-rank man ; and the men will be num- 
 bered alternately in the front and rear rank, the man on 
 
68 GUARDS AND GUARD-MOUNTING. 
 
 the right of the front rank being No. 1. Should an of- 
 ficer approach, the corporal will command : Carry arms, 
 and resume the support arms when the officer is passed. 
 
 The sentinels at the guard-house or guard-tent will be 
 the first relieved and left behind ; the others are relieved 
 in succession. 
 
 When the sentinel sees the relief approaching, he will 
 halt and face to it, with his arms at a shoulder. At six 
 paces, the corporal will command : 
 
 1. Relief. 2. HALT; 
 
 when the relief will halt and carry arms. The corporal 
 will then add, No. 1," or No. 2," or No 3," accord- 
 ing to the number of the post : 
 
 Arms PORT. 
 
 The two sentinels will, with arms at port, then ap- 
 proach each other, when the old sentinel, under the di- 
 rection of the corporal, will whisper the instructions to 
 the new sentinel. This done, the two sentinels will shoul- 
 der arms, and the old sentinel will pass, in quick time, to 
 his place in rear of the relief. The corporal will then 
 command : 
 
 1. Support ARMS. 2. Forward. 3. MARCH ; 
 
 and the relief proceeds in the same manner until the whole 
 are relieved. 
 
 The detachments and sentinels from the old guard 
 having come in, it will be marched, at shouldered arms, 
 along the front of the new guard, in quick time, the new 
 guard standing at presented arms ; officers saluting, and 
 the music of both guards beating, except at the outposts. 
 
 On arriving at the regimental or garrison parade, the 
 commander of the old guard will send the detachments 
 composing it, under charge of the non-commissioned 
 
GUARDS AND GUARD-MOUNTING. 69 
 
 officers, to their respective regiments. Before the men 
 are dismissed, their pieces will be drawn or discharged at 
 a target. On rejoining their companions, the chiefs of 
 squads will examine the arms, etc., of their men, and 
 cause the whole to be put away in good order. 
 
 When the old guard has marched off fifty paces, the 
 officer of the new guard will order his men to stack their 
 arms, or place them in the arm-racks. 
 
 The commander of the guard will then make himself 
 acquainted with all the instructions for his post, visit the 
 sentinels, and question them and the non-commissioned 
 officers relative to the instructions they may have received 
 from other persons of the old guard. 
 
 Sentinels will be relieved every two hours, unless the 
 state of the weather or other causes should make it neces- 
 sary or proper that it be done at shorter or longer in- 
 tervals. 
 
 Each relief, before mounting, is inspected by the com- 
 mander of the guard or of its post. The corporal reports 
 to him, and presents the old relief on its return. 
 
 The countersign or watchword is given to such persons 
 as are entitled to pass during the night, and to officers, 
 non-commissioned officers, and sentinels of the guard. 
 Interior guards receive the countersign only when ordered 
 by the commander of the troops. 
 
 The parole is imparted to such officers only as have a 
 right to visit the guards and to make the grand rounds, 
 and to officers commanding guards. 
 
 As soon as the new guard has been marched off, the 
 officer of the day will repair to the office of the command- 
 ing officer and report for orders. 
 
 The officer of the day must see that the officer of the 
 guard is furnished with the parole and countersign before 
 retreat. 
 
70 GUARDS AND GUAKD-MOUNTESfG. 
 
 The officer of the day visits the guards during the day 
 at such times as he may deem necessary, and makes his 
 rounds at night, at least once after twelve o'clock. 
 
 Upon being relieved, the officer of the day will make 
 such remarks in the report of the officer of the guard as 
 circumstances require, and present the same at head- 
 quarters. 
 
 Commanders of guards leaving their posts to visit 
 their sentinels, or on other duty, are to mention their in- 
 tention, and the probable time of their absence, to the 
 next in command. 
 
 The officers are to remain constantly at their guards, 
 except while visiting their sentinels, or necessarily engaged 
 elsewhere on their proper duty. 
 
 Neither officers nor soldiers are to take off their cloth- 
 ing or accoutrements while they are on guard. 
 
 The officer of the guard must see that the countersign 
 is duly communicated to the sentinels a little before twi- 
 light. 
 
 "When a fire breaks out, or any alarm is raised in a 
 garrison, all guards are to bB immediately under arms. 
 
 Inexperienced officers are put on guard as supernu- 
 meraries, for the purpose of instruction. 
 
 Sentinels will not take orders or allow themselves to 
 be relieved, except by an officer or non-commissioned 
 officer of their guard or party, the officer of the day or 
 the commanding officer ; in which case the orders will be 
 immediately communicated to the commander of the 
 guard by the officer giving them. 
 
 Sentinels will report every breach of orders or regula- 
 tions they are instructed to enforce. 
 
 Sentinels must keep themselves on the alert, observing 
 every thing that takes place within sight and hearing of 
 their post. They will carry their arms habitually at sup- 
 
GUARDS AND GUARD-MOUNTING. 71 
 
 port, or on either shoulder, but will never quit them. In 
 wet weather, if there be no sentry-box, they will secure 
 arms. 
 
 No sentinel shall quit his post, or hold conversation 
 not necessary to the discharge of his duty. 
 
 All persons, of whatever rank in the service, are re- 
 quired to observe respect toward sentinels. 
 
 In case of disorder, a sentinel must call out, The 
 Guard! and if a fire takes place, he must cry " Fire ! " 
 adding the number of his post. If, in either case, the 
 danger be great, he must discharge his piece before call- 
 ing out. 
 
 It is the duty of a sentinel to repeat all calls made 
 from posts more distant from the main body of the guard 
 than his own, and no sentinel will be posted so distant as 
 not to be heard by the guard, either directly or through 
 other sentinels. 
 
 Sentinels will present arms to general and field officers, 
 to the officer of the day, and to the commanding officer of 
 the post. To all other officers they will carry arms. 
 
 When a sentinel, in his sentry-box, sees an officer ap- 
 proaching, he will stand at attention, and, as the officer 
 passes, will salute him, by bringing the left hand briskly 
 to the musket, as high as the right shoulder. 
 
 The sentinel, at any post of the guard, when he sees 
 any body of troops, or an officer entitled to compliment, 
 approach, must call, " Turn out the guard ! " and announce 
 who approaches. 
 
 Guards do not turn out, as a matter of compliment, 
 after sunset ; but sentinels will, when officers in uniform 
 approach, pay them proper attention, by facing to the 
 proper front and standing steady at shouldered arms. 
 This will be observed until the evening is so far advanced 
 that the sentinels begin challenging. 
 
72 GUARDS AND GUARD-MOUNTING. 
 
 After retreat, (or the hour appointed by the command- 
 ing officer,) until broad daylight, a sentinel challenges 
 every person who approaches him, taking, at the same 
 time, the position of arms port. He will suffer no person 
 to come nearer than within reach of his bayonet, until the 
 person has given the countersign. 
 
 A sentinel, in challenging, will call out, " Who comes 
 there ? " If answered, " Friend, with the countersign" 
 and he be instructed to pass persons with the countersign, 
 he will reply, " Advance, friend, with the countersign." 
 If answered " Friends" he will reply, " Halt, friends ! 
 Advance, one, with the countersign" If answered " Re- 
 lief," " Patrol," or "Grand, rounds," he will reply, "Halt ! 
 Advance, sergeant (or corporal), with the countersign" 
 and satisfy himself that the party is what it represents it- 
 self to be. If he have no authority to pass persons with 
 the countersign, if the wrong countersign be given, or if 
 the persons have not the countersign, he will cause them 
 to stand, and call, "Corporal of the guard ! " 
 
 In the daytime, when the sentinel before the guard 
 sees the officer of the day approach, he will call, "Turn 
 out the guard! Officer of the day!" The guard will be 
 paraded, and salute with presented arms. 
 
 When any person approaches a post of the guard at 
 night, the sentinel before the post, after challenging, causes 
 him to halt, until examined by a non-commissioned officer 
 of the guard. If it be the officer of the day, or any other 
 officer entitled to inspect the guard and to make the 
 rounds, the non-commissioned officer will call, "Turn out 
 the guard!" when the guard will be paraded at shoul- 
 dered arms, and the officer of the guard, if he thinks neces- 
 sary, may demand the countersign and parole. 
 
 The officer of the day, wishing to make the rounds, will 
 take an escort of a non-commissioned officer and two men. 
 
GUARDS AND GUARD-MOUNTING. 73 
 
 When the rounds are challenged by a sentinel, the ser- 
 geant will answer, " Grand rounds ! " and the sentinel 
 will reply, "Halt, grand rounds! Advance, sergeant, 
 with the countersign!" Upon which the sergeant ad- 
 vances and gives the countersign. The sentinel will then 
 cry, "Advance, rounds ! " and stand at a shoulder till they 
 have passed. 
 
 When the sentinel before the guard challenges, and is 
 answered, " Grand rounds," he will reply, "Halt, grand 
 rounds! Turn out the guard ; grand rounds !", Upon 
 which the guard will be drawn up at shouldered arms. 
 The officer commanding the guard will then order a ser- 
 geant and two men to advance ; when within ten paces, 
 the sergeant challenges. The sergeant of the grand rounds 
 answers, "Grand rounds!" The sergeant of the guard 
 replies, "Advance, sergeant, with the countersign ! " The 
 sergeant of the rounds advances alone, gives the counter- 
 sign, and returns to his round. The sergeant of the guard 
 calls to his officer, "The countersign is right! " on which 
 the officer of the guard calls, "Advance, rounds ! " The 
 officer of the rounds then advances alone, the guard stand- 
 ing at shouldered arms. The officer of the rounds passes 
 along in front of the guard to the officer, who keeps his 
 post on the right, and gives him the parole. He then ex- 
 amines the guard, orders back his escort, and, taking a 
 new one, proceeds in the same manner to other guards. 
 
 All material instructions given to a sentinel on post, 
 by persons entitled to make grand rounds, ought to 
 be promptly communicated to the commander of the 
 guard. 
 
 Any general officer, or the commander of a post or 
 garrison, may visit the guards of his command, and go 
 the grand rounds, and be received in the same manner as 
 prescribed for the officer of the day. 
 4 
 
74: GUAKDS AND GUARD-MOUNTING. 
 
 PICKET GUARD. 
 
 The picket guard is stationed at some advantageous 
 point in advance of the main body for the purpose of 
 watching the enemy, to intercept the passage of couriers 
 or small parties, to give notice of the approach of any 
 considerable force, and to intercept them, if possible, by 
 such a show as will cause sufficient delay to enable the 
 fact to be communicated at head-quarters. The strength 
 of a picket guard depends upon the position they are sent 
 to occupy, and the proximity of the enemy. The point 
 occupied should be susceptible of some defence. The 
 picket should be relieved every day ; if not, the fact should 
 be known when the guard is posted. 
 
 All out guards stand to arms at night on the approach 
 of patrols, rounds, or other parties ; the sentinel of the 
 arms will call them out. 
 
 The sentinels and videttes are placed on points from 
 which they can see furthest, taking care not to break their 
 connection with each other, or with their post. They are 
 concealed from the enemy as much as possible by walls 
 or trees or elevated ground. It is generally of more ad- 
 vantage not to be seen than to see far. A sentinel should 
 always be ready to fire, and when once satisfied of the 
 presence of an enemy, he should fire, although all defence 
 on his part were useless, since the safety of the post may 
 depend upon it. 
 
 PRISONERS. 
 
 The prisoners under charge of a guard should not be 
 allowed to hold extended communication with each other 
 or with the men on guard. They should be forced to 
 maintain the utmost decorum, and a disturbance of any 
 

 GUARDS AND GUARD-MOUNTING. 
 
 75 
 
 kind should be checked at once by the application of the 
 most efficient means. On the march the prisoners are 
 placed in charge of the old picket guard with bayonets 
 fixed and arms loaded. They march in the centre of the 
 regiment. On reaching camp, they are turned over to 
 the new guard as soon as posted. 
 
 LIST OF PKISONEES. 
 
 
 
 K 
 
 a 
 
 CJ 
 
 -M 
 
 c 
 
 O 
 
 Confined. 
 
 
 
 
 No. 
 
 Names. 
 
 & 
 
 
 
 When. 
 
 By 
 
 Charges. 
 
 Sentences. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 1 
 
 
 whom. 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 A. B. C., 
 
 Lieutenant 1st Regiment, 
 
 Commanding the Guard. 
 
 FORM OF GUARD REPORT. 
 
 Report of a Guard mounted at , on the , and relieved 
 on the . 
 
 Parole. 
 
 Lieutenants. 
 
 Sergeants. 
 
 Corporals. 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 Privates. 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 ? 
 
 Articles in 
 Charge. 
 
 Eec'd the forego- 
 ing articles : 
 
 A 1> 
 
 LUut. lat 
 JRegiment. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Detail. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
76 
 
 GUARDS AND GUARD-MOUNTING. 
 
 Q 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 3 
 
 B 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 ,3 
 
 
 2-d 
 
 I! 
 
 1 | 
 
 *N -^ 
 
 b g ^ 
 
 If' 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 O 
 
 w la 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 s 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 S -S -2 
 
 00 C5 O 
 rH 
 
 Sergeant W. V., Co. A., Regiment. 
 Corporal W-. X, Co. B., 
 Corporal Y. Z., Co. C., " 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 6 te M 
 
 i 
 
 fn" P5 H 
 
 0* s 02 
 
 2D RELIEF. 
 From to and to . 
 
 
 
 T3 TJ ^ 
 CO <M 10 
 
 Q 
 
 , 
 
 O 
 
 | 
 
 HH W" J^ 
 
 S 
 
 W S 
 
 M 
 
 B o 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 IIS 
 
 O 
 
 ^d 
 
 1 
 
 rjj ^ ^J 
 
 
 
 rH <M CO 
 
 rH <M CO 
 
CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 RATIONS, AND MODE OF COOKING THEM. 
 
 THE history of military campaigns develops no fact 
 more striking, than that a very large percentage of the 
 casualties are those of diseases incident to an improper 
 diet. Especially was this made evident in the Mexican 
 War among the volunteer troops : called suddenly from 
 the pursuits of civil life, and from the comforts and con- 
 veniences of home, they were transferred at once to a cli- 
 mate, different in every respect to that in which they had 
 always lived. Exposed to every change of weather, from 
 the intense heat of the plains, to the piercing cold of the 
 mountains ; sleeping constantly in the open air ; they 
 universally exhibited that want of discretion in regard to 
 their food, the manner of cooking it, and time of eating 
 it, which would naturally be expected from men who had 
 never been called upon to give the slightest thought to 
 the subject. 
 
 In the case of the regular troops, it was considered a 
 part of the duties of the officers in immediate command to 
 watch the soldiers in this particular, and to prevent them 
 from eating unripe fruit or other improper food, which 
 they procured along the march. This surveillance was 
 found to be the more necessary during the temporary oc- 
 
78 RATIONS, AND MODE OF COOKING THEM. 
 
 cupation of towns, as it was there so very easy to pro- 
 cure something to eat without the trouble of cooking it. 
 In addition to all this, it was found to be generally the 
 case that the ration was badly cooked at the regular mess, 
 owing to a want of knowledge of the time required for 
 the different articles of food to be properly cooked. 
 
 The Crimean War was another example of the same 
 fatal error, and so palpable did it become, that the War 
 Department of Great Britain was induced to send out to 
 the seat of war competent persons to instruct the troops 
 in the manner of cooking their rations. The beneficial 
 effects of this step were at once exhibited in the improved 
 condition of the health of the army. 
 
 With a view to obviate a large portion of discomfort 
 and disease in this particular, a number of receipts have 
 been prepared : 
 
 1st. For cooking the ration as issued to the troops ; 
 
 2d. For cooking such food, other than the ration, as 
 may be obtained in the field, and 
 
 3d. For hospital diets for the use of the sick. 
 
 The regular daily ration of food issued to the troops 
 in the United States service, is three-fourths of a pound 
 of pork or bacon, or one and a fourth pounds of fresh or 
 salt beef; eighteen ounces of bread or flour, or twelve 
 ounces of hard bread, or one and a fourth pounds of corn 
 meal, and at the rate, to one hundred rations, of eight 
 quarts of peas or beans, or, in lieu thereof, ten pounds of 
 rice ; six pounds of coffee ; twelve pounds of sugar ; four 
 quarts of vinegar, one and a half pounds of tallow, or one 
 and a fourth pounds of adamantine, or one pound sperm 
 candles ; four pounds of soap, and two quarts of salt. 
 
 On a campaign, or on marches, or on board transports, 
 the ration of hard bread is one pound. 
 
 Fresh beef, when it can be procured, should be fur- 
 
RATIONS, AND MODE OF COOKING THEM. 79 
 
 nished at least twice a week ; the beef to be procured, if 
 possible, by contract. 
 
 RECEIPTS. 
 
 1st. Soldiers' Soup for 25 men. 
 
 15 quarts of water to 25 pounds of meat, 2 small ta- 
 ble-spoonsful of salt, half a one of pepper. About 2 pounds 
 of rice put in while boiling, and what vegetables fresh or 
 preserved that can be procured say 3 pounds. 
 
 2d. PorJc Soup for 25 men. 
 
 In 6 gallons of cold water put 12 pounds of pork, 3 
 quarts of beans, 2 pounds of rice, season to suit ; let boil 
 one hour and a half. Soak the beans over night. 
 
 3d. Irish Stew for 25 men. 
 
 25 pounds of mutton, veal, beef or pork, cut into 
 pieces six inches square, 4 pounds of onions, 8 pounds po- 
 tatoes, 4 table-spoonsful of salt, 1 of pepper ; add 8 quarts 
 of water. Cook it from one to two hours slowly, thicken 
 the gravy with flour mixed into a smooth paste with water 
 or potatoes, mashed fine. 
 
 4th. Tea for 25 men. 
 
 Allow 12 quarts of water; put the rations of tea a 
 large teaspoonful to each in a cloth tied up very loosely, 
 throw it into the boiler while it is boiling hard for a mo- 
 ment. Then take off the boiler, cover it, and let it stand 
 full ten minutes, when it will be ready to use ; first add 
 sugar and milk if to be had, at the rate of 3 pints or 2 
 quarts of milk, and a pound or a pound and a half of 
 sugar. 
 
80 KATKXSTS, AND MODE OF COOKING THEM. 
 
 5th. Pork with Peas or Beans for 25 men. 
 
 To 14 pounds of pork add 6 pounds of peas or beans, 
 put them in a cloth to boil, tying it very loosely, place 
 them both in the boiler ; let them boil about two hours. 
 Then take out the pork, add some flour to the gravy, and 
 put the peas or beans in it with two or three onions cut. 
 up fine ; let it boil a little longer, mash up the vegetables 
 very finely, and serve them round the dish with the meat. 
 
 6th. Plain Stewed Meat for 25 men. 
 
 Take 14 pounds of mutton, beef, veal or pork, cut it 
 into chunks and put it in the boiler. Add 4 quarts of 
 water, 2 quarts to a teaspoonful of salt, and half a tea- 
 spoonful of pepper, 8 or 1 onions cut in pieces ; let it 
 boil half an hour, then let it stew slowly from half an hour 
 to an hour longer, adding 1 pound of rice, potatoes, or any 
 vegetable that can be obtained ; thicken the gravy with 
 flour mixed to a smooth paste in cold water. 
 
 7th. Stewed Salt Pork or Beef for 25 men. 
 
 Wash the meat well, let it soak all night, wash out the 
 salt as much as possible ; 8 pounds of salt beef, 5 pounds 
 of salt pork, 1 of a pound of sugar, 2 pounds of sliced 
 onions, 6 quarts of water, and a pound of rice ; let it sim- 
 mer gently for two or three hours. 
 
 8th. Salt Pork with Potatoes and Cabbage for 25 men. 
 
 Take 15 pounds of pork, extract the bones, 3 pounds 
 of potatoes, 2 winter cabbages, let it boil for two hours ; 
 10 quarts of water. Serve the meat with vegetables 
 round it. The gravy will make a good broth with peas, 
 beans, or rice added, also a little onion. Ship biscuit 
 broken into the broth makes a very nutritious soup. 
 
RATIONS, AND MODE OF COOKING THEM. 81 
 
 9th. To Fry any kind of Meat. 
 
 Get your frying-pan very hot, put in some fat pork 
 which will immediately melt, then put in the meat you 
 wish to fry, (a small teaspoonful of salt and a quarter of 
 a teaspoonful of pepper to every pound of meat.) When 
 done, lay the meat on a dish, add a pint of water to the 
 fat in the frying-pan, a few slices of onions, or 2 teaspoons- 
 ful of vinegar ; thicken it with a little flour and pour it 
 over the cooked meat. Any sauce, or a few chopped 
 pickles, may be substituted for the vinegar or onions. 
 
 10th. Coffee for 25 men. 
 
 Take 12 quarts of water, when it boils add 20 ounces 
 of coffee, mix it well and leave it on the fire till it com- 
 mences to boil ; then take it off, and pour into it a little 
 more than a quart of cold water ; let it stand in a warm 
 place full ten minutes ; the dregs will settle at the bottom 
 and the coffee be perfectly clear. Pour it then into an- 
 other vessel, leaving the dregs in the first ; add sugar, 4 
 teaspoonsful to the quart. If you can get milk, leave out 
 five quarts of water in the above receipt, and put milk in 
 its place. 
 
 llth. Peas or Bean Soup for 25 men. 
 
 Take 14 pounds of pork, 8 quarts of peas or beans, 20 
 quarts of water, 25 teaspoonsful of sugar, 12 of pepper, 
 and several large onions ; boil gently till the vegetables 
 are soft, from four to five hours. 
 
 12th. Receipt for a small quantity of mashed Meat. 
 
 Cut the meat in very small pieces ; heat the frying- 
 pan, put into it half a pint of water, half a teaspoonful of 
 salt, and a teaspoonful of flour, and let it cook fifteen min- 
 4* 
 
82 RATIONS, AND MODE OF COOKING THEM. 
 
 utes. Salt meat can be cooked the same, omitting the 
 salt ; in its place putting a small spoonful of sugar, spices, 
 or pickles, chopped fine, dish it on to some ship biscuit. 
 Steak, chops, sausages, bacon slices of any kind of meat 
 can be cooked in a frying-pan, with a little melted fat at 
 the bottom. Salt meat should always be soaked. 
 
 HOSPITAL DIETS. 
 
 No. 1. Semi-stewed Mutton and Barley Soup for 100 
 men. 
 
 Put in a convenient-sized caldron 130 pints of cold 
 water, 70 pounds of meat, or about that quantity, 12 
 pounds of plain mixed vegetables, (the best that can be 
 obtained,) 9 pounds 6 ounces of barley, 1 pound 7 ounces 
 of salt, 1 pound 4 ounces of flour, 1 pound 4 ounces of 
 sugar, 1 ounce of pepper. Put all the ingredients into 
 the pan at once, except the flour ; set it on the fire, and 
 when beginning to boil, diminish the heat, and simmer gen- 
 tly for two hours and a half; take the joints of meat out, 
 and keep them warm in the orderly's pan ; add to the 
 soup your flour, which you have mixed with enough water 
 to form a light batter ; stir well together with a large 
 spoon ; boil another half hour, skim off the fat, and serve 
 the soup and meat separate. The meat may be put back 
 into the soup for a few minutes to warm again prior to 
 serving. The soup should be stirred now and then while 
 making, to prevent burning or sticking to the bottom of 
 the caldron. 
 
 NOTE. The word " about " is applied to the half and full diet, 
 which varies the weight of the meat ; but - Ib. of mutton will 
 always make a pint of good soup : 3 Ibs. of mixed preserved vege- 
 tables must be used when fresh are not to be obtained, and put in 
 one hour and a half prior to serving, instead of at first ; they will 
 then show better in the soup, and still be well done. 
 
RATIONS, AND MODE OF COOKING THEM. 83 
 
 The joints are cooked whole, and afterwards cut up in 
 different messes ; being cooked this way, in a rather thick 
 stock, the meat becomes more nutritious. 
 
 All the following receipts may be increased to large 
 quantities, but by all means closely follow the weight 
 and measure. 
 
 No. 2. Beef Soup. 
 
 Proceed the same as for mutton, only leave the meat 
 in till serving, as it will take longer than mutton. The 
 pieces are not to be above 4 or 5 pounds weight, and for 
 a change half rice may be introduced ; the addition of 2 
 pounds more will make it thicker and more nutritive ; 
 ^ pound of curry powder will make an excellent change 
 also. To vary the same, half a pint of burnt sugar water 
 may be added ; it will give the soup a very rich brown 
 color. 
 
 No. 3. Beef Tea. Receipt for 6 pints. 
 
 Cut 3 pounds of beef into pieces the size of walnuts, 
 and chop up the bones, if any ; put it into a convenient- 
 sized kettle, with ^ pound of mixed vegetables, such as 
 onions, leeks, celery, turnips, carrots, (or one or two of 
 these, if all are not to be obtained,) one ounce of salt, a 
 little pepper, 1 teaspoonful of sugar, 2 ounces of butter, 
 half a pint of water. Set it on a sharp fire for ten minutes 
 or a quarter of an hour, stirring now and then with a 
 spoon, till it forms a rather thick gravy at bottom, but 
 not brown ; then add 7 pints of hot or cold water, but hot 
 is preferable ; when boiling, let it simmer gently for an 
 hour ; skim off all the fat, strain it through a sieve, and 
 serve. 
 
84: RATIONS, AND MODE OF COOKING THEM. 
 
 No. 4. Thick Beef Tea. 
 
 Dissolve a good teaspoonful of arrowroot in a gill of 
 water, and pour it into the beef tea twenty minutes before 
 passing through the sieve ; it is then ready. 
 
 No. 5. Strengthening Beef Tea with Calms-foot Jelly or 
 Isinglass. 
 
 Add ounce calves-foot gelatine to the above quantity 
 of beef tea previous to serving, when cooking. 
 
 No. 6. Mutton and Veal Tea. 
 
 Mutton and veal will make good tea by proceeding 
 precisely the same as above. The addition of a little aro- 
 matic herbs is always desirable. If no fresh vegetables 
 are at hand, use 2 ounces of mixed preserved vegetables 
 to any of the above receipts. 
 
 No. 7. -Chicken Broth. 
 
 Put in a stew-pan a fowl, 3 pints of water, 2 tea- 
 spoonsful of rice, 1 teaspoonful of salt, a middle-sized 
 onion, or 2 ounces -of mixed vegetables ; boil the whole 
 gently for three-quarters of an hour ; if an old fowl, sim- 
 mer from one hour and a half to two hours, adding one 
 pint more water ; skim off the fat, and serve. A small 
 fowl will do. 
 
 NOTE. A light mutton broth may be made precisely the same, 
 by using a pound and a half of scrag of mutton instead of fowl. 
 
 For thick mutton broth proceed as for thick beef tea, omitting 
 the rice ; a table-spoonful of burnt sugar water will give a rich 
 color to the broth. 
 
 No. 8. Plain Boiled Rice. 
 
 Put 2 quarts of water in a stew-pan, with a teaspoon- 
 ful of salt ; when boiling, add to it J pound of rice, well 
 
RATIONS, AND MODE OF COOKING THEM. 85 
 
 washed ; boil for ten minutes, or till each grain becomes 
 rather soft ; drain it into a colander, slightly grease the 
 pot with butter, and put the rice back into it ; let it swell 
 slowly for about twenty minutes near the fire, or in a 
 slow oven ; each grain will then swell up, and be well 
 separated ; it is then ready for use. 
 
 No. 9. Sweet Rice. 
 
 Add to the plain boiled rice 1 ounce of butter, 2 table- 
 spoonsful of sugar, a little cinnamon, a quarter of a pint 
 of milk ; stir it with a fork, and serve ; a little currant- 
 jelly or jam may be added to the rice. 
 
 No. 10. Rice with Gravy. 
 
 Add to the rice 4 table-spoonsful of the essence of 
 beef, a little butter, if fresh, half a teaspoonful of salt ; 
 stir together with a fork, and serve. 
 
 No. 11. Plain Oatmeal. 
 
 Put in a pan J pound of oatmeal, 1 ounce of sugar, 
 half a teaspoonful of salt, and 3 pints of water ; boil slowly 
 for twenty minutes, stirring continually, and serve. A 
 quarter of a pint of boiled milk, an ounce of butter, and a 
 little pounded cinnamon or spico added previous to serv- 
 ing, is a good variation. 
 
 This receipt has been found most useful at the com- 
 mencement of dysentery, by medical authorities. 
 
 No. 12. Calves-foot Jelly. 
 
 Put in a proper-sized stew-pan 2J ounces of calves-foot 
 gelatine, 4 ounces of white sugar, 4 whites of eggs and 
 shells, the peel of a lemon, the juice of 3 middle-sized 
 lemons, half a pint of Marsala wine ; beat all well together 
 
86 RATIONS, AND MODE OF COOKING THEM. 
 
 with the egg-beater for a few minutes, then add 4^ pints 
 of cold water ; set it on a slow fire, and keep whipping it 
 till boiling. Set it on the corner of the stove, partly cov- 
 ered with the lid, upon which you place a few pieces of 
 burning charcoal ; let it simmer gently for ten minutes, 
 and strain it through a jelly-bag. It is then ready to put 
 in the ice or some cool place. Sherry will do if Marsala 
 is not at hand. 
 
 For orange jelly use only 1 lemon and 2 oranges. 
 Any delicate flavor may be introduced. 
 
 Jelly Stock, 
 
 made from calves' feet, requires to be made the day pre- 
 vious to being used, requiring to be very hard to extract 
 the fat. Take two calves' feet, cut them up, and boil in 3 
 quarts of water ; as soon as it boils remove it to the cor- 
 ner of the fire, and simmer for five hours, keeping it skim- 
 med ; pass through a hair-sieve into a basin, and let it re- 
 main until quite hard ; then remove the oil and fat, and 
 wipe the top dry. Place in a stew-pan half a pint of 
 water, 1 of sherry, half a pound of lump sugar, the juice 
 of 4 lemons, the rinds of 2, and the whites and shells of 
 5 eggs ; whisk until the sugar is melted, then add the 
 jelly, place it on the fire, and whisk until boiling, pass it 
 through a jelly-bag, pouring that back again which comes 
 through first, until quite clear ; it is then ready for use, 
 by putting it in moulds or glasses. Vary the flavor ac- 
 cording to fancy. 
 
 No. IB. Sago Jelly. 
 
 Put into a pan 3 ounces of sago, 1|- ounce of soft 
 sugar, half a lemon peel cut very thin, ^ teaspoonful of 
 ground cinnamon, or a small stick of the same ; put to it 
 
RATIONS, AND MODE OF COOKING THEM. 87 
 
 3 pints of water and a little salt ; boil ten minutes, or 
 rather longer, stirring continually until rather thick, then 
 add a little port, sherry, or Marsala wine ; mix well, and 
 serve hot or cold. 
 
 No. 14. Arrowroot Milk. 
 
 Put into a pan 4 ounces of arrowroot, 3 ounces of su- 
 gar, the peel of half a lemon, |- teaspoonful of salt, 2^ 
 pints of milk ; set it on the fire, stir round gently, boil 
 for ten minutes, and serve. If no lemons are at hand, a 
 little essence of any kind will do. 
 
 When short of milk, use half water ; half an ounce of 
 fresh butter is an improvement before serving. If required 
 thicker, put a little milk. 
 
 No. 15. Thick Arrowroot Panada. 
 
 Put in a pan 5 ounces of arrowroot, 2J ounces of white 
 sugar, the peel of half a lemon, a quarter of a teaspoonful 
 of salt, 4 pints of water ; mix all well, set on the fire, 
 boil for ten minutes ; it is then ready. The juice of a 
 lemon is an improvement ; a gill of wine may also be in- 
 troduced, and -J- ounce of calves-foot gelatine previously 
 dissolved in water will be strengthening. Milk, however, 
 is preferable, if at hand. 
 
 No. 16. Arrowroot Water. 
 
 Put into a pan 3 ounces of arrowroot, 2 ounces of 
 white sugar, the peel of a lemon, J teaspoonful of salt, 4 
 pints of water ; mix well, set on the fire, boil for ten min- 
 utes. It is then ready to serve either hot or cold. 
 
 No. 17. Rice Water. 
 
 Put 7 pints of water to boil, add to it 2 ounces of rice 
 washed, 2 ounces of sugar, the peel of two-thirds of a lem- 
 
88 RATIONS, AKD MODE OF COOKIXG THEM. 
 
 on ; boil gently for three-quarters of an hour ; it will re- 
 duce to 5 pints ; strain through a colander ; it is then 
 ready. 
 
 The rice may be left in the beverage or made into a 
 pudding, or by the addition of a little sugar or jam, will 
 be found very good for either children or invalids. 
 
 No. 18. Barley Water. 
 
 Put in a saucepan 7 pints of water, 2 ounces of barley, 
 which stir now and then while boiling ; add 2 ounces of 
 white sugar, the rind of half a lemon, thinly peeled ; let 
 it boil gently for about two hours, without covering it ; 
 pass it through a sieve or colander ; it is then ready. 
 The barley and lemon may be left in. 
 
 No. 19. Plain Lemonade. 
 
 Thinly peel the third part of a lemon, which put into 
 a basin with 2 table-spoonsful of sugar ; roll the lemon 
 with your hand upon the table to soften it ; cut it into 
 two, lengthwise, squeeze the juice over the peel, &c., stir 
 round for a minute with a spoon to form a sort of syrup ; 
 pour over a pint of water, mix well, and remove the pips ; 
 it is then ready for use. If a very large lemon, and full 
 of juice, and very fresh, you may make a pint and a half 
 to a quart, adding sugar and peel in proportion to the in- 
 crease of water. The juice only of the lemon and sugar 
 will make lemonade, but will then be deprived of the 
 aroma which the rind contains, the said rind being gen- 
 erally thrown away. 
 
 No. 20. Semi-citric Lemonade. Receipt for 50 pints. 
 
 Put 1 ounce of citric acid to dissolve in a pint of wa- 
 ter ; peel 20 lemons thinly, and put the peel in a large 
 
RATIONS, AND MODE OF COOKING THEM. 89 
 
 vessel, with 3 pounds 2 ounces of white sugar well broken ; 
 roll each lemon on the table to soften it, which will facili- 
 tate the extraction of the juice ; cut them into two, and 
 press out the juice into a colander or sieve, over the peel 
 and sugar, then pour half a pint of water through the 
 colander, so as to leave no juice remaining ; triturate the 
 sugar, juice, and peel together for a minute or two with a 
 spoon, so as to form a sort of syrup, and extract the aroma 
 from the peel and the dissolved citric acid ; mix all well 
 together, pour on 50 pints of cold water, stir well togeth- 
 er ; it is then ready. A little ice in summer is a great 
 addition. 
 
 No. 21. Cheap Lemonade. 
 
 Put into a basin 2 table-spoonsful of white or brown 
 sugar, half a table-spoonful of lime juice ; mix well togeth- 
 er for one minute, add 1 pint of water, and the beverage 
 is ready. A drop of rum will make a good variation, as 
 lime juice and rum are daily issued to the soldiers. 
 
 No. 22. Tartaric Lemonade. 
 
 Dissolve 1 ounce of crystallized tartaric acid in a pint 
 of cold water, which put in a large vessel ; when dis- 
 solved, add 1 pound 9 ounces of white or brown sugar 
 the former is preferable ; mix well to form a thick syrup ; 
 add to it 24 pints of cold water, slowly mixing well ; it 
 is then ready. 
 
 It maybe strained through either a colander or a jelly- 
 bag ; if required very light, add 5 pints more water, and 
 sugar in proportion ; if citric acid be used, put only 20 
 pints of water to each ounce. 
 
90 KATIONS, AND MODE OF COOKING- THEM. 
 
 No. 23. Toast and Water. 
 
 Cut a piece of crusty bread, about ^ pound in weight, 
 place it upon a toasting-fork, and hold it about six inches 
 from the fire ; turn it often, and keep moving it gently 
 until of a light yellow color, then place it nearer the fire, 
 and when of a good brown chocolate color, put it in a jug 
 and pour over 3 pints of boiling water ; cover the jug 
 until cold, then strain it in a clean jug, and it is ready for 
 use. Never leave the toast in it, for in summer it would 
 cause fermentation in a short time. I would almost ven v 
 ture to say that such toast and water should be made, anc| 
 that it would keep good a considerable time in bottles. 
 
 THE CAMP STOVE. 
 
 The arrangements for cooking the rations on a march 
 or in camp, are always more or less annoying to troops. 
 Coming into camp perhaps during a storm after a long 
 day's march, the men have to wait for their supper until 
 a party has been despatched with a team sometimes sev- 
 eral miles to procure fuel, this more frequently green 
 wood than dry. After the fuel arrives and a fire is kin- 
 dled, it takes a long time before the food is cooked. In 
 the meanwhile, wet, weary, and half sick, the men are 
 waiting for their supper. If this could be given to them 
 at once, and they could go to their tents and rest, how 
 much more fitted they would be for duty the next morn, 
 ing, and how much smaller would be the sick report. A 
 great portion of this discomfort would be obviated by 
 the use of a camp stove, a drawing of which is shown in 
 plate . Two of these stoves to a company are sufficient. 
 All the necessary kettles and utensils accompany it, in- 
 cluding gridiron, frying-pan, griddle, and bake-oven. 
 
The l?orta~ble Field Cooking Stove. 
 
RATIONS, AND MODE OF COOKING THEM. 91 
 
 Light and portable, the whole is fitted into a cask which 
 secures its transportation without fear of injury. The 
 fire is made in a few moments from a few short faggots 
 which are placed in the stove when starting on the march 
 in the morning after breakfast ; so that, in half an hour 
 after coming into camp, the men may all have hot coffee, 
 and go to bed. This stove is made in New York, and 
 may be procured from the agent, No. 13 Broadway. 
 
 PRESERVED MEATS AND OTHER FOOD. 
 
 The great difficulty of transporting provisions in bulk 
 without their becoming damaged by exposure to the wet, 
 and therefore unfit for use, causing serious inconvenience, 
 and often impeding materially the operations of a cam- 
 paign, renders it eminently desirable that such food, as- 
 similating to the ration, as can be prepared in a condensed 
 form should be procured. Samples of preserved and con- 
 densed food have been submitted to careful examination 
 and test by competent and reliable officers, and found to 
 answer all the purposes for which they are intended, and 
 can therefore be safely recommended for campaign use. 
 
CHAPTER IX. 
 
 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 FIELD WORKS are any constructions which have for their 
 object to impede the advance of an enemy, or to enable 
 an inferior force to maintain their position against the at- 
 tack of a superior number. 
 
 The name of field fortification is applied to a work 
 which is composed of an embankment of earth called a 
 " parapet," and an excavation called a " ditch," on the 
 exterior side, w T hich last furnishes the earth for the em- 
 bankment. 
 
 The outline or form of the work varies with the char- 
 acter of the ground, the circumstances under which it is 
 constructed, the strength of the force, and particular char- 
 acter of the defence. The profile or shape of the embank- 
 ment or parapet is usually the same in all cases. 
 
 "When the ground about a work within effective range 
 of the fire-arms of the attacking party is quite flat, the 
 height, called the " command " of the work, must be at 
 least 7 feet 6 inches, in order that the defenders may be 
 covered from the fire of men on horseback that class of 
 troops being able to discharge their arms at 7 feet 6 inches 
 above the ground. 
 
 Unimportant works, or such as are situated on higher 
 ground than that within effective artillery range, may 
 have their parapets as low as 6 feet, or even 5 feet. 
 
Profile and. Outline of a Bastion Front Field "Worls. 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 93 
 
 Fig. 1. Plate 2 shows the ordinary form of the 
 profile of an intrenchment, in soils of which the natural 
 slope is one perpendicular to one base. 
 
 A B C D E F is the profile of the Parapet. 
 
 G H I K the profile of the Ditch. 
 
 L M X the profile of the Glacis. 
 
 A B the Banquette Slopes. 
 
 B C Tread of the Banquette. 
 
 C D the Interior Slope. 
 
 D E the Superior Slope. 
 
 E F the Exterior Slope. 
 
 F G the Berm. 
 
 G II the Scarp. 
 
 H I the Bottom of the Ditch. 
 
 I K the Counterscarp. 
 
 A the Foot of the Banquette Slope. 
 
 B the Crest of the Banquette. 
 
 C the Foot of the Interior Slope. 
 
 D the Interior Crest. 
 
 E the Exterior Crest. 
 
 F the Foot of the Exterior Slope. 
 
 G the Crest of the Scarp. 
 
 H the Foot of the Scarp. 
 
 I the Foot of the Counterscarp. 
 
 K the Crest of the Counterscarp. 
 
 M the Crest of the Glacis. 
 
 N the Foot of the Glacis. 
 
 Fig. 2 shows the general plan of intrenchments with 
 flanking arrangements. 
 
 A B and E F P are the Advanced Parts. 
 
 B C D E are the Retired Parts. 
 
 A 0, A B, E F, and F P are the Faces. 
 
 B C and D E are the Flanks. 
 
 C D the Curtains. 
 
 A D and C F the Lines of Defence. 
 
 A B and E F P are the Salient Angles. 
 
 BCD and C D E the Re-entering Angles. 
 
 A D F and B C F the Angles of Defence. 
 
 b A c and e F g the Sectors without Fire. 
 
 L M and N R the Capitals. 
 
 Sometimes the parapet* is formed of earth taken from 
 
 * In this manner cover for troops may be very quickly obtained, with the 
 advantage of having the power to advance over the parapet in order of battle 
 when occasion offers. 
 
 
9i FIELD FOETIFICATIONS. 
 
 an excavation or trench inside of it ; in this case a parapet 
 may be as low as 3 feet, because, then, the defenders 
 standing in the trench of equal depth, and close behind 
 the parapet, are sufficiently covered by it. < 
 
 Should there be ground near the position to be forti- 
 fied, higher than that on which the parapet stands, the 
 latter must then have a greater command than 7 feet 6 
 inches, but in the more simple kind of field works the 
 command does not exceed 12 feet ; for as soldiers cannot 
 easily throw earth with a shovel to a greater height than 
 6 feet, and as other means are generally wanting in the 
 field, it is evident that the height of a parapet for such a 
 work, must be limited by the capability of executing it 
 with shovels and pickaxes by two parties of men, one 
 standing on a level 6 feet above the other. The same 
 reason determines the greatest depth of ditch to be 12 
 feet, a scaffolding being necessary at 6 feet above the bot- 
 tom of the ditch to receive the earth which is thrown from 
 thence ; the earth is then thrown up to the level of the 
 ground, by other laborers placed on the scaffolding. 
 
 In the construction of field works it should always be 
 recollected that a great command of parapet not only 
 requires additional means, trouble, and time to throw up 
 the earth, but also renders necessary an increased mass 
 of earth for the banquette, which may thus encumber the 
 interior of the work. 
 
 To obviate, as much as possible, the latter evil, it is 
 usual to mount the banquette by steps, when the parapet 
 has a greater command than 8 feet. 
 
 The thickness of the parapets of field works must be 
 regulated by the description of arms likely to be employed 
 against them ; in order, therefore, that they may afford a 
 reasonable degree of resistance to repeated firing, the 
 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 95 
 
 thickness of parapets must somewhat exceed the penetra- 
 tion of the shot which may be used in the attack. 
 
 Penetration of shot. Thickness of parapet. 
 Musket ball, 10 to 18 inches. 3 feet. 
 
 6 pounder, 3| to 4 feet. 6 feet. 
 
 9 pounder, 6 to 7 feet. 8 or 9 feet. 
 
 12 pounder, 8| to 10 feet. 10 or 12 feet. 
 
 It is found by experiment that loose earth resists the 
 penetration of shot just as well as that which has been 
 rammed together. 
 
 Although a musket ball penetrates, at most, only 18 
 inches into earth, musketry parapets require to be 
 made 3 feet thick, in order that they may be sufficiently 
 substantial to preserve the requisite height, notwithstand- 
 ing the action of the weather. 
 
 Heavier guns than 12-pounders are rarely brought 
 into the field, consequently 12 feet may be considered as 
 the greatest thickness of a parapet ; and it has been shown 
 that, for the simpler works, 12 feet is the greatest com- 
 mand of a parapet, and likewise the greatest depth of a 
 ditch. 
 
 The exterior side of a parapet is formed with a slope 
 which has a base equal to its height, that being the in- 
 clination which (ordinary) earth assumes when thrown up 
 loosely ; and, therefore, it is the most advantageous form 
 for a mass of earth whose sides are unsupported. 
 
 The interior slope of a parapet has a base not greater 
 than one-third or one-fourth of its height, in order to allow 
 the men to approach near the crest, and to fire over the 
 parapet with ease. 
 
 As newly moved earth will not remain at such a steep 
 slope without support, it must be retained in that state 
 by a- revetment. 
 
 The REVETMENT is commonly made with gabions, fas- 
 
96 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 cines, sand-bags, or sods of turf; or again with hurdles, 
 casks, trunks of trees, and occasionally with doors, shut- 
 ters, &c., from any neighboring houses. Trunks of trees 
 are objectionable as a revetment for the interior slope, on 
 account of the splinters that fly from them when struck 
 by shot ; and large trees, laid horizontally to revet the 
 escarp or counterscarp, are defective, because they serve 
 as steps for the assailants. 
 
 GABIONS are strong cylindrical baskets without top or 
 bottom, 2 feet in diameter, and 2 feet 9 inches in height. 
 These are placed in rows along the line of work at an 
 inclination corresponding to the required slope, and then 
 filled with earth. To make a gabion, from eight to four- 
 teen pickets, 3 feet 6 inches long, are fixed upright in the 
 ground, at equal distances, in the circumference of a circle, 
 1 foot 11 inches in diameter ; flexible twigs (or rods) are 
 then interwoven with the upright pickets, commencing 
 with three rods at the bottom, and weaving each in succes- 
 sion outside of two pickets and inside of one ; as the twigs 
 (or rods) are expended, others are added, and the basket 
 work continued to the height of 2 feet 9 inches ; this work 
 (which is called the web) is sewn in three or four parts, 
 from top to bottom ; withes, (called gads,) or spun-yarn 
 being used for that purpose, in order to keep it from 
 coming off the pickets ; the ends of these are then cut off, 
 about an inch from the web. A gabion, thus made, stands 
 3 feet high in the revetment, and weighs from 36 to 40 Ibs. 
 The best wood for the web, and particularly for the gads, 
 is willow and hazel. 
 
 FASCINES are military faggots, 18 feet long and 9 
 inches in diameter : they can be sawed into shorter lengths, 
 and are sometimes made only 6 feet long. 
 
 To make a fascine, two trestles (like a St. Andrew's 
 cross) are fixed in the ground at 16 feet apart; then 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 97 
 
 three or four other trestles (according to the length and 
 thickness of the brushwood) are placed at equal distances 
 between the two first trestles, and in a direct line with 
 them ; brushwood is next laid along the trestles, (the 
 smallest inside,) so as to project 17 or 18 inches beyond 
 the extreme trestles, and is compressed to a diameter of 
 9 inches by means of an instrument called a choker ;* the 
 brushwood is bound with gads, (before the choker is re- 
 laxed,) at 6 inches beyond the extreme trestles, and at in- 
 termediate intervals of 15 inches, and the ends of the 
 fascine are sawed off square, at 1 foot beyond the extreme 
 trestles. v 
 
 FASCINE GADS are tough and flexible twigs, 5 feet long, 
 very much twisted to render them fit for tying. A squad 
 of five men can, in an hour, make a fascine which weighs 
 (when of tolerably dry material) from 140 to 160 Ibs. 
 If, however, the brushwood is green, and much thicker 
 than a man's thumb, it will weigh 200 Ibs. The fascines 
 forming a revetment are fastened in their position, (one 
 above another,) by pickets 3J or 4 feet long, which are 
 driven obliquely downwards through the fascine so as to 
 form an angle of 45 with the slope. The pickets should 
 be in the proportion of 6 to an 18-inch fascine, of which 
 two are driven vertically, in order to fasten each fascine 
 to that which is beneath it. 
 
 Two gabions make nearly the same quantity of revet- 
 ment as an 18-inch fascine, and consume but half the 
 quantity of materials ; moreover, they require only com- 
 mon laborers to form them into a revetment, and stand in 
 their positions without pickets or other fastening ; they also 
 make a more durable revetment than fascines or sand-bags. 
 
 * The choker consists of 4 feet of chain, with a wooden lever at each end. 
 On the chain is marked, by rings, a length of 28 inches, being a circumfer- 
 ence equivalent, nearly, to a diameter of 9 inches. 
 
 5 
 
98 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 As fascines are heavy, require pickets to fasten them, 
 and experienced men to build them in revetment; as, 
 moreover, each fascine takes twice as much material as 
 two gabions, which, together, will make a revetment of 
 equal superficies, it is evident that fascines are inferior to 
 gabions for the formation of revetments, although they 
 support the earth at the same slope, viz., with a base 
 equal to one-quarter of its height. 
 
 SAND-BAGS are bags of coarse canvas, measuring, when 
 empty and laid flat, 2 feet 8 inches by 1 foot 4 inches ; 
 they contain, when quite full, a bushel of earth ; but when 
 tied and placed in revetment, only three-quarters of a 
 bushel. In building a revetment with them they are ar- 
 ranged with their ends and sides presented alternately to 
 the front in each course, and with the joints in the succes- 
 sive courses broken, like brickwork. Sixteen sand-bags 
 build 10 square feet of revetment ; they ought to be tarred, 
 if the revetments are to last a considerable time ; if not 
 tarred, they rot in two months. An empty sand-bag 
 weighs 1 Ib. 2 oz., and when tarred 1 Ib. 12 oz. 
 
 Filled sand-bags are musket-shot proof, and are fre- 
 quently placed on a parapet, one across two others, the 
 latter being a short distance asunder, in order that the in- 
 tervals may serve as loopholes. 
 
 Gun batteries are sometimes made entirely of sand- 
 bags, which are filled at a distance and brought to the 
 place ; this may be done either to save time, or when 
 earth cannot be procured on the spot, in consequence of 
 the soil being rocky or marshy. 
 
 On naval expeditions sand-bags are very serviceable, 
 as there is no other way in w r hich a battery can be prompt- 
 ly formed on a shore. 
 
 When sand-bags or gabions are made use of to revet 
 the cheeks of embrasures, they should be covered with 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 99 
 
 raw hides, to prevent them from being damaged by the 
 flash and the concussion caused by the discharge of the 
 gun. 
 
 SODS OF TURF, being generally procurable on the spot, 
 are much used in the revetments of the slopes of field 
 works ; but there are strong objections to sod revetments, 
 particularly as they take three times as long to build as a 
 brick wall. 
 
 Good sods ought to be cut 16 inches long, 8 inches 
 wide, and 4 inches thick ; they are built up in the same 
 manner as bricks, and with the grass downwards, and are 
 fastened with pickets long enough to penetrate three 
 courses. Six sods build 2 square feet of revetment. A 
 sod revetment requires most labor ; revetments of sand- 
 bags, fascines, and gabions, require successively less ; the 
 last is the best in all respects ; a sod revetment retains 
 the earth at a slope of one-third only, the three others at 
 a slope of one-fourth. 
 
 The parapet is bounded on its upper surface by a 
 plane called the " superior slope ; " this declines towards 
 the counterscarp, in order to enable the defenders to see 
 and fire on the assailants (directly) until they descend 
 into the ditch. The amount of this slope is called the 
 " plongee," and this varies from one-sixth to one-fourth 
 of the thickness of the parapet, but it must not exceed 
 one-fourth in order that the crest * of the parapet may not 
 become too weak. 
 
 It is of great importance that the superior slope should 
 be directed to the counterscarp, as it then enables the 
 defenders, notwithstanding the smoke and confusion con- 
 sequent on an attack, to direct their fire with certainty to 
 
 * It has been found by experience that a soldier cannot depress his musket, 
 when firing, more than 15 below a horizonal plane, and a plangee of one-fourth 
 of the thickness of the parapet gives a depression of 15 ; this is an additional 
 reason for limiting the plongee to one r fourth of the thickness of the parapet. 
 
100 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 a spot where the assailants' columns must be, more or 
 less, detained by the ditch and the obstacles in it. 
 
 If the superior slope cannot be directed to the edge of 
 the counterscarp without making the plongee more than 
 one-fourth of the thickness of the parapet, the counter- 
 scarp must be raised by means of a small glacis. The 
 crest of this glacis, however, should be kept at least 4 feet 
 below the crest of the parapet of the work, that the assail- 
 ants, when on the glacis, may not have the power of firing 
 into the work. 
 
 The outer edge of the superior slope is called the 
 " exterior crest," whilst the inner (and upper) edge of the 
 same slope is called the " interior crest," or the " crest " 
 of the parapet. 
 
 A step, called a " banquette," is placed at the foot of 
 the interior slope, and from 4 feet 3 inches to 4 feet 6 
 inches below the crest, in order to enable the defenders to 
 fire with ease over the parapet, and in the direction of its 
 superior slope. 
 
 The terreplein, or tread of the banquette, is made 3 
 feet wide for one rank of men, and 4 feet wide if intended 
 for two ranks. In order that the men on it may descend 
 backwards with ease, there is a gentle* slope for that 
 purpose, having a base equal to twice the height of the 
 banquette. 
 
 The ditch is not excavated immediately at the foot of 
 the exterior slope of the parapet, but at a distance from it, 
 varying from 1 to 4 feet, according to the adhesiveness of 
 the soil. This space of unmoved earth is called the berme, 
 and it is requisite both to remove the pressure of the par- 
 apet from the immediate edge of the ditch, and to facili- 
 
 * If the parapet has a greater command than 8 feet, this convenience is re- 
 linquished on account of the great space occupied by it, and the banquette is 
 ascended by steps. 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 101 
 
 tate the construction and repair of the parapet. A berme 
 has the defect of affording an intermediate landing-place 
 on which the assailants may form ; and although it may 
 be occupied by obstacles, these require additional labor, 
 and may be destroyed by cannon ; yet a berme can scarcely 
 be dispensed with unless the earth is very adhesive, and 
 that the parapet is not more than 8 feet high. 
 
 The berme, in most cases, may be cut away after the 
 parapet has had two or three days to settle. 
 
 The ditch will not be an effective obstacle if less than 
 6 feet in depth, and for the reason given, it is not made 
 deeper than 12 feet. 
 
 The sides of the ditch being of unmoved earth, they 
 will support themselves, without revetment, at a steeper 
 slope than those of the parapet ; and as the counterscarp 
 has not the weight of the parapet to resist, and is not 
 exposed to fire, it may, generally, be made steeper than 
 the escarp. 
 
 The slopes of both vary from a base equal to the height 
 to a base of one quarter of the height. 
 
 To find the breadth of the ditch, (of the usual shape,) 
 divide the area of a profile of the parapet by the intended * 
 depth of the ditch, and the quotient is the mean breadth 
 of the latter ; to this, add half the sum of the bases of the 
 escarp and counterscarp slopes for the breadth at top, and 
 deduct the same half sum for the breadth at bottom. 
 
 The best shape for an unfianked ditch is one having a 
 triangular section, as it does not permit the assailants to 
 form at the bottom ; and moreover, with an equal depth 
 and area of section, it may be made wider at top than a 
 trapezoid would be ; by which means the superior slope 
 of the parapet can be directed to the counterscarp without 
 
 * This is determined chiefly by tho nature of the soil and the size of the 
 parapet. 
 
102 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 too much increasing the plongee, or without raising the 
 counterscarp by a glacis. 
 
 To find the breadth of a ditch having a triangular sec- 
 tion, divide the area of a profile of the parapet by half 
 the given depth of ditch, and the quotient is the required 
 breadth at top ; the sides may evidently have any given 
 inclinations to the horizon consistently with the given 
 breadth, depth, and area of a transverse section. 
 
 THE OUTLINES OF FIELD WORKS. 
 
 The direction which a parapet is made to assume in 
 order to enclose, or partially enclose, the ground to be 
 fortified, is called the outline of a work. 
 
 The following are general principles to be observed in 
 determining the outlines of field works : 
 
 1st. There should be a reciprocal defence between all 
 the parts of works, so that the ground over which an 
 enemy must pass to the attack should, if possible, be seen 
 both in front and in flank. 
 
 2dly. The " lines of defence " must not exceed the 
 effective range of muskets, viz., about 160 yards. 
 
 3dly. Re-entering * angles (viz., flanking angles) ought 
 never to be less than 90 and seldom more than 100 ; 
 for, if less than 90, the men on the flanking parts would 
 fire against each other ; and if more than 100, the fire of 
 the flanking parts would diverge too far from the salient 
 to be flanked. 
 
 4thly. The salient angles of works should be as obtuse 
 as possible, and never less than 60, otherwise the interior 
 space might become too contracted ; the angle would be 
 so sharp as to be quickly worn away by the weather, and 
 
 * In both these cases it is presumed that the soldier fires (as he [generally 
 does) at right angles to the parapet behind which he stands. 
 
Redan, Crexnaillere, Line and Star Forts. 
 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 103 
 
 would be easily battered down; also the* undefended 
 sectoral space in front of the salient angle (which is the 
 supplement of the angle) would become very great ; and 
 
 5thly. The outline of a field work should be propor- 
 tioned in length to the number of men and guns intended 
 for its defence. One man occupies a space of three feet. 
 
 The names of the works most commonly employed in 
 field fortification are redans, single, double, and triple ; 
 redans with auxiliary fianks ; lunettes, redoubts, star 
 forts, bastioned and demi-bastioned forts, block-houses, 
 and works used mostly for lines of intrenchment, such as 
 tenailles and cremailleres. 
 
 The REDAN is a work consisting of two faces, which 
 form with each other a salient angle, the rear being 
 open. When the faces are not more than about 20 yards 
 in length, the work is sometimes called a fleche. 
 
 The redan is in the most advantageous position when, 
 the ground before the salient angle, and approaches to the 
 gorge, are inaccessible, or when the work can be sup^ 
 ported by troops ; for example, when, with obstacles in 
 its front, it is employed as an advanced work to defend 
 hollow ground which cannot be seen from the principal 
 work to protect a bridge, a dam, a road, a defile, or to 
 cover a guard, an advanced post, &c. 
 
 The weak points of this work are : that it has an open 
 gorge, and that its ditch, and the ground in front of the 
 salient angle, are undefended either by direct or flanking 
 fire. 
 
 On account of its having an open gorge, it is seldom 
 advisable to construct a redan as an isolated work ; its 
 rear should be exposed to the fire of some collateral work, 
 
 * Undefended by direct fire. To prevent the enemy from approaching tho 
 work on these undefended sectors the salients should be directed towards somo 
 natural obstacle, such as a marsh, &c. ; or if this cannot bo done, then artificial 
 obstacles should be disposed in their front. 
 
104: FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 or have free communication with a body of troops in its 
 rear, to whom it may form an advanced post, or outwork ; 
 otherwise the faces should terminate on a river, a marsh, 
 or any inaccessible ground, which would prevent it from 
 being turned. 
 
 The first defect, viz., that of having an open gorge, 
 may be remedied in a slight degree by placing along the 
 gorge abatis, trous de loup, &c., (or palisades, if time and 
 materials abound ;) as for the second defect, a direct fire 
 may be brought in front of the salient either by rounding 
 the latter, or by cutting off the angle by a short face not 
 less than 6 yards long. 
 
 A flanking fire may be procured for the ditch and sa- 
 lients, by forming auxiliary flanks, which may be placed 
 either towards the middle or at the extremities of the 
 faces ; such a flank ought not to be less than 12 yards 
 long, that there may be, at least, 12 men firing from it. 
 
 DOUBLE REDANS consist of two redans joined together, 
 their exterior faces being generally longer than the others : 
 the French call a work of this kind a queue d' hyronde. 
 
 A TRIPLE RED AN consists of three redans joined to- 
 gether, the exterior faces of these are also, in general, 
 longer than the others. 
 
 A LUNETTE is a large redan with flanks parallel or 
 nearly parallel to the capital ; as a general rule, the flanks 
 are traced perpendicularly to the intended line of fire, for 
 the purpose of bringing on certain spots a more direct 
 fire than could be made from the faces of the work. 
 
 It is often desirable to secure the gorges of these works 
 against surprise ; this may be done by disposing across 
 the gorge a single or double row of palisades, or a stock- 
 ade-work, in the form of a front fortification or of a te- 
 naille : there should be a banquette to it, that the defenders 
 may have a command over the assailants, and a ditch to 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 105 
 
 prevent the enemy from getting close, and cutting, burn- 
 ing, or blowing down the obstacle. Trous de loup, 
 abatis, and chevaux-de-frise are sometimes disposed 
 across the gorge for the same purpose. 
 
 A REDOUBT is a closed work, the parapet of which does 
 not form re-entering angles ; it may be quadrilateral, 
 polygonal, or circular. 
 
 Circular redoubts, although they have no undefended 
 sectors, and enclose a greater space than any other re- 
 doubt with an equal length of parapet, are seldom formed 
 on account of the difficulty of their construction, and also 
 because their ditches are incapable of any flanking de- 
 fence ; the lines of fire diverging from the parapet, any 
 one spot on the ground is very imperfectly defended. 
 
 A four-sided figure is the best and most usual form 
 for a redoubt, because it is of simple construction ; the 
 ditches are more easily flanked, and there are not so 
 many points of attack as in a redoubt of a greater num- 
 ber of angles. Redoubts, being closed works, are better 
 calculated to stand detached than redans or lunettes, and 
 are, therefore, constructed when a small work is required 
 without any immediate protection from the gorge the 
 armed party being strong enough to complete and man a 
 four-sided redoubt, each side of which is not less than 15 
 yards long. 
 
 The size depends on the number of men who are to 
 garrison it, and upon the number of guns which it is to 
 contain ; also upon the length of time during which it is 
 to be occupied : this may be for a few hours only, (as on 
 a field of battle,) or for a period of weeks or months. 
 
 If wanted only for a few hours, it will be sufficient to 
 allow 3 feet in length of parapet for every man of the de- 
 tachment ; or for every two men, if they are to be formed 
 in double rank. If guns are to be placed in the work, 15 
 5* 
 
106 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 feet of parapet must be given to each, in order that the 
 gunners may have sufficient room on each side to work it. 
 
 But when the redoubt is destined to contain a body of 
 men for a considerable length of time, it becomes neces- 
 sary to have room for them to lie down within the ban- 
 quette with their arms and packs ; supposing one-third to 
 be on guard, patrolling, &c., two square yards, in addi- 
 tion to the slope of the banquette, are sufficient for each 
 man, and 36 square yards for each gun with its appoint- 
 ments. 
 
 The rule, consequently, for a square redoubt is : to 
 multiply the given number of men by 2, and the number 
 of guns by 36, for the number of square yards which the 
 work ought to contain within the foot of its banquette, 
 the square root of the product will be the length in yards 
 of the side of the square forming that area ; adding to this 
 result the breadth of two interior slopes, and of 2 ban- 
 quettes with their slopes, (about 7 yards altogether,) we 
 shall have the side of the square formed by the crest of 
 the parapet. 
 
 A square redoubt ought not to be traced with less 
 extent of side than 15 yards ; for, by employing the cal- 
 culation explained above, it will be found that such a 
 work is only j ust sufficient to contain the men necessary 
 for its defence : on the other hand, it is unusual to make 
 a square redoubt with a longer side than 40 yards, because 
 it would require a garrison more suitable to a work of a 
 stronger outline. 
 
 The imperfections of redoubts are, that they are en- 
 tirely without a flanking fire for the defence of the ground 
 in front of their faces, also that their ditches and the sec- 
 toral spaces before the angles are without any fire what- 
 ever for their defence. 
 
 A flanking defence for the ditches may be obtained by 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS.. 107 
 
 placing palisade or stockade caponnieres in them, either 
 at the angles or in the middle of the faces ; by tambours 
 in a like position, or by loop-holed galleries under the 
 counterscarp at the salients of the work. 
 
 The want of a fire in the directions of the capitals may 
 be remedied, as in the redan, by cutting off an angle by 
 a short face, by making it curved, or by tracing a portion 
 of the line of parapet en cremaillere ; viz., by disposing it 
 in a succession of salient and re-entering angles, the sides 
 of which are alternately parallel to the capital : this con- 
 struction is, however, very difficult, and causes inconven- 
 ient variations in the thickness and height of the parapet. 
 
 A ditch caponniere is an oblong structure formed with 
 palisades, or with stockade work, loopholed, and roofed 
 over with planks and earth to secure the men from the 
 effects of shells, and a plunging fire from the counterscarp. 
 It ought, if possible, to be flanked with musketry, to pre- 
 vent an enemy from closing on it, and getting under 
 cover. 
 
 The best position for a caponniere in the ditch of a re- 
 doubt is at the salient angle, as then one caponniere flanks 
 two branches of the ditch. It should be separated from 
 the counterscarp by an enlargement of the ditch, to pre- 
 vent an enemy from using it as a bridge to cross the 
 ditch, and it ought to have a wicket to allow of sallies 
 into the ditch. 
 
 The bottom or sole of the caponniere may, sometimes 
 with advantage, be sunk 3 or 4 feet below the bottom of 
 the ditch, in order that the fire from the loopholes may 
 graze along it, and prevent an enemy from closing on 
 them ; by this construction, and by making the roof con- 
 vex, it becomes more difficult for him to use the capon- 
 niere as a bridge to pass the ditch. 
 
 To lessen the destructive effect of shells, traverses 
 
108 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 should be placed in all closed works when those missiles 
 are likely to be employed against them. 
 
 From the interior to the exterior of closed works 
 there must be a passage through the parapet, protected 
 by a traverse or by stockade work, and the traverse 
 should extend far enough on each side of the passage to 
 intercept shot which might enter it obliquely. The ditch 
 is crossed by a bridge which is conveniently formed of 
 loose planks and beams, because, in case of attack, they 
 can be quickly taken up and used to barricade the passage. 
 When the ditch is more than twelve feet wide, a trestle 
 must be placed in the middle to support the beams or 
 sleepers. 
 
 When rough timber only can be procured, stout 
 straight limbs of trees must be selected for the sleepers, 
 which may be covered with strong hurdles, (or brush- 
 wood,) over which a layer of sods and then a small quan- 
 tity of gravel may be laid. 
 
 A STAR FORT is a closed work, the parapet of which 
 forms several acute salient angles and obtuse re-entering 
 angles, giving it a form like the usual representation of a 
 star. 
 
 It has been seen that redoubts are defended only by 
 direct fire, and that without some contrivance for affording 
 flanking fire, the sectors at the salients, as well as the 
 ditches, are absolutely undefended. Star forts, consisting 
 of re-entering as well as salient angles, are intended to 
 obviate that defect in some degree. They may be con- 
 structed either upon an exterior or interior polygon. If 
 ground is to be fortified which does not admit the possi- 
 bility of working outwards, as an island fo instance, a 
 polygon is traced to suit the form of the ground ; the 
 sides of the polygon are bisected by perpendiculars drawn 
 inwards, and the faces of the star fort are drawn from the 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 109 
 
 angles of the polygon to the inner extremities of the per- 
 pendiculars : this is called fortifying upon the exterior 
 polygon. 
 
 The length of the perpendicular * in a square, penta- 
 gon, hexagon, and octagon, should be respectively one- 
 eighth, one-fifth, one-fourth, and one-third of the side, in 
 order that the flanking angles may approach as near as 
 possible to right angles, without making the salient angles 
 less than 60. When the polygon is irregular, the length 
 of the perpendiculars must be determined by the angles 
 nearest to them. 
 
 Again, it may be required to surround a building 
 with a star fort in such a position that the work could 
 not be traced inwards ; then, a polygon surrounding the 
 building must be laid down, and on each of its sides an 
 equilateral triangle must be formed towards the exterior. 
 
 If this construction be applied to a dodecagon, it will 
 be found that the re-entering angles are exactly right an- 
 gles ; in an octagonal fort the re-entering or flanking angles 
 are each equal to 105. 
 
 The necessity for employing a polygon superior to an 
 octagon will rarely occur ; yet with irregular figures it 
 may happen that some of the angles are equal, or nearly 
 so, to those of regular polygons of more than twelve 
 sides. 
 
 It is necessary to fix some limit as a minimum to the 
 length of face for these works ; this depends on the dis- 
 tance at which a shot fired from the parapet of a face 
 would reach the level of the ground ; for it is evident 
 that if the face be made less than that distance, the enemy, 
 arrived at the rounding of the counterscarp, will be more 
 or less secure from the fire of the adjoining face. If we 
 
 * The lengths given are merely approximations in the form of tho nearest 
 simple fraction of the side. 
 
110 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 suppose a man to fire along the superior slope of a para- 
 pet with a plongee of one-sixth, and that the work has a 
 command of seven and a half feet, we have by similar 
 triangles, 
 
 1 : 6 : : 74 (the command) : 45 ; 
 
 the distance, in feet, at which the shot would reach the 
 level of the ground. 
 
 The face should, therefore, not be less than 45 feet, 
 viz., 15 yards. If the bottom of the ditch on any face is 
 to be defended by the fire of the next face, a still greater 
 length is required : to find this, we have the proportion 
 1:6:: the relief (the height of the crest of the parapet 
 above the bottom of the ditch) : the distance at which a 
 shot would reach the bottom of the ditch ; this distance 
 is 30 yards when the command of the work and depth of 
 its ditch are both seven and a half feet. The length of 
 the faces depends also upon the number of guns to be 
 placed behind the parapet, and upon the strength of the 
 garrison ; but 35 yards may be considered as the great- 
 est length of face, for the troops required to defend a star 
 fort having a longer face would be sufficient to construct 
 and defend a fort of a better tracing. 
 
 The construction of star forts is attended with some 
 trouble, particularly if the ground is uneven : such works 
 present at their acute salient angles numerous points of 
 attack : the faces and salients are without flanking defence 
 when the polygon is inferior to an octagon, and even in 
 this case such defence is imperfect : the ditches are unde- 
 fended, unless the faces are made unreasonably long ; the 
 line of parapet to be manned is very great, when compared 
 with the interior space, and is exposed to be enfiladed in 
 all directions. 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. Ill 
 
 CONSTRUCTIONS. . 
 
 The following are convenient methods of tracing on 
 the ground the most useful polygonal redoubts and star 
 forts : 
 
 For a pentagonal redoubt : on a base equal to one-fifth 
 of the perimeter, or length of the parapet, form an isos, 
 celes triangle, of which each of the equal sides is one- 
 third of the perimeter, and on each side of this triangle as 
 a base form another isosceles triangle with its (equal) 
 sides, each equal to the side of the pentagon, or first base. 
 
 For a hexagonal redoubt : trace an equilateral triangle, 
 the side of which is in length three times that of the re- 
 doubt; trisect each side, and join the nearest outer ex- 
 tremities of the centre portions : these lines, with those 
 which join their extremities, will constitute the hexagonal 
 redoubt required. 
 
 For a hexagonal star fort : trace an equilateral triangle 
 on a base equal to one-fourth of the whole length of the 
 parapet ; trisect each side, and form equilateral triangles 
 on the three centre portions. These will complete the 
 figure. 
 
 For an octagonal redoubt : trace a square on a side 
 equal to three-tenths of the whole length of parapet of the 
 redoubt ; and from the angles of the square measure on 
 each side half the diagonal ; the points being joined, the 
 magistral line is traced. 
 
 For an octagonal star fort : trace a square on a base 
 equal to three-twentieths of the whole length of the parapet 
 of the star fort ; with this square form an octagon as before, 
 and on each of its sides trace an equilateral triangle. 
 
 FORTS WITH BASTIONS are the most perfect of closed 
 field works, as it is evident that they possess all the ad- 
 
112 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 vantages of mutual defence afforded by the corresponding 
 works in permanent fortifications ; they are traced simi- 
 larly to these last, although rarely on a polygon superior 
 to a pentagon ; as, however, their defence mainly depends 
 on the fire of common muskets, their lines of defence must 
 not exceed the effective range of such arms, or about 160 
 yards, and therefore the side of the polygon on which 
 they are constructed must not exceed 200 yards in length. 
 
 On the other hand, the side of the polygon should not 
 be less than 120 yards in length ; since, if it were so, the 
 bastions would be too small, and the flanks and curtain 
 too short for the defence required from them. 
 
 Bastioned forts should have within them a good re- 
 duit, in order to give confidence to the garrison, and secure 
 its retreat : such a reduit should have a command of four 
 or five feet over every part of the main work, in order 
 that the enemy, having gained the parapet of the latter, 
 may not fire from thence into the reduit. 
 
 The reduit may either conform to the outline of the 
 fort, or it may be a simple redoubt, a blockhouse, or a 
 tower of brick or stone, so traced that the defenders may 
 fire into the bastions of the fort, these being the points at 
 which an enemy is most likely to force an entrance. 
 
 As bastioned forts require a strong garrison, they are 
 constructed when it is intended to occupy a point of im- 
 portance for a considerable time, and, therefore, the reduit 
 often forms, at the same time, the barrack of the garrison. 
 
 In order to throw an additional fire towards the direc- 
 tion of the salients, the curtain is sometimes broken in 
 the prolongation of the lines of defence ; but in order that 
 some fire may be directed immediately in front, a portion 
 may be formed in a line parallel to the original curtain, 
 and equal to about one-third of its length ; the two bri- 
 sures should form with each other a re-entering rather 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 113 
 
 than a salient angle, in order that there may be no dead 
 spaces in the ditch. 
 
 The counterscarp of the ditch may be drawn either to 
 the shoulder angles of the bastions, as in permanent forti- 
 fication, or parallel to the faces, flanks, and curtain ; the 
 latter method is generally preferable, as it saves time and 
 labor ; in this case, however, the counterscarp of one flank 
 would conceal the ditch of the nearest face from the fire 
 of the opposite flank ; this counterscarp ought, therefore, 
 in part, to be cut away in an inclined plane, or ramp, 
 parallel to, or coinciding with, the line of fire from that 
 flank. 
 
 DEMI-BASTIONED FORTS, like those with bastions, are 
 traced by letting fall a perpendicular from the middle of 
 each exterior side, and drawing lines of defence ; but each 
 front has only one flank, every alternate face extending 
 from the angle of the polygon to the inner extremity of 
 that flank, and coinciding with the line of defence through- 
 out its entire length ; such works have the defect of af- 
 fording a regular flanking defence only to every alternate 
 face ; as the short face of each front receives a very oblique 
 and imperfect flanking defence from the collateral long 
 face. 
 
 LOOPHOLES are narrow rectangular openings made in 
 walls of masonry or wood, through which to direct a fire 
 of musketry. In walls of two feet or two and a half feet 
 thick they are about nine inches high by fifteen inches 
 wide on the inside, and twenty inches high by four inches 
 wide on the outside. In timber six or eight inches thick 
 they are eight inches wide inside and three inches outside, 
 the height being twelve inches. 
 
 They are made wider on the inside than on the out- 
 side, because, thus formed, they afford better cover for 
 the men behind them ; they arc placed at not less than 
 
114 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 three feet asunder, that the wall may not be too much 
 weakened, and that the men firing through them may not 
 be crowded ; they are made from four feet to four and a 
 quarter feet above the banquette or ground on which the 
 men stand to fire through them. 
 
 STOCKADE WORK is a wall composed of trunks of trees, 
 or rough pieces of timber placed upright in the ground ; 
 they are made to touch each other, and loopholes are cut 
 through them ; if composed of trees, they ought to be 
 squared, that the parts in contact may be of the same 
 thickness as the rest of the wall. 
 
 A TAMBOUR is an enclosure of palisades or stockade 
 work, sometimes with a ditch and banquette, and of any 
 form that may be necessary to afford the defence re- 
 quired. 
 
 BLOCKHOUSES are covered field works, generally rec- 
 tangular ; the walls are formed of trunks of trees, and 
 above the timbers of the roof there is, usually, a bed of 
 earth, three or four feet thick. 
 
 In mountainous and well-wooded countries blockhouses 
 are the best description of field works, because the enemy 
 cannot easily bring cannon to destroy them. It is very 
 difficult in mountainous countries to find ground where 
 works may be constructed free from the defect of being 
 commanded, and consequently open works are there com- 
 paratively useless. 
 
 Blockhouses are of great advantage as reduits in situ- 
 ations where it is difficult to defilade the interiors of works 
 from commanding heights, more especially since they may 
 serve as barracks for the troops ; in such a case the bed* 
 steads, arranged on each side, are used as banquettes, and 
 the loopholes are made four feet above them. 
 
 A blockhouse to resist musketry should be composed 
 of trees, squared so that the parts in contact may be at 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 115 
 
 least six inches thick, that being the depth to which a mus- 
 ket ball will penetrate in fir. In order to resist artillery, 
 two rows of trees (or of stockades) are placed vertically in 
 the ground, with an interval between them from three to 
 six feet wide, which is filled with earth well rammed. The 
 trees or logs should be eleven or twelve feet long, so that 
 they may be planted at least three feet in the ground, and 
 allow the interior of the blockhouse to be eight or nine 
 feet high ; it should also be from eighteen to twenty-four 
 feet wide in the interior. 
 
 The earth used to render the covering shell-proof may 
 be shaped like a small parapet, and from this an additional 
 fire (of musketry) may be obtained ; the access to this upper 
 parapet is through a trap-door in the roof. To prevent the 
 blockhouse from being set on fire, a ditch should be dug 
 round it, leaving a berme of eight or ten feet, and on this 
 the earth is piled up against the wood as high as the loop- 
 holes. 
 
 Sometimes blockhouses are constructed in the form of 
 a cross, when the flanking fire thus obtained on their faces 
 renders them much more powerful ; they are also, occa- 
 sionally, built with an upper story, the angles of which 
 should project over the sides of the lower story ; the foot 
 of the lower walls may thus be defended by the fire from 
 above. 
 
 An ordinary dwelling-house, with thick masonry walls, 
 may be formed into a blockhouse by pulling down the 
 upper stories, and heaping a mass of the materials, three 
 or four feet in thickness, over the ceiling of the lower 
 rooms ; earth or rubbish should also be placed about the 
 house as high as the loopholes. 
 
116 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 DEFILADING OF FIELD WORKS. 
 
 To DEFILADE a work from a height is so to regulate the 
 direction and elevation of the parapets or covering masses, 
 that its interior may be screened from the view of an 
 enemy on the heights. 
 
 A PLANE OF SIGHT is an imaginary plane supposed to 
 pass through the summit of the height from which the 
 work is to be defiladed, and the terreplein of the work. 
 
 A PLANE OF DEFILADE is a plane supposed to pass 
 through the crest of the parapet of the work parallel 
 to the plane of sight. 
 
 In many situations it is practicable (and then it is the 
 easier method) to defilade the faces or longest branches 
 of a work by the tracing ; viz., by directing them on 
 marshes, rivers, lakes, precipices, hollows, &c., where 
 batteries cannot be erected, or at worst, on points of the 
 height not nearer than 800 * yards to the work. Also the 
 choice of the outline of the work should be attended to ; 
 for among the different tracings by which the same object 
 may be attained, some will be more easy to defilade than 
 others. 
 
 When a work is thrown up in front of a height, it 
 is the more difficult to defilade in proportion to its depth ; 
 it should, therefore, have an oblong form, and its longest 
 faces should be traced parallel to the height. If, for in- 
 stance, the work were a rectangular redoubt, the long 
 faces should be traced parallel to the height, and the short 
 ones be directed on it. 
 
 An open work will be defiladed when the plane of de- 
 
 * Artillery on a height, even of 120 feet, at 800 yards distance from a work, 
 has no more advantage, in respect of a plunging fire, than if it were on a level 
 -with the rock; for in both cases it must be elevated about iy 4 degree to attain 
 this range. 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 117 
 
 filement passes through a line 8 feet above the ground at 
 its gorge, and at a point 4 or 8 * feet above the command- 
 ing hill, according as the work is to be defiladed against 
 artillery or musketry. 
 
 It is usual to defilade a work against musketry if there 
 are heights within 300 yards of it, and against artillery, 
 when the heights are not farther distant than 800 yards. 
 
 When the commanding ground is not occupied by the 
 enemy, the work may be defiladed in the following man- 
 ner : stretch a rope between two poles planted in the line 
 of the gorge at 8 feet above the ground ; direct visual 
 rays from various points of this rope to the top of a pole 
 placed on the commanding hill, and 4 feet high if the 
 work is to be defiladed against artillery, but 8 feet if it is 
 to be defiladed against musketry ; the intersection of the 
 rays with poles planted on the tracing of the intended 
 parapet, will indicate the height to which the parapet 
 must be raised in order that its defenders may be situated 
 under the plane of defilade ; and since these visual rays 
 represent lines of fire from the enemy's position on the 
 hill, it will be evident that a parapet whose height is thus 
 determined will defilade the interior of the work. 
 
 When it is impossible to place the pole on the com- 
 manding ground, the following method must be adopted : 
 along the gorge of the intended work stretch a rope, which 
 is to be 4 feet above the ground if the work is to be de- 
 filaded against artillery, and 1 J feet if against musketry ; 
 in rear of this rope at any convenient distance (about 5 
 yards) drive two pickets into the ground, and upon them 
 raise or lower a cord or a straight edge of wood, until it 
 is in the same plane with the rope at the gorge, and the 
 
 * A field-gun stands about 3V 2 feet above the ground, and a man on horse- 
 back can firo about 1 l / 2 feet above the ground; therefore 4 and 8 are taken as 
 the nearest whole numbers to these commands respectively. 
 
 
118 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 top of the height from which the work is to be defiladed ; 
 then look from the rear cord or straight edge along that 
 at the gorge, and observe where the line of sight from 
 thence cuts the poles raised on the tracing of the intended 
 parapet ; these points of section (indicating the position 
 of the plane of sight) may be marked by one of the party ; 
 lastly, make the crest of the parapet 4 feet higher than 
 the points thus found if the work is to be defiladed against 
 cannon, but 6J- feet higher if against musketry. I 
 
 If it is found that, by this process, the parapet must 
 have more than 12 feet command in order to defilade the 
 work ; the parapet must be raised to any convenient 
 height, (suppose 10 or 12 feet,) and then, in order to defi- 
 lade the part which is not protected by the parapet, a 
 traverse must be erected, or the terreplein of the unpro- 
 tected part must be lowered, or both of these steps must 
 be taken conjointly. 
 
 In defilading a tete de pont, the plane of defilade should 
 pass 8 feet above that part of the bridge which is most 
 remote from the height. 
 
 To defilade a closed work, (or one with a parapet both 
 on the side nearest to and on the side furthest from the 
 height,) unless the crests on both those sides are in a 
 plane passing 8 feet above the ground which the enemy 
 may occupy, in front and in rear, a parados to cover the 
 defenders on the banquette of the side nearest to the 
 height from reverse fire, is indispensable ; for it is clear 
 that the higher the parapet nearest to a commanding 
 ground is raised in order to defilade a portion of the whole 
 of the interior of the work, the more will the defenders 
 standing on the banquette of that parapet be elevated above 
 the plane of defilement of the parapet furthest from the 
 height, (or the lower one ;) they will, consequently, be- 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 119 
 
 come exposed to a reverse fire directed over the lower 
 parapet. 
 
 In this case, therefore, make the parapet nearest to 
 the commanding ground as high as convenient, and so as 
 to defilade a portion (suppose one-half) of the interior : 
 at the extremity of this defiladed portion, and (about) 
 parallel to the parapet, raise a parados high enough to in- 
 tercept visual rays directed from points 8 feet above the 
 banquette of the lower parapet to 4 or 8 feet above the 
 height, and from points 8 feet above the banquette of the 
 higher parapet to points 8 feet above the ground in front 
 of the former parapet. 
 
 If the site of the intended redoubt be commanded on 
 opposite sides, the work will be defiladed in the manner 
 just described, excepting that, in this case, both the par- 
 apets being commanded, each must be raised high enough 
 to cover the portion of the work between it and the trav- 
 erse or parados from the opposite height. 
 
 Or the work may be defiladed thus : the magistral 
 line having been traced, let the engineer place himself at 
 any convenient part of the interior with his eye 8 feet from 
 the ground, and let a man hold up a measuring rod on the 
 tracing line between the engineer and each hill ; then a 
 visual ray, from a point estimated to be 8 feet above each 
 hill, will intersect the measuring rods in points through 
 which the crests of the parapets should pass. The place 
 of the engineer is the place of the traverse or parados, the 
 height of which is determined, as before, by visual rays 
 crossing each other from points 4 or 8 feet above the op- 
 posite heights to points 8 feet above the banquettes most 
 distant from the heights. 
 
 With the aid of a plane table, the plane of site may 
 be readily determined thus : let the upper surface of the 
 table (which should be near the surface of the ground in 
 
120 FIELD FOETIFICATIOXS. 
 
 rear of the work) be placed in a plane touching the points 
 of command : the intersections of that surface prolonged, 
 with the poles planted at the angles of the work, will de- 
 termine as man^ points in the plane of site. 
 
 PROFILING. 
 
 The proper height of parapet for the work having been 
 determined, (by the process of defilading, if necessary,) 
 the next step is to plant pickets on the faces, flanks, and 
 angles as guides to the workmen in giving it the suitable 
 dimensions and form. Thus, to the magistral line of each 
 face and flank, trace on the ground perpendicularly at in- 
 tervals, and on thqse measure, horizontally, the bases of 
 the slopes composing the profile to be employed. At the 
 points thus set out * fix poles or laths perpendicularly in 
 the ground, and saw off their tops at the height which the 
 parapet is to have at that particular part ; nail laths to the 
 tops of these poles from one to the other across the direc- 
 tion of the intended parapet ; and thus there will be ob- 
 tained an outline of the slopes, or a profile of the parapet. 
 
 For the profile at an angle, lay a rope on the ground 
 bisecting that angle, and produce it outwards ; drive pick- 
 ets along this rope at the points where it is intersected by 
 the prolongations of lines joining the bases of the profiles 
 already set up perpendicularly to the adjoining faces ; 
 these pickets mark the bases of the profiles at the salient ; 
 the laths may then be set up as before. 
 
 When the salient angle is 60, the breadth of the base 
 of any slope measured on the capital will be equal to twice 
 the breadth of the same slope taken on a line at right 
 angles to the face. 
 
 * The best method of fixing the perpendicular laths is to drive strong 
 pickets into the ground at the required points, and to nail to them the laths, 
 previously cut of the proper length. 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 121 
 
 DISTRIBUTION OF THE WORKING PARTY. 
 
 Divide the men into 6 equal parts, 3 of which are to 
 be provided with pickaxes and shovels, 2 are to have 
 shovels only, and the remainder are to be furnished with 
 rammers only. 
 
 The party is then to be marched to the ground, and 
 the men, having both pickaxes and shovels, (viz. the dig- 
 gers,) are to be stationed 6* feet apart on the ground 
 where the ditch is to be dug along the berme line, and 
 facing the work. 
 
 The excavation of the ditch is now begun, the men 
 first loosening the earth with their pickaxes, and then 
 shovelling it to the place where the parapet is to stand ; 
 here the rest of the party are posted, and as the earth is 
 thrown up to them, the men with shovels spread it in 
 layers, while the remainder with their rammers, beat it 
 down to a firm mass ; and as the parapet is raised they 
 give it the form indicated by the profiles. 
 
 The profiles may be made of 3 inch plank, ripped up 
 into laths three-quarters of an inch thick. 
 
 The work may be drained, if requisite, with fascines 
 of stout rods, or with loose stones having brushwood or 
 heather laid over them ; these are placed in trenches dug 
 across the ground on which the parapet is to be raised. 
 
 In excavating ditches and trenches, the slopes are 
 made after the ditch or trench is finished, the sides being 
 at first left in steps ; the crest of the slope is marked out, 
 and then small sections are cut, here and there, according 
 to the proper form of the finished profile : finally, the in- 
 
 * The diggers must not be placed nearer to each other than 4feet; but 
 if the party is strong, another row of diggers may be employed at the counter- 
 scarp, with their backs to the work ; these throw the earth towards the middle 
 of the space marked out for the breadth of the ditch, 
 
 G 
 
122 FIELD FOBTIFICATIONS. 
 
 termediate earth is cut away between these small sec- 
 tions ; the latter answering the purpose of ensuring regu- 
 larity in the excavation of the ditch, as the lath profiles 
 ensure it in the erection of the parapet. 
 
 When near the surface, in soil requiring but little 
 the use of the pickaxe, an excavation of 6 cubic yards in 
 a day of 8 hours would be a fair task for a soldier, who, 
 in general, is little accustomed to the use of the pickaxe 
 and shovel. 
 
 In calculating the time required to throw up a field 
 work, the following data may be assumed ; in light, dry, 
 sandy soil, that can be easily dug without the aid of a 
 pickaxe, a man can, in a day of 8 hours, load from 19 to 
 20 cubic yards of earth on barrows. If a pickaxe be re- 
 quired, two men can do the same quantity of work. 
 
 If the whole mass must be first moved with the pick- 
 axe, three or four men should be allowed. 
 
 A man can wheel 20 cubic yards of earth per day to 
 a distance of 30 yards on level ground, or 20 yards on a 
 ramp. 
 
 Twenty cubic yards of earth will fill 500 wheelbar- 
 rows. 
 
 A horse can do as much work as 7 men : he can carry 
 300 Ibs. 20 miles per day, or 200 Ibs. 30 miles ; he can 
 draw 1,600 Ibs. on a plain, and from 1,200 to 1,300 Ibs. 
 on irregular ground, when the roads are in good order. 
 
 OBSTACLES. 
 
 Palisades are triangular prisms of wood pointed at 
 the upper end, and placed upright in the ground at 3 or 
 4 inches asunder ; they are about 10 feet long, with faces 
 6 or 8 inches wide, and are sunk 3 or 4 feet in the ground. 
 A trench of that depth is dug, the palisades are placed in 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 123 
 
 it, and the earth is well rammed about them ; they are 
 connected at top (and sometimes at bottom also) by a 
 ribbon of wood, called a lintel, 4 inches wide by 2J thick, 
 nailed to the inside of the palisades about one foot from 
 the points ; they ought to stand, at least, 7 feet out of the 
 ground. Rough palisades may be formed, quickly, from 
 trees by cutting them into lengths about 10 feet, then 
 describing triangles, with sides of not less than 6 inches 
 in length on the ends, and sawing them lengthwise through 
 those sides ; if the trees are 12 or 14 inches in diameter, 
 six equilateral triangles meeting in the centre, can be 
 described on the ends, and six palisades made of one 
 piece : if the tree is but 6 inches in diameter, then, by 
 sawing it in halves, two palisades can be made of one 
 piece. 
 
 Palisades are only used in the ditches, and to close 
 the gorges of field works, and are not, as in permanent 
 works, placed on the banquettes ; when in the ditch, their 
 best position is at the foot of the counterscarp, and slightly 
 inclined towards it ; for, thus placed, they are more se- 
 cure from a direct fire of artillery, and they detain the 
 enemy at the counterscarp under the deadly aim of the 
 garrison ; also it makes it difficult for the assailants to cut 
 them down, there being no room between them and the 
 counterscarp to stand and wield the axe. 
 
 Fraises are palisades about 1 1 feet long, placed in a 
 horizontal or in an inclined position ; they ought to be 
 sunk about 5 feet in the ground, the buried ends being 
 joined by a ribbon in order to render it difficult to pull 
 them out ; the pointed ends ought to be not less than 7 
 feet from the bottom of the ditch ; and when placed on 
 the berme they ought to incline downwards, in order that 
 they may not interrupt the passage of shells when rolled 
 over the parapet. Fraises are most advantageously placed 
 
124: FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 2 or 3 feet below the edge of the counterscarp, as they 
 are, there, more secure than on the berme, from the direct 
 fire of the enemy, whom they detain under a close fire 
 from the work. 
 
 Chevaux-de-frise are beams of wood from 6 to 10 feet 
 long, which are cut in a square or hexagonal form, and 
 have pointed stakes or sword blades inserted into the 
 faces ; when several are used, in one length, they are 
 chained together to prevent the enemy from removing 
 them ; and they are made of the lengths just mentioned 
 in order that they may be portable. 
 
 They are employed as temporary barriers to impede 
 the passage of a breach, the entrance into a work, to block 
 up a street, &c. ; they are occasionally placed at the foot 
 of the counterscarp of the ditch, and, also, on the berme ; 
 in the latter situation they must be covered from the 
 view and fire of the enemy by a small glacis. 
 
 Abatis are large boughs or entire trees laid down in 
 a line, with the butt ends buried 3 or 4 feet in the ground, 
 and the branches turned towards the enemy : to form an 
 efficient obstacle, the branches ought to stand, at least, as 
 high as a man's breast, tho smaller parts being cut off, 
 and the larger pointed ; the butts should be secured in the 
 ground by beams or trees picketed across them, and they 
 should be covered with earth well rammed ; this pre- 
 caution will make it difficult to drag them away. They 
 ought, moreover, to be covered by a glacis, that they may 
 not be seen and breached or destroyed at a distance, by 
 artillery. 
 
 A detachment of 90 men can make about 750 feet of 
 abatis in a day. 
 
 Some of the trees on the borders of a wood being 
 formed into abatis, may deter an enemy from attempting 
 to penetrate into the wood. A breastwork may be made 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 125 
 
 of trunks of trees piled one on another to the required 
 height behind the abatis ; this is soon done, and it much 
 increases the strength of the obstacle. 
 
 Trous de loup are holes dug in the ground in the form 
 of an inverted cone or pyramid, and are made about 6 
 feet wide and 6 deep : a pointed stake is planted at the 
 bottom to prevent an enemy from making use of them as 
 rifle pits. In order to form an effective obstacle, they 
 should be disposed checker-wise in three rows, with in- 
 tervals of about 10 feet between them ; the earth from 
 them should be formed into a glacis, rather than heaped 
 up between them, as in the latter case they might be easily 
 filled up. 
 
 Trous de loup of even two or three feet deep, may be 
 usefully employed in rendering impassable shallow wet 
 ditches, inundations, and fords ; and, as well as abatis, 
 they are suitable obstacles to the advance of an enemy on 
 the salients of works, on the weak points of lines, or 
 through their intervals ; they may thus compel the en- 
 emy to attack the stronger parts. 
 
 The gorges of works may also be closed by abatis and 
 trous de loup, when there are no means of planting pali- 
 sades for that purpose. 
 
 A man can make one trou de loup in a day. 
 
 An Entanglement is formed by cutting half through 
 the stems of small trees, and pulling the upper parts to 
 the ground, to which they are then picketed. 
 
 Crows feet are four iron spikes joined together at one 
 end in such a manner, that when thrown on the ground 
 one point will always be uppermost ; they may be quickly 
 made by inserting four spikenails into a small block of 
 wood, so as to point in different directions ; they are 
 chiefly employed to obstruct the advance of cavalry. 
 
 Pointed Stakes are frequently fixed in the ground, at 
 
126 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 any place which the enemy might occupy at the time of 
 an assault ; as on the bermes of works, the edges of trous 
 de loup, and in the spaces between them. They must be 
 firmly planted in the ground, and if they are pointed be- 
 fore insertion, two mallets must be used, one of which is 
 provided with a conical hole to receive the point of the 
 stake, while the blows are struck with the other ; these 
 pickets may be conveniently formed of the small branches 
 cut from the trees intended for abatis. 
 
 Common Fougasses are small mines placed in shafts 
 or pits from 3 to 10 feet deep. 
 
 The powder is lodged on one side of the shaft at the 
 bottom, and is fired from a secure spot by means of a 
 powder hose, or fuze, which is brought up one side 
 of the shaft, and carried in a trough (or casing tube) 
 parallel to the surface of the ground ; the trough should 
 be 5 or 6 feet below the ground if there is any danger of 
 shells falling on it ; if not, 2 feet will be deep enough. 
 
 A shell foug ass is formed by dividing a box into two 
 parts by a horizontal partition ; the shells being loaded, 
 are placed in the upper part, with the fuzes pointing dowii 
 through holes in the partition, in order that they may be 
 ignited, at the same moment, by the priming ; the latter 
 consists of a few pounds of powder placed in the lower 
 compartment. 
 
 Shell fougasses arc very convenient obstacles to im- 
 pede the passage of a ditch and the ascent of a breach, as 
 they can be prepared within the work, and speedily buried 
 at the required spot just before their action is required. 
 
 A stone fougass or rock mortar is thus formed. Ex- 
 cavate a shaft at an inclination of about 45 to the horizon, 
 and about 6 feet deep ; at the bottom place a charge of 
 55 Ibs. of powder, then a strong shield of wood (at least 
 6 inches thick) in front of the charge ; and over the shield 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 127 
 
 throw in 3 or 4 cubic yards of pebbles of not less than 
 half a pound weight each ; a sufficient body of earth must 
 be heaped vertically above the charge, and retained over 
 the upper part of the shaft (near the edge) by a revetment 
 of sods, to ensure its effect taking place in the direction 
 required. 
 
 Twelve men can make a stone fougass in three hours, 
 which, being charged as before described, will, when ex- 
 ploded, disperse the materials over a circle of 30 or 40 
 yards radius, at about 60 yards from the mouth of the 
 shaft. 
 
 The usual and most effective position for fougasses is 
 beyond the ditch and over the salients or other weak 
 points of the work ; they must be removed in advance of 
 the ditch so far as not to injure the counterscarp by their 
 explosion. 
 
 A good method of discharging fougasses at the mo- 
 ment required, is to place a loaded musket with the muz- 
 zle in the priming and a wire attached to the trigger ; the 
 wire can be led in any direction, in the same manner as 
 the hose, and being pulled at the proper moment, the ex- 
 plosion will take place. 
 
 INUNDATIONS. 
 
 It frequently occurs in the field that small streams or 
 rivulets are met with, which of themselves offer no im- 
 pediment to the advance of an enemy, but which, by ju- 
 dicious management, may be made effectually to check 
 his attack on certain points where the water may be col- 
 lected. 
 
 An inundation, or collection of water, is produced by 
 forming across a stream one or more dams, which must 
 extend to a certain distance from thence, according to the 
 
128 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 inclination (or slope) of the ground contiguous to the 
 stream, and to the required breadth of the inundation. 
 
 A dam may be formed in the following manner : after 
 constructing an embankment of earth on each side of the 
 stream perpendicularly to its length, as far as the bank, 
 stones and gravel should be thrown into the water to di- 
 minish its depth ; then two heaps of earth are prepared, 
 one on each bank, and as many workmen being set on as 
 can be employed without impeding each other, the earth 
 from those heaps is thrown into the stream over the stones 
 and gravel as rapidly as possible, until the embankments 
 previously formed are connected together across the 
 stream. 
 
 It rarely occurs that sufficient means are to be found 
 in the field to allow of a dam being made more than ten 
 feet high ; and supposing this height to be given, the dif- 
 ference of level between any two dams should be five feet, 
 in order that the shallowest part of the inundation may 
 be five feet deep, and, therefore, not fordable. 
 
 The distance at which the dams should be placed from 
 one another will depend upon the fall of the bed of the 
 stream, and must be determined by levelling. The thick- 
 ness of the dam at top may be made equal to the 
 depth of the water intended to be retained, but if it is 
 liable to be battered by artillery, it should be ten feet 
 thick at top. The exterior slope of the dam may be left 
 at the natural slope of the earth, while to that opposed to 
 the stream a base of not less than double its height should 
 be given. 
 
 A sluice or w^ste weir should be provided at the 
 height to which it is desired the water should rise ; other- 
 wise, the water being allowed to flow over every part, 
 the dam would be destroyed. These openings, or waste 
 weirs, must be revetted with fascines or timber, and ought 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 129 
 
 to be completed before the dam is carried up to its full 
 height. 
 
 Sometimes the inclination of the ground contiguous to 
 the stream prevents the inundation from attaining a depth 
 greater than two or three feet ; it may, notwithstanding, 
 be rendered impassable, by digging pits and ditches in 
 different parts before the water is allowed to cover the 
 ground. 
 
 The end of the dam on the enemy's side must be pro- 
 tected by field works to prevent him from destroying it, 
 or using it as a bridge. When no work can be placed 
 immediately to cover the head of the dam, the approaches ' 
 to it should be defended ; or if the opposite bank be within 
 short musket range, the end of the dam may be covered 
 by abatis. The works thrown up to cover the head of a 
 dam are traced precisely on the same principles as those 
 which are to protect a bridge. The best condition, there- 
 fore, when a choice is possible, is, that the inundations 
 should be concave to the enemy. 
 
 Small islands may exist in the midst of an inundation, 
 and on these batteries or breastworks for musketry may 
 be advantageously formed, either to protect the dams, or 
 for the general defence of the position. 
 
 TETES DE PONT. 
 
 Tetes de pont are works thrown up to cover a com- 
 munication across a river, to hinder the destruction of the 
 bridge, and to defend it until an army or detachment has 
 crossed over it. 
 
 They should be of sufficient strength to be defended 
 
 until the whole of the troops have crossed and the bridge 
 
 has been taken up. The works employed for this purpose 
 
 vary according to the nature of the ground to be occupied, 
 
 6* 
 
130 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 the shape and width of the river, the importance of the 
 communication, &c. : they consist of redans, lunettes, 
 hornworks, or portions of any kind of field work. 
 
 If the bridge is seen from any point on the Bank, the 
 tete de pont should have at least one face, whose fire may 
 sweep that point. Islands should be made to contribute 
 to the defence by works erected on them ; these should 
 be breastworks for infantry, if the work is within the 
 range of that arm, or batteries for field guns. Advantage 
 should also be taken of the opposite bank to fortify it in 
 a similar manner. If these measures cannot be taken, 
 auxiliary flanks may be added to the faces of such a work 
 as a redan for the defence of the salients. 
 
 A reduit is frequently constructed within a tete de 
 pont, to cover the bridge from the neighboring heights, 
 and also to enable a small party of the troops to keep the 
 enemy in check until the main body has crossed, and the 
 bridge has been taken up ; this rear guard then crosses 
 the river in boats or rafts, protected by the fire from the 
 opposite side. 
 
 A battery should be constructed so as to enfilade the 
 bridge, and to destroy it, should the enemy force the 
 reduit. 
 
 The faces or flanks of a tete de pont should have such 
 directions given to them that their fire may range directly 
 along the banks. 
 
 The best position for a (temporary) military bridge 
 and tete is at a re-entering bend of a river ; viz., at a part 
 which is concave towards the enemy's side, because then 
 the bank which is in possession of the force about to lay 
 down the bridge, in part, envelope both that and the tete. 
 Thus, while the bridge is covered from the view of the 
 enemy, breastworks or batteries may be advantageously 
 

 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 131 
 
 placed to assist in its defence, and at the same time to 
 give an effective cross fire in its front. 
 
 When, however, the bridge is to remain a considerable 
 time, these advantages must be given up, and a straight 
 part of the river chosen, because there the current acts 
 directly against the heads of the boats or pontoons, whereas 
 at a bend it acts obliquely against the sides, and thus 
 tends constantly to derange their positions. Again, at a 
 bend the current is constantly wearing av\ r ay the concave 
 side, (or bank,) and depositing the earth thus removed at 
 the next convex bend, thus causing a shallow bank to be 
 formed on one side of the river and a deep part at the 
 opposite side ; consequently at every fall of the water, 
 in such a place, one end of the bridge is left aground on 
 the shallow part, while the other end descends with the 
 water, and thus the bridge is in danger of being broken. 
 
 It is evident that the bed of a river will be less irregu- 
 lar, and that fords will be most usually found where the 
 course is straight : fords are, however, occasionally found 
 at the bends of a river in directions obliquely across, from 
 one convex part to the next on the opposite side. 
 
 A ford should not be more than four feet deep for 
 cavalry, three feet for infantry, and two feet four inches 
 for artillery. 
 
 LINES. 
 
 Lines are a series of works and trenches, or of inde- 
 pendent works, arranged so as to defend each other, and 
 the ground in front of and between them. 
 
 Lines are used to cover the front of a position, or to 
 connect important redoubts or forts together. 
 
 Lines are of two kinds, such as are continuous, and 
 such as have intervals between the works. 
 
132 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 The former are principally applicable to situations 
 where it is proposed to act on the defensive only, and 
 where they are of such limited extent that the whole line 
 of parapet can be occupied with troops exclusive of the 
 reserves ; as, for instance, to close a pass between scarped 
 mountains, or on the sea shore, or on the banks of large 
 rivers ; thus resting on natural obstacles, which will pre- 
 vent their flanks being turned. They are often introduced 
 as portions of an extended line with intervals. 
 
 Extensive continued lines can make but slight resist- 
 ance, while the labor necessarily expended in executing 
 them is considerable ; and as the enemy may menace 
 several points at once, it follows that nearly as many 
 troops would be required for the defence as are employed 
 in the attack, in which case the first principle of fortification 
 is violated. Even if the defenders have a sufficient num- 
 ber of disposable troops, they act, when within lines, 
 under a disadvantage, for they must watch and follow 
 every movement of the enemy, so as to be equally pre- 
 pared to resist a false and a real attack. It has often 
 happened that while the defenders within lines were con- 
 centrating their forces to oppose a false attack, the enemy 
 has penetrated at a point where he was not expected ; and 
 a continued line once entered may generally be deemed 
 lost. 
 
 Continuous lines of redans connected by curtains are 
 constructed in three ways : in the first, as described by 
 Vauban, the salients of the redans are at 240 yards asun- 
 der, and consequently the musketry fire of one redan 
 does not, effectively, defend the salient of the next. To 
 remedy this defect, it was subsequently recommended that 
 the salients of the redans should be brought within musket 
 range of each other, or within 160 yards. 
 
 In both of these constructions the flanking angles 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 133 
 
 formed by the faces of the redans and the curtains joining 
 them much exceed 105, and consequently the flanking 
 defence is very imperfect. 
 
 In the third construction the salients are removed to 
 240 yards from each other, (the original distance,) but the 
 curtain is broken into two parts, forming a salient angle, 
 and thus the re-entering or flanking angles are reduced to 
 but little more than 90, by which means the flanking de- 
 fence is greatly improved. 
 
 This tracing is, however, still defective, inasmuch as 
 it presents double the number of salients to the enemy's 
 attacks, and the branches of the broken curtains are ex- 
 posed to be enfiladed, which is not the case in Vauban's 
 construction. 
 
 Lines of tenailles consist of parapets forming a series 
 of salient and re-entering angles, and are, in fact, like the 
 improved redan lines, except that, in this tracing, the re- 
 dans are all of the same size, and have obtuse angles. 
 
 They are traced by setting ofF distances of about 200 
 yards along the front of the intended lines, to mark the 
 position of the salient angles ; these intervals are then 
 bisected, and perpendiculars drawn towards the interior 
 to give the places of the re-entering angles. The perpen- 
 diculars should not exceed half the distance between the 
 salients, otherwise the re-entering angles would be less 
 than right angles. 
 
 Cremaillere lines are composed of alternate short and 
 long faces at right angles (or nearly so) to each other ; 
 the short faces, called crotchets, are made about 30 yards 
 long, and the long faces, called branches, about 100 yards 
 long. 
 
 These lines possess the following advantages : 
 
 1st. The branches are but little exposed to be enfiladed, 
 owing to the small projection of the salients. 
 
134 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 2dly. Each branch is defended not only by the fire of 
 the adjoining crotchet, but by several others. 
 
 3dly. Their outline is very easily adapted to all varie- 
 ties of ground ; and on slopes, in particular, they are very 
 advantageous, because a small additional height given to 
 the crotchets will defilade a long extent of branch from 
 the fire of an enemy on the height. 
 
 Their defects are : 
 
 1st. The crotchets being short, very little of the ditch 
 of each is defended by the adjacent branch. 
 
 2dly. A battery which can enfilade one branch is 
 equally able to enfilade several. 
 
 CrSmaillere lines may be much strengthened by plac- 
 ing along their front bastions or double redans, at inter- 
 vals varying from 690 to 800 yards, in order that a cross 
 fire of artillery may be brought from them in front of the 
 other parts of the line. 
 
 The crotchets should face towards the bastions, or re- 
 dans, in order that the fire from the crotchets may defend 
 the salients of those works, and that the branches may 
 be defiladed by being directed on the bastions or double 
 redans. When the line crosses a valley, the branches 
 may be most effectually defiladed by giving the whole a 
 bend concave towards the exterior, and placing the bas- 
 tions, or redans, on the high ground ; these works will 
 thus form the more advanced parts of the line. 
 
 The flanks of the bastions must be connected with the 
 next crotchets on both sides by broken curtains, taking 
 care that the re-entering angles are not less than right 
 angles. 
 
 Bastioned lines are made precisely in the manner al- 
 ready pointed out for the fronts of bastioned forts ; such 
 lines may be strengthened by lunettes, constructed at 
 musket-shot distances in their front, and having their faces 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 135 
 
 directed upon those of the bastions, in order that the 
 ditches of the lunettes, and the ground in front of them, 
 may be defended by those faces. 
 
 The flanks of the lunettes give a direct and close fire 
 in front of the salients of the bastions ; but care must be 
 taken in their construction that they do not fire into each 
 other ; on this account, when the fronts are in one straight 
 line, it is usual either to suppress the flanks of the lunettes, 
 or to place a lunette on every alternate front only. 
 
 The communication from the lines to the gorge of 
 each lunette is by a caponniere, which is, generally, made 
 broadest at the inner end, in order to enable the garrison 
 to meet the enemy on a superior front, should he succeed 
 in getting into it ; its parapet is made only 3 feet above 
 the ground that it may not mask the fire of the lines, and 
 consequently its interior must be sunk 4 or 5 feet to 
 afford the requisite cover ; its breadth must be sufficient 
 to allow room for a banquette. A traverse is placed at 
 its inner extremity, and, perhaps, (according to the nature 
 of the ground and the length of the passage,) at intervals 
 along the passage. 
 
 Sometimes the line changes its direction ; in such 
 cases, when the change causes the parts of the line to 
 form with each other a re-entering angle, the latter is one 
 of the strongest parts of the line. 
 
 LINES WITH INTERVALS, OR BROKEN LINES. 
 
 Broken lines should always, when practicable, be dis- 
 posed in a double row, and in such a manner that the 
 inner works may flank the outer ; the advantages pos- 
 sessed by broken lines are : 
 
 1st. With the same extent as continuous lines, they 
 
136 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 require less labor in the construction, and fewer troops to 
 occupy them, consequently large reserves may be formed. 
 
 2dly. The defenders may advance in force and in a 
 regular formation through the intervals, and attack the 
 enemy, should he have been thrown into confusion. 
 
 3dly. They oblige the enemy to overpower each sep- 
 arate work before he can become possessed of the whole ; 
 whereas if a continuous line be forced in one part, it is 
 generally lost to the defenders. 
 
 4thly. If the enemy has gained one work he will then 
 be exposed to the flanking fire of the adjacent works, and 
 to a fire from the works in the second line. 
 
 To profit fully by this advantage, when the front line 
 consists of closed works, their rear faces ought to be of 
 slight construction, that the artillery of the second line 
 may easily demolish those faces, if the enemy should gain 
 possession of the works. 
 
 When there are two lines of works, the heaviest ar- 
 tillery should be placed in the inner line, or else the en- 
 emy, obtaining possession of the exterior line, would turn 
 the guns against the other, and have a superiority over 
 the defenders. 
 
 When lines are on sloping ground descending towards 
 the front, the slope should, if possible, be cut very steep, 
 so as to form an escarpment before the works. 
 
 A single row of redans or redoubts is comparatively 
 weak, for the fire from them crosses at a distance in front 
 of the intervals, and but feebly defends the salients. Lu- 
 nettes are better in such a situation on account of the fire 
 of the flanks, which may be brought to cross the capitals 
 close to the salient angles. 
 
 The intervals between the works which form a broken 
 line should not exceed 160 yards, in order that they may 
 be defended bv an effective cross fire from those works. 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 137 
 
 The different works should occupy the most prominent 
 and the highest ground ; also the flanking parts ought to 
 be perpendicular to their lines of defence. 
 
 The intervals between the works may be strengthened 
 by artificial obstacles, or by a trench, for troops, with a 
 rough parapet, (like the first parallel in a siege,) having 
 a broad interior slope to enable the men tu advance over 
 it when occasion requires. 
 
 DEFENCE OF FIELD WORKS. 
 
 A spot selected for a military post should not be com- 
 manded, especially on the flank or in the rear, within the 
 ordinary range of a field piece. There should be plenty 
 of materials on the spot to aid in strengthening the 
 works, or in forming obstructions in front of them. The 
 soil should be of a nature to be easily worked, and the 
 position should be difficult of access ; it should, however, 
 offer the means of retreating in security, and with facility. 
 
 The highest ground of a position should be occupied 
 by the salients of works, for then the adjoining faces will 
 be, in some measure, secured from enfilade fire ; it follows 
 that the re-entering angles should be placed in the lowest 
 spots. 
 
 It is very essential to create obstructions within short 
 range of musketry in front of all works of a temporary 
 nature, with a view of breaking the order of the assail- 
 ants, and detaining them under a close and severe fire, if 
 they persist in forcing their way through. 
 
 In fact, all the movements of an enemy, whether to 
 the front, to the right or left, should be as much cramped 
 and impeded as possible ; it is important to break his 
 order and put him into confusion when under fire, for he 
 
138 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 can seldom re-form under such circumstances ; and if he 
 attacks in disorder, the chances are against his success. 
 
 To save time in making palisades or stockade work, 
 the whole quantity ought to be divided into distinct por- 
 tions, say 10 or 12 feet in length, to one carpenter and 
 two laborers ; and to prevent confusion in obtaining ma- 
 terials for constructing obstacles, it is well to divide the 
 men into parties of 8 or 10 each, prescribing to each 
 party the nature of the materials required, the place 
 where they are to be obtained, and the spot at which they 
 are to be deposited. 
 
 The materials are obtained by felling trees, unroofing 
 houses, taking up floors, and the like. 
 
 The guns of a work should not, generally, reply to the 
 cannonade which precedes an assault, but should be placed 
 behind traverses, or other places of shelter previously 
 prepared for them ; they should only fire at the enemy's 
 artillery, while the latter is changing its position. 
 
 Bound shot or shells are fired against guns ; grape, 
 canister, spherical case, and rockets against troops. 
 
 As soon as the enemy's light troops advance, the par- 
 apets are to be manned ; sand-bags previously filled are 
 placed along the parapet, leaving loopholes between 
 them ; they are musket-shot proof, and give the men 
 the necessary confidence to enable them to take a 
 steady aim. One rank of men is sufficient on the ban- 
 quette, others being placed behind them to load. A re- 
 serve is to be stationed under cover, who fall upon the 
 assailants with the bayonet, should they succeed in getting 
 into the work. For a good defence there ought to be a 
 file per yard to man the parapet, with a reserve of one- 
 fourth or one-sixth of the whole, in addition. 
 
 As soon as the assaulting columns begin to mask the 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 139 
 
 fire of their own artillery, the guns of the work will be 
 brought up, and open their fire on them. 
 
 A sortie (very rarely) may be made, should the en- 
 emy be thrown into disorder ; but this step requires great 
 caution, for should the sortie be repelled, the enemy may 
 enter the work with the retiring troops. 
 
 Fougasses, having been previously prepared, will be 
 fired the instant the enemy is above them, by means of a 
 piece of safety fuze, or a musket with its muzzle in the 
 powder and a wire to the trigger. 
 
 If the assailants at length descend into the ditch, shells, 
 grenades, and every sort of missile are to be thrown upon 
 them. The shells are rolled down by being placed in 
 troughs laid on the superior slope of the parapet. 
 
 If the enemy has to cross a river before he arrives at 
 the work, the fords may be rendered impassable for ar- 
 tillery and cavalry, by digging pits, planting stakes, throw- 
 ing in felled trees and harrows, or by driving wagons or 
 carts full of stones into the middle, and taking off the 
 wheels. 
 
 Should the ford be beyond musket range from the 
 work, a parapet may be raised opposite to it, at such a 
 distance from it as to permit the defenders to issue forth 
 and charge the party crossing it, at the moment they land 
 in disorder on the bank. 
 
 To prevent surprise, outposts are stationed round the 
 work at night, and heaps of dried brushwood, or tarred 
 fascines, should be placed along the post at intervals ; at 
 the approach of the enemy, the outposts retire into the 
 work, having set fire to the piles of brushwood ; this will, 
 in a great measure, prevent an enemy from concealing 
 himself near the work. 
 
140 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 LOOPHOLING WALLS. 
 
 Walls are made available for the purposes of defence 
 by loopholing them ; if a ditch cannot, for want of time, 
 be dug at the foot of the wall outside, the loopholes ought 
 to be, at least, 7 feet above the ground, to prevent the 
 assailants from making use of them ; in the former case 
 a temporary stage might be made of casks, ladders, &c., 
 within 4 feet or 4 feet 6 inches of the loopholes, to enable 
 the men to fire through them. 
 
 The quickest way of loopholing a wall is to break it 
 down from the top in the form of narrow fissures about 
 3 feet asunder ; but if the wall is very low, or there is 
 not time to make loopholes, a piece of timber, or the 
 trunk of a tree, supported on the top of it by a couple of 
 stones, would be a ready expedient, and men could fire 
 from the opening under it ; or sand-bags, or large stones 
 or sods, might be placed on the wall at intervals. The 
 loopholes made in walls or buildings can seldom be of 
 any regular form ; the width outside should not exceed 3 
 inches, but inside it may be equal to the thickness of the 
 wall. The best tools (of such as are usually found about 
 buildings) to break loopholes through a wall, are crow- 
 bars, pickaxes, and large hammers. 
 
 Barricades for roads and streets are made, if time per- 
 mits, by sinking a ditch 7 or 8 feet deep, and forming the 
 earth into a breastwork, adding palisades, &c. ; but if 
 time presses, casks, boxes, or cart bodies filled with earth, 
 stones, manure, or cinders, sacks of flour, bales of mer- 
 chandise, and the like, must be arranged across ; paving 
 stones may be taken up and disposed in a similar manner. 
 
 The mass should be raised 6 or 7 feet high, and a ban- 
 quette formed for firing over it ; the neighboring houses 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 should also be loopholed, so as to give a good flanking 
 fire over the ground in front of the barricade, and stones 
 may be collected to throw down on the assailants from 
 the contiguous houses. 
 
 FORTIFYING HOUSES. 
 
 The great art of converting buildings, and the out- 
 houses and walls that usually surround them, into defen- 
 sible posts, consists in selecting from the mass of objects 
 at hand such as will answer the purpose, and in sacrificing 
 every thing else ; making use of the materials to strengthen 
 the part which is to be fortified. 
 
 The building chosen should possess some of, or all the 
 following requisites : 
 
 1st. It should command all that surrounds it. 
 
 2dly. It should be substantial, (not thatched,) and of 
 a nature to furnish materials useful for placing it in a 
 state of defence. 
 
 8dly. It should be of an extent not too great for the 
 number of the defenders, and should only require for the 
 completion of the proposed object the time and means 
 which can be spared. 
 
 4thly. It should have projections flanking the walls 
 and angles. 
 
 5thly. It should be difficult of access on the side ex- 
 posed to attack, and yet have a safe retreat for the defend- 
 ers ; and, of course, it must be in such a position as to 
 answer the purpose for which the detachment is posted. 
 
 As a rough guide to judge of the third requisite, there 
 ought to be a man for every 4 feet of wall round the in- 
 terior of the lower story, one man to 6 feet for the second 
 story, one to S feet for an attic, with a reserve of about 
 one-sixth of the whole. 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 Should there exist any doubt about having sufficient 
 time to execute all that might be wished, it would be nec- 
 essary to decide on the best points to be secured, in order 
 to repel an immediate attack ; in such a case it might be 
 well to employ as many men as could work without hin- 
 dering each other by being too crowded, to collect mate- 
 rials, and barricade the doors and windows on the ground 
 floor, to make loopholes in them, and to level any ob- 
 struction outside that would give cover to the enemy, or; 
 facilitate the attack ; to sink ditches opposite the doors 
 on the outside, and arrange loopholes in the windows of 
 the upper story ; to make loopholes through the walls 
 generally, attending first to the most exposed parts, and 
 to break communications through all the party walls and 
 partitions ; to place abatis or any feasible obstruction on 
 the outside, and to improve the defence of the post by 
 the construction of tambours ; to place outbuildings and 
 garden walls in a state of defence, and establish communi- 
 cations between them ; to make arrangements (in the 
 lower story particularly) for defending one room after 
 another, so that a partial possession only could be ob- 
 tained on a sudden attack being made. 
 
 These different works should be undertaken in the 
 order of their relative importance, according to circum- 
 stances ; and after securing the immediate object for which 
 they were designed, they might remain to be improved on, 
 if an opportunity should offer. 
 
 Houses are fortified by piercing loopholes through 
 the walls, and if the walls are high, two, or even three 
 rows of loopholes may be made, and a temporary scaf- 
 folding of furniture, casks, &c., erected for firing from the 
 upper ones : one row may be made close to the ground, 
 with pits dug in the rear, or the floor may be cut through, 
 if there is a basement, for the convenience of making use 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 143 
 
 of them. The loopholes may have the dimensions before 
 prescribed, and they ought not to be made at a less dis- 
 tance than three feet from each other, lest the wall should 
 be too much weakened, or the defenders inconveniently 
 crowded. 
 
 The staircases are to be cut away, the communication 
 being kept up by ladders ; and the floors, as well as the 
 partition walls, should be loopholed. 
 
 Thatched roofs and all combustible materials are to be 
 removed, and barrels of water should be placed in every 
 room in readiness to extinguish fire. 
 
 A communication ought to be opened on the side fur- 
 thest from the enemy, through which ammunition and 
 reinforcements may enter. 
 
 The door or barrier closing this communication may 
 be made musket-proof by nailing strong planks to it, and 
 if there is a basement to the house, the floor should be 
 cut away within the door, so as to form a sort of ditch. 
 
 All the doors and windows are to be barricaded and 
 loopholed. The best barricade for a door is made by 
 strong palisades, which are secured to a thick cross beam 
 let into the wall on each side ; a bank of earth may also 
 be formed on the exterior. 
 
 A flanking defence can always be obtained by con- 
 structing a tambour in front of a side, or at the angles of 
 a house. 
 
 All enclosures which may afford the enemy cover 
 must be removed, if not included in the defence. 
 
 If artillery is likely to be employed against the house, 
 it will be necessary, unless the walls are very strong, to 
 support the timbers of the roof by means of props. 
 
 If there is time, the house may be formed into a 
 blockhouse by pulling down the upper stories, and laying 
 
144: FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 the materials over the lower rooms to make the covering 
 shell-proof. 
 
 A ditch may be dug on the outside of the house, and 
 the earth placed against the walls : some protection may 
 be obtained for the doors, by placing strong beams against 
 the walls on the outside in an inclined position, and heap- 
 ing earth or rubbish over them. 
 
 INTRENCHING A VILLAGE. 
 
 In intrenching a village, the buildings, walls, and 
 hedges on its circuit are to be considered as part of its 
 enclosure, and are to be made fit for the purposes of de- 
 fence ; all the intervals between them are to be occupied 
 by breastworks or palisades, and strengthened by abatis. 
 
 The streets are to be barricaded at intervals with carts 
 or wagons having one or two wheels taken off, with barrels 
 of earth, bales of merchandise, &c. A passage should be 
 made through the adjoining houses, which should be loop- 
 holed, and care must be taken that the barricade be not 
 turned by an enemy passing down the neighboring streets. 
 
 Some strong building, such as a church, court-house, 
 or jail, should be selected, and fortified with particular 
 care, to serve as a citadel or reduit, to which the defenders 
 may retire when driven in from the exterior part of the 
 village. 
 
 Advantage must be taken of any walls or outbuildings 
 surrounding whatever has been selected as the reduit or 
 keep ; and they should be converted into outworks for 
 strengthening it as an independent post. Should the vil- 
 lage be of too great an extent for the force thrown into it, 
 a portion of it only might be strengthened, and the re- 
 mainder separated or destroyed ; or the defence might be 
 confined to some separate building. 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 145 
 
 The roads by which an enemy would advance should 
 be cut up, and obstructed with felled trees, ploughs, har- 
 rows, &c. ; bridges should be broken, and the passage 
 disputed under cover of some simple field work placed 
 favorably to command the road. 
 
 The resolute defence of villages situated on the front 
 of an army has often decided the fate of a battle ; in this 
 position, they may be regarded as bastions connected by 
 movable curtains. 
 
 ATTACK ON FIELD WORKS. 
 
 The attack on field works may be executed by sur- 
 prise, or by open force ; the former can only take place 
 when the advance of the assailants is concealed by fog or 
 darkness, or by the nature of the ground, as in mountain- 
 ous countries. 
 
 In the attack of field works by open force, it is ad- 
 visable to advance against several points at the same mo- 
 ment, when circumstances permit ; of these some may be 
 false attacks, and may be converted into real ones if the 
 enemy appears weak or hesitating on the points threat- 
 ened. One attack ought, generally, to be directed upon 
 the rear of the work, (if open at the gorge,) which will 
 always lessen the confidence of the defenders. 
 
 As many assaulting columns should be formed as 
 there are points to be attacked, and before the works arc 
 stormed, pits and trenches should (when time permits, 
 and there is no natural cover for skirmishers) be dug to 
 conceal riflemen : these pits are about four feet wide, and, 
 with the excavated earth raised before them, four feet in 
 depth, in order that they may serve to cover a file of men 
 to that height. 
 7 
 
146 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 
 
 The artillery should be posted on the prolongations 
 of the faces to enfilade them, weaken the parapets, and 
 ruin the interior defences of the work and its ditch , for 
 the latter purpose howitzers are best adapted. As soon 
 as the artillery has produced some effect, the signal for 
 the assault should be given ; light troops will gradually 
 advance towards the counterscarp, in skirmishing order, 
 firing at the gunners through the embrasures ; they will 
 conceal themselves in the pits and trenches prepared for 
 them, or seek shelter in the inequalities of the ground. 
 They should be followed by storming parties, and these 
 should be accompanied by a detachment of sappers, (or a 
 squad of soldiers told off for that purpose,) carrying axes, 
 crowbars, bags of powder, &c., to force obstacles, Lastly, 
 the reserve will follow, at some distance, to act as cir- 
 cumstances may require ; it may repel attempts to aid 
 the defenders, reinforce the storming parties if they suc- 
 ceed in entering the work, or it may afford them a rally- 
 ing point, and cover their retreat if they fail. 
 
 The troops descend into the ditch with unfixed bayo- 
 nets, in order to avoid accidents ; and they fix them when 
 on the berme. 
 
 Should the ditches have a great depth, it will be neces- 
 sary to lessen it by means of bags with heather or grass, 
 or by bundles of hay or straw, or fascines, &c. 
 
 A bridge formed of a gun limber and a ladder may 
 be run up to the counterscarp and thrown across. 
 
 To avoid mistakes in inarching by night to attack, 
 each soldier should bear some visible mark by which he 
 may be distinguished from an enemy. If a breach or any 
 particular point is to be attacked by night, the way to it 
 should be marked by distinguishable pickets or other ob- 
 jects, placed or re-marked on the ground at the time of the 
 previous reconnoissance. 
 
FIELD FORTIFICATIONS. 14:7 
 
 The columns march to the assault in the direction of 
 the capitals ; but after passing the ditch, the troops should 
 enter the works by the faces, on each side of the salient 
 angle, that they may present a front in the work equal 
 or superior to that of the enemy. When it may be ad- 
 visable to force an entrance at the gate of a fortified post, 
 that gate may be destroyed by a piece of artillery brought 
 close up to it, or by a bag of powder attached to the wood 
 by a gimlet, or propped against it by a forked stick. 
 
 In assaulting a place whose scarps and counterscarps 
 are revetted with masonry, scaling ladders must be em- 
 ployed. The first division of each column of assault car- 
 ries the longest ladders ; they descend into the ditch with 
 them, and afterwards carry the ladders across and raise 
 them against the scarp. 
 
 The next division carries other ladders, which they 
 place and leave against the counterscarp. The ladders 
 are carried and planted with arms slung. Ladders plant- 
 ed against a wall are not to slope above one-fourth of 
 their height, lest they should break under the weight of 
 the men. 
 
 A strong firing party is drawn up on the glacis to 
 keep down the fire of the defenders, if the latter should 
 appear on the parapets to oppose the assault. 
 
 ATTACKING HOUSES. 
 
 In the attack of houses, artillery should be employed 
 to form a breach before giving the assault, and also to 
 throw hot shot, shells, and carcasses. 
 
 If the detachment is unprovided with artillery, at- 
 tempts must be made to force passages through doors, 
 windows, or unflanked parts of the walls : the attack 
 
148 FIELD FOETIFICATIOXS. 
 
 should be made on different parts of the building, to dis- 
 tract the attention of the defenders ; in the mean time, 
 and for the same purpose, parties of men keep up a fire 
 on any points where there is a chance of disabling them. 
 Attempts may also be made to effect an entrance through 
 the roof, by means of ladders. 
 
 If the assailants have neither powder nor crowbars for 
 forcing doors, a heavy beam or tree may, if at hand, be 
 used as a battering ram ; a fire of straw or brushwood 
 may be made near the walls further to distract and alarm 
 the defenders, and to cover the operations of the assailants. 
 
 ATTACKING BARRICADES. 
 
 Artillery will soon clear a passage through ordinary 
 barricades ; if not, the assaulting party must endeavor to 
 turn the barricade, either by passing down some other 
 street, or by forcing a passage from one house to another, 
 until they arrive in rear of it : a few loaded muskets ap- 
 plied to the locks and bolts of the strongest door will 
 force it open, and the partition walls may be destroyed 
 by bags of powder, &c. After having taken possession 
 of a house, troops must be left in it for the purpose of 
 firing from it upon the barricade. 
 
 
CHAPTER X. 
 
 ARTILLERY. 
 
 THE pieces of artillery in ordinary use are: guns, 
 howitzers, and mortars. They are made either of iron or 
 brass, (gun metal.) 
 
 Brass guns are made of a metal composed of 8 parts 
 of tin to 100 of copper, and cost about $900 per ton ; 
 iron guns cost $100 per ton. 
 
 Brass guns are used for field batteries, as they can 
 be made with a less quantity of metal than iron guns of 
 the same calibre, without danger of bursting. Therefore, 
 though brass is heavier than iron, guns of the former 
 metal are lighter than those of the latter. Brass guns 
 are, however, soon rendered unserviceable by repeated 
 and quick firing. 
 
 Iron guns are better adapted for the attack or defence 
 of fortresses, and for service on board of ship, being less 
 expensive than those of brass, and better able to sustain 
 long continued and rapid firing. 
 
 At the siege of St. Sebastian, each piece fired 350 
 rounds in 15 hours without becoming unserviceable : 
 brass guns could not have fired 120 rounds in the same 
 time, without drooping at the muzzle and running at the 
 vent so much as to become useless. 
 
 The length of a gun is measured from the rear of the 
 base or breech-ring to the face of the muzzle. 
 
150 v ARTILLERY. 
 
 The CALIBRE is the diameter of the bore. 
 
 The DISPART is the excess of half the diameter of the 
 base ring (or thickest part of the gun) above half the di- 
 ameter of the muzzle. Guns are made thicker at the 
 breech than at the muzzle, the better to resist the expan- 
 sive force of the powder. 
 
 The TRUNNIONS are projections or arms one on each 
 side of the gun, by which it is secured and supported in 
 the carriage. 
 
 The WINDAGE is the excess of the diameter of the bore 
 over the diameter of the shot, and is, in field guns, about 
 T ^- the diameter of the shot ; in iron guns it is about 
 inch.* 
 
 Guns are named according to the number of pounds 
 contained in the round shot they carry ; thus a 6-pounder 
 carries a C Ib. shot ; a 12-pounder carries a 12 Ib. 
 shot, etc. 
 
 The service charge of powder for battering is one- 
 third of the weight of the shot. 
 
 The charge for field guns is from to J of the weight 
 of the shot, as a greater charge is found to injure the car- 
 riages without producing an equivalent effect. 
 
 For ricochet firing, the charge varies from -Jg- to -^ the 
 weight of the shot ; and the elevation of the gun from 5 
 to 9. 
 
 To increase the range of the gun, an increase of eleva- 
 tion above a horizontal line must be given to the axis of 
 the gun. 
 
 In pointing a gun, the line of direction is given from 
 the trail, and the elevation from the breech. 
 
 * 12, 9, and 6 pounders have a / 10 inch \vindage ; a 3 pounder has 9 /ioo i ncn 
 32 pounder from 1 / 5 inch to Va inch, according to the length ; 24 pounder 
 about VB inch ; 18 pounder about J / 7 inch. Carronades have a windage of 1 / 64 
 the diameter of the shot. 
 
ARTILLEKY. 151 
 
 Point-blank position of the gun denotes that the piece 
 is laid, directly, at the object without elevation : to effect 
 this, the lowest notch on the side of the base ring, the 
 notch on the side of the muzzle, and the object to be fired 
 at, are brought into one line ; the two notches are in a 
 plane passing through the axis of the bore, and that plane 
 may be parallel or oblique to the horizon. 
 
 Point-blank range is the distance from the muzzle of 
 the gun to the first point at which the shot strikes the 
 ground ; it being supposed that the latter is parallel to 
 the axis of the bore. 
 
 If the gun is pointed at an object, by looking along 
 the upper surface of it, (for which purpose there is a notch 
 behind the vent, and one on the top of the muzzle,) it is 
 said to be laid by the line of metal, and it gives the gun 
 an elevation of about one degree ; the breech being wider 
 than the muzzle. 
 
 The upper right hand quadrant of the base ring has 12 
 quarter degrees (called quarter sights) notched on it ; by 
 bringing the object, the notch on the side of the muzzle, 
 and any quarter sight into one line, a corresponding ele- 
 vation or depression is given to the gun. 
 
 The tangent-scale is raised from a groove behind the 
 vent, and can be fixed at any point of its length by a 
 screw ; it is divided into quarter degrees from one degree 
 upwards : by means of this scale the requisite elevation, 
 as far as 6 or 8 degrees, may be given with great accu- 
 racy, the object being seen in a line with the top of the 
 tangent-scale, and the notch on the top of the muzzle. 
 
 The point-blank range of light (brass) 12, 6, and 3- 
 pounders, is 200 yards ; medium 12 and 9-pound ers and 
 heavy 6-pounders, 300 yards ; iron (long) 24-pounders, 
 360 yards. 
 
 Every quarter of a degree of elevation increases the 
 
152 ABTILLEEY. 
 
 range of each class by 100 yards until there are attained, 
 respectively, the ranges of 600, 700, and 1200 yards, 
 after which each quarter of a degree increases the range 
 by a less amount than 100 yards. 
 
 Howitzers * are a short description of ordnance with 
 chambers, and are used, principally, for projecting shells 
 horizontally or nearly so. 
 
 Their principal advantages are, that they can be more 
 easily loaded, and are considerably lighter, in proportion 
 to their calibre than guns ; they may, also, be used as 
 mortars : they have no dispart, the diameter of the base 
 ring and swell of the muzzle being equal, or the difference 
 being made up by a patch on the muzzle. 
 
 Howitzers are intended for enfilade and ricochet firing, 
 to reach troops behind heights and parapets, and to breach 
 earthen works by firing shell into them : for these puf- 
 poses heavy charges are not necessary, although the bores 
 may be large ; the chamber is formed so as to confine 
 the powder as much as possible, and so that the shell 
 may rest on its mouth. 
 
 Mortars differ from guns in the construction of their 
 i bore, their chamber being in the shape of a frustum of a 
 cone, by which means the powder is confined, and the 
 shell fits close to the sides ; they are also much shorter 
 and thicker than guns : they have trunnions at the ex- 
 tremity of the breech, and are usually placed on their 
 beds so as to project shells, carcasses, or fire balls at an 
 angle of 45, the range being increased by augmenting 
 the charge of powder. 
 
 The shells discharged from mortars describe a high 
 curve in their flight, and fall with their full weight almost 
 vertically upon the object to be struck ; they thus frac- 
 
 * The charges for certain howitzers are as follows : 10-inch, 7 Ibs. ; 8-inch, 
 4 Ibs. ; 5i-inch, (24-pounder,) 2 toZilbs. ; 4 2 / 6 -mch, (12ipounder,) to i Ib. 
 
ARTILLERY. 153 
 
 ture the strongest buildings, and bursting at the same 
 time, they set fire to every thing combustible about 
 them. 
 
 Their splinters are also very destructive, and fiy in 
 all directions, sometimes as far as 400 yards. As mor- 
 tars fire over the parapet, and not through embrasures, 
 it is necessary that they should be placed at a distance 
 of 12 feet behind the crest of the parapet, supposing it to 
 be of the ordinary height. 
 
 Kockets are cylindrical cases of pasteboard * or iron, 
 attached to one end of a rod of wood, and containing a 
 composition, which being ignited, they are projected 
 through the air by a force arising from the combustion. 
 
 Military rockets terminate either in a cone or a par- 
 abolid, and may serve either as shells or carcasses : their 
 weight is from 3 to 32 Ibs. They are, in general, fired 
 from tubes, and the proper elevation is about a degree 
 for each hundred yards in the intended range. Fired 
 against troops they create much disorder, and falling on 
 buildings, they destroy them or set them on fire. 
 
 The length of the rod is about 60 diameters of the 
 rocket, and the composition with which the cylinder is 
 filled consists generally of saltpetre, sulphur, and charcoal 
 or gunpowder. The composition is rammed into the case, 
 but a void space is left about the axis, in order that a 
 considerable surface may be at once in a state of combus* 
 tion. At the choke or neck of the rocket there are several 
 apertures, at one of which the fire is communicated to the. 
 composition. 
 
 The cause of the rocket's motion is, the excess of the 
 pressure produced by the burning material at the head of 
 the rocket above the pressure at the neck, when part of 
 
 * Tho former arc for signals, and tho latter aro for military service. 
 
AJRTILLERY. 
 
 the flame escapes through the apertures ; the stick serves 
 to guide the rocket in its flight. 
 
 Shells are hollow shot with a hole to receive the fuse ; 
 they are discharged, usually, from mortars and howitzers, 
 and are charged with a quantity of powder sufficient to 
 burst them when at the end of their range ; the fuze being 
 cut of such a length that the charge may be ignited at the 
 proper moment. 
 
 To breach earthen works, the shells are fired horizon- 
 tally, from howitzers, with reduced charges, that the fuze 
 may not be extinguished before igniting the powder in 
 the shell : this powder is a bursting charge. 
 
 Carcasses are shells with three fuze holes ; they are 
 filled with a peculiar composition, which flames out of the 
 holes with great power and fury for about ten minutes : 
 they are thrown from mortars, howitzers, and guns, to 
 set fire to buildings, and sometimes to serve as light 
 balls. 
 
 Shrapnell shells, or spherical-case shot, are shells filled 
 with musket balls, having a bursting charge of powder 
 mixed with them. They are discharged from guns and 
 howitzers, and have a fuze like that of a common shell, 
 but shorter, in order that the shell may burst in the air 
 before the completion of its range ; in this manner mus- 
 ket balls and the splinters of the shell can be poured into 
 a column of troops at 1,200 yards distance. 
 
 Common case, or canister shot, are cylindrical tin 
 canisters with wooden or iron bottoms, containing from 
 \ 12 to 70 shot, which vary in weight from 1 J oz. to 8 oz. 
 each, according to the calibre of the gun. As they burst 
 nearly at the mouth of the gun, their effect cannot be de- 
 pended on beyond 200 yards, although they are used at 
 a greater distance. 
 
 Grape shot are of two patterns ; either the balls are 
 
ARTILLERY. 155 
 
 quilted round an iron pin with a circular plate at the 
 bottom, or a pin runs through a succession of plates, be- 
 tween every two of which is a tier of balls ; in the latter 
 case they are also called " tier shot." 
 
 In the first pattern, the shot soon corrode the canvas 
 quilting, therefore the second is preferred : there are 9 
 shot in each round, each shot varying in weight from 8 
 oz. to 4 Ibs. according to the calibre of the gun ; the most 
 effective range is about 200 yards. 
 
 Hand grenades are shells of about 1 Ib. 13 oz. weight, \ 
 with a fuze and bursting charge ; they can be thrown, by j 
 the hand, about 25 or 30 yards ; they are useful for the / 
 defence of breaches and unflanked works. 
 
 Gunpowder is composed of 75 parts saltpetre, 15 
 charcoal, and 10 sulphur in every hundred parts : a cubic 
 foot of it weighs about 55 Ibs. 
 
 A shell fuze is a funnel-shaped tube of well-seasoned \ 
 beech, filled with a composition of saltpetre, sulphur, r" 
 and mealed gunpowder. 
 
 Portfire is a composition of saltpetre, charcoal, arict\ 
 sulphur, pressed closely into a cylinder of white brown l/ x 
 paper : they are made in lengths of 16 inches, and are/^ 
 used to discharge guns, to ignite bags of powder, &c. 
 
 Portfire and shell fuzes burn at the rate of one inch 
 in five seconds : Bickford's fuze (which will burn under 
 water) burns 6 inches in 5 seconds, or 2 yards in a 
 minute. 
 
 To fire shot or shells a ricochet, or in such a manner 
 that they make several bounds during their course, it is 
 necessary to give the gun or howitzer a charge, and an 
 elevation depending on the extent of the range required. 
 In enfilading a work ricochet, the gun should be placed 
 nearly in the direction of the interior slope of the parapet 
 
156 AKTILLEBY. 
 
 produced ; and its elevation should be such that the shot 
 may just clear the crest of the parapet in front. 
 
 Ricochet firing against guns in a work, is useless if 
 carried on at a greater distance than 650 yards ; the best 
 range is about 400 yards. 
 
 Round shot are sometimes fired red hot from heavy 
 guns, to set on fire buildings, blockhouses, shipping, and 
 any defences in the construction of which timber has been 
 employed. 
 
 It requires about three-quarters of an hour to heat a 
 24 pound shot when the furnace has been previously pre- 
 pared ; double that time if not. In loading, a tight dry 
 wad is placed over the powder, and afterwards a wet wad, 
 first soaked, and then well wrung ; next, the gun being 
 slightly elevated, the shot is brought up, by means of an 
 instrument called the carrier, and rolled home ; if it is 
 required to depress the gun, another wet wad must be 
 placed over the shot. 
 
 A gun platform is a flooring of wood or stone, to pre- 
 vent the wheels or trucks of a gun carriage from sinking 
 into the ground : the garrison and siege platforms are 
 10 feet wide at the head, 15 feet long, and 14 feet wide at 
 the splay or tail. 
 
CHAPTER XL 
 
 MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY. 
 
 1. FOR instruction in the manual of light artillery, 
 the piece selected is the light 12-pdr. howitzer, used for 
 mountain service, on account of its simplicity, and as em- 
 bracing all the principles required for serving a light field 
 piece. It is generally transported by mules. The piece 
 and the shafts may be packed upon one mule, the carriage 
 upon another, and the' ammunition chest upon a third. 
 The carriage is adapted for draught. 
 
 In case the pieces are served by a fully organized 
 company, a jumper or short light pole, with a cross-piece 
 of iron at the end, is substituted for the shafts. A rope, 
 attached to the axle-tree and running through rings in the 
 cross-piece, enables the detachments to draw the pieces. 
 In coming into battery, the rope is detached and held in 
 a coil ready for use. 
 
 2. The mule that draws the piece, or carries it when 
 packed, is called the shaft mule ; the mule that carries 
 the carriage, when packed, the carriage mule ; and the 
 mule on which the ammunition chests are packed, the am- 
 munition mule. 
 
 3. The piece is in battery when the shafts are detached 
 and it is in a proper position to be fired. The front in 
 this case is the direction towards which the muzzle points. 
 
X 
 
 158 MANUAL FOE LIGHT ARTILLERY. 
 
 The front, when the shafts are attached, is the direction 
 towards which the shafts point. The right of the piece, 
 in both cases, is the right of the cannoneer when facing 
 to the front. 
 
 The position of the mules, when the piece is in bat- 
 tery, is as follows : 
 
 The ammunition mule fifteen yards in rear of the 
 piece, the shaft mule two yards in rear of the ammunition 
 mule, and the carriage mule two yards in rear of the 
 shaft mule, all facing towards the piece. 
 
 4. In the order of march) with the howitzer mounted 
 on its carriage, the shaft mule is hitched in, and the car- 
 riage and ammunition mules follow ; the first two yards 
 from the piece, and the second two yards from the first. 
 
 5. In the order of march, with the piece and carriage 
 packed upon the mules, the shaft mule leads, and the other 
 two follow ; the distance between each being two yards. 
 
 FORMING THE DETACHMENT. 
 
 6. Six men are required for the service of the piece. 
 They are formed in two ranks, and told off from the right 
 by the chief of piece ; Nos. 1 and 2 being on the right, 
 No. 3 and the gunner being in the centre, and Nos. 4 
 and 5 on their left ; the even numbers and the gunner 
 being in the front, and the odd numbers in the rear rank. 
 
 The detachment is marched to the piece, and posted 
 as follows : 
 
 POSTS OF THE DETACHMENT. 
 
 7. In battery. Nos. 1 and 2 about one yard outside 
 of the wheels, and in line with the axle-tree, No. 1 being 
 on the right, and No. 2 on the left ; the gunner at the 
 
MANUAL FOR LIGHT AETILLEKY. 159 
 
 end of the trail ; No. 3 opposite the knob of the cascable, 
 covering No. 1 ; No. 4 on the right, and No. 5 on the 
 left of the ammunition mule ; all facing to the front. 
 The chief of piece is opposite to the trail, outside of and 
 near the left cannoneers. 
 
 8. In battery, without mules. Nos. 4 and 5 are on the 
 right and left of the ammunition chests, facing to the 
 front. 
 
 0. In the order of march, shaft mules hitched in. Nos. 
 
 1 and 2 opposite to the muzzle ; the gunner and No. 3 
 opposite to the trail ; and Nos. 4 and 5 opposite to the 
 saddle of the ammunition mule ; the gunner and even 
 numbers on the right, and the odd numbers on the left ; 
 all facing to the front, and covering each other in lines 
 one yard from the wheels. The chief of piece is on the 
 left of the driver of the shaft mule. 
 
 10. In the order of march, mules packed. Nos. 1 and 
 
 2 at the shaft mule ; the gunner and No. 3 at the car- 
 riage mule ; and Nos. 4 and 5 at the ammunition mule ; 
 the gunner and even numbers on the right, and odd num- 
 bers on the left ; all opposite to the saddles, one yard 
 from the mules, and facing to the fronk The chief of 
 piece is on the left of the driver of the shaft mule. 
 
 11. There is one driver to each mule. He is on the 
 left of the mule, and holds the reins with the right hand, 
 six inches from the mouth, the hand high and firm. 
 
 SERVICE OF THE PIECE. 
 
 12. The piece is in battery, the men at their posts. 
 (No. 7.) 
 
 The shafts are placed on the ground, one yard and a 
 half from the line of the right wheel, and parallel to it, 
 
160 MANUAL FOR LIGHT AKTILLEKY. 
 
 the cross-bar opposite to the trail, the shafts pointing to 
 the rear. 
 
 The chests, when the ammunition mule is absent, are 
 on the ground, fifteen yards in rear of the trail, their sides 
 parallel to the axis of the piece, backs together, the turn- 
 buckles outside. 
 
 13. At the command TAKE EQUIPMENTS, the gunner 
 distributes the equipments. No. 1, with the assistance 
 of No. 3, takes out the sponge. The gunner equips him- 
 self with the belt containing the hausse and priming wire, 
 and with the knee-guard and the finger-stall, wearing the 
 last on the second finger of the left hand. No. 3 wears 
 the tube pouch containing friction tubes and the lanyard. 
 Nos. 1 and 2 wear bricoles hung from the left shoulder 
 to the right side. Nos. 2 and 5 wear haversacks hung 
 from the right shoulder to the left side. 
 
 THE COMMANDS. 
 
 14. In loading by detail, the instructor gives all the 
 commands. 
 
 The commands are : Load by detail, LOAD, 2, 3, 4 ; 
 SPONGE, 2, 3, 4 ; RAM, 2, 3 ; READY ; FIRE ; and CEASE 
 FIRING. 
 
 When the service of the piece is not executed by de- 
 tail, the commands of the instructor are, either LOAD, 
 COMMENCE FIRING, and CEASE FIRING ; or, COMMENCE 
 FIRING and CEASE FIRING. After the command COMMENCE 
 FIRING, the action is continued without further commands 
 from the instructor until the command CEASE FIRING. 
 
 The last command is repeated by the chief of piece 
 and the gunner. 
 

I 
 1 
 
 H 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 -p 
 
 I 
 
 B 
 g 
 
 'S 
 
 -M 
 P 
 
MANUAL FOB LIGHT AKTILLEKY. 161 
 
 DUTIES OF THE CANNONEERS. 
 
 15. Duties of the Gunner. In action, the gunner 
 gives or repeats the commands of execution. At the 
 command or signal to commence firing, he gives the 
 word LOAD ; plants the left foot opposite to the knob of 
 the cascable ; places the right knee upon the ground near, 
 and on the left of the trail ; places the hausse, when it is 
 used ; seizes the lunette with the right hand, to give the 
 direction, and at the same time tends vent with the second 
 finger of the left hand, the thumb on the base of the 
 breech. 
 
 As soon as the piece is loaded and aimed, he removes 
 the hausse ; then rising pricks the cartridge ; gives the 
 word BEADY, and stepping clear of the wheel to the side 
 whence he can best observe the effect of the shot, gives 
 the command, FIRE. He continues the action in the same 
 manner, without farther commands from the instructor, 
 until the firing is ordered to cease. 
 
 When the instructor, instead of giving the command 
 COMMENCE FIRING, gives that of LOAD, the gunner repeats 
 it, and performs the same duties as just described, except 
 that he does not command FIRE, until the firing is ordered 
 to commence. 
 
 When the instructor gives all the commands, the 
 gunner performs the same duties, but without repeating 
 the commands. 
 
 16. Duties of No. 1. Until the command LOAD, he 
 stands square to the front, in line with the axle-tree, hold- 
 ing the sponge staff about the middle in the right hand, 
 and trailing it at an angle of 45. 
 
 For the convenience of instruction, the duties of No. 
 1 are divided into motions. 
 
162 MANUAL FOK LIGHT ARTILLERY. 
 
 First motion. At the command LOAD, No. 1 faces to 
 his left, steps obliquely to his right with the right foot, 
 and brings the sponge into a perpendicular position over 
 the right toe, the elbow close to the side, the right hand 
 at the height of the elbow. 
 
 Second motion. He plants the left foot near, and in 
 line with the wheel, and inclines the sponge across the 
 body to the left, the right opposite to the middle of the 
 body. 
 
 Third motion. He places the right foot twelve inches 
 to the right of the left, heels on the same line ; brings 
 the sponge into a horizontal position, and extending the 
 hands towards the ends of the staff, back of the right hand 
 up, that of the left down, rests the sponge-head against 
 the face of the piece ; the knees straight, the feet turned 
 out equally, and the body inclined forward. 
 
 Fourth motion. He introduces the sponge, drops the 
 left hand by the side of his thigh, and shoves the sponge 
 to the bottom of the chamber. 
 
 17. At the command SPONGE, he carefully sponges 
 out the chamber. 
 
 Second motion. He draws out the sponge, pressing 
 it upon the bottom of the bore, seizes the staff near the 
 sponge-head with the left hand, back down, and rests it 
 against the face of the piece. 
 
 Third motion. He turns the sponge over by bringing 
 the hands together at the middle of the staff, and giving 
 it a cant with each, throws the sponge over ; at the same 
 time turning the wrists so as to bring the staff horizon- 
 tal. Ha then extends the hands towards the ends of the 
 staff, back of the left up, that of the right down. 
 
 Fourth motion. As soon as the charge is inserted he 
 introduces the rammer-head into the muzzle, and joins the 
 left hand to the right. 
 
MANUAL FOR LIGHT AKTILLERY. 163 
 
 18. At the command RAM, he sends the charge care- 
 fully home, throwing the left hand over the piece. 
 
 Second motion. He draws out the sponge with the 
 right hand, letting it slide through the hand as far as the 
 middle of the staff, when he grasps it firmly, and seizing 
 it close to the rammer-head with the left hand, back up, 
 rests it against the face of the piece. 
 
 Third motion. He raises the sponge to the height of 
 his breast, and steps back, right foot first, to his position 
 opposite to the axle-tree ; quits the staff with the lefb 
 hand, and throwing the sponge uppermost, holds it at a 
 trail in the right. He remains facing the piece until the 
 command LOAD, when he steps up and performs the duties 
 just described. 
 
 When the loading is not by detail, No. 1 goes through 
 all his duties at the command LOAD. 
 
 At the flash of the gun, or command LOAD, he steps 
 up and again performs his duties as before, and so on, 
 until the command CEASE FIRING is given. At this com- 
 mand he resumes his post, faces to the front, first spong- 
 ing out the piece if it has been commenced. 
 
 19. Duties of Nos. 2 and 5. Until the command 
 LOAD, Nos. 2 and 5 stand square to the front, the former 
 in line with the axle-tree, the latter on the left of the am- 
 munition mule, or chests. 
 
 At this command, No. 2 faces about and goes to the 
 ammunition chest ; and No. 5, having received a round 
 of ammunition from No. 4, carries it to the piece ; placing 
 himself opposite to No. 1, and in line with the wheel, 
 inserts the charge as soon as No. 1 has sponged, then 
 steps back to the post of No. 2, opposite to the axle-tree, 
 and there remains facing the piece until it is fired, when 
 he returns to the ammunition chest, No. 2 ; having re- 
 ceived a round of ammunition, carries it to within five 
 
164: MANUAL FOE LIGHT ARTILLERY. 
 
 yards of the wheel, where he remains until the piece is 
 fired ; he then moves forward and executes the remainder 
 of the service as just described for No. 5. 
 
 Nos. 2 and 5, in moving to and from the piece, go at 
 a run and pass each other by the right. 
 
 In inserting the charge they should be careful to keep 
 the seam down, and to place the fuze in the axis of the 
 bore. 
 
 At the command CEASE FIRING, they resume their 
 posts, facing to the front. 
 
 20. Duties of No. 3. No. 3 holds the handle of the 
 lanyard in the right hand, the cord passing between the 
 fingers, the hook between the forefinger and thumb. At 
 the command LOAD, he takes a friction tube in the left 
 hand, and passes the hook of the lanyard through the eye 
 of the tube from right to left, continuing to hold the hook 
 between the thumb and forefinger. At the word EEADY, 
 he faces the piece, and steps up, keeping outside of the 
 wheel ; inserts the tube, steps back with the right foot, 
 breaks to his rear a full pace with the left foot, and holds 
 the lanyard slightly stretched, the handle at the height of 
 the knee, back of the hand up, the left hand against the 
 thigh. At the command FIRE, he gives a smart pull 
 upon the lanyard, being careful to keep the hand low, 
 and then resumes his post. 
 
 At the command CEASE FIRING, he winds the lanyard 
 upon its handle, and if dry, puts it in the tube pouch. 
 
 21. Duties of No. 4. No. 4 attends at the ammu- 
 nition chest, serves out ammunition, and prepares and 
 inserts fuzes. 
 
 CHANGING POSTS. 
 
 22. In order to instruct the men in all the duties at 
 
MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY. 165 
 
 the piece, the instructor causes them to change posts by 
 the following commands : 
 
 1. Change Posts. 2. MARCH. 
 
 At the first command, the cannoneers on the right of 
 the piece face about, take off their equipments, and place 
 them on the piece or ammunition chests. At the second 
 command, all step off, each taking the post and equip- 
 ments of the one in his front ; No. 2 passing around the 
 muzzle to gain the post of No. 1, and No. 4 around the 
 ammunition chest to take that of No. 5. 
 
 23. During the intervals of rest, the instructor will 
 explain to the men the nomenclatures of the piece and 
 carriage, and the names and uses of the implements and 
 equipments. 
 
 SERVICE OF THE PIECE WITH DETACHMENTS OF DIFFERENT 
 STRENGTHS. 
 
 24. Two men. The gunner commands, tends vent, 
 points, pricks, primes, and fires. No. 1 sponges, serves 
 ammunition, and loads. 
 
 Three men. The gunner commands, tends vent, points, 
 pricks, primes, and fires. No. 1 sponges. No. 2 serves 
 ammunition, and loads. 
 
 Four men. The gunner commands, tends vent, points, 
 and pricks. No. 1 sponges. No. 2 serves ammunition, 
 and loads. No. 3 primes and fires. 
 
 Five men. No. 4 attends at the chests, and serves 
 ammunition to No. 2, occasionally alternating with him. 
 The other numbers serve as with four men. 
 
 Six men. No 5 alternates habitually with No. 2. 
 No. 4 remains at the chests. The other numbers serve 
 as with four men. 
 
166 MANUAL FOE LIGHT ARTILLERY. 
 
 THE LOCKING ROPE. 
 
 25. The locking rope is habitually coiled and sus- 
 pended from the front arc of the saddle of the shaft mule. 
 When it becomes necessary to use it in order to prevent 
 the too great recoil of the piece, No. 2, on receiving orders 
 to that effect, brings it up from the mule, and, with the 
 assistance of No. 1, locks the wheels. No. 2 attaches one^ 
 end of it by a timber hitch to the felly of the left wheel, 
 near the ground, and No. 1 attaches the other end in the 
 same manner to the right wheel, the rope passing over 
 the stock. The length of the rope should be regulated by 
 the nature of the ground. 
 
 When in firing it becomes necessary to run the piece 
 forward, the locking rope is detached ; No. 2 carries it ; 
 and it is reattached as soon as the piece is in battery. 
 When not in use it is placed on the ground, outside of 
 and near No. 2. 
 
 When the firing is to be discontinued, No. 2 returns 
 it to its place on the saddle. The locking rope should not 
 be used when it can be avoided ; since on rough ground 
 it is liable to break the wheels, and on soft ground to 
 upset the carriage. 
 
 ATTACHING AND DETACHING THE SHAFTS. 
 
 26. To attach the shafts, the instructor commands : 
 
 ATTACH SHAFTS. 
 
 The gunner raises the trail ; No. 3 springs in between 
 the shafts, seizes them about twelve inches from the cross- 
 bar, and places the supporting bar upon the trail ;' the 
 gunner then puts in the key and lowers the trail to the 
 ground. No. 1, with the assistance of No. 3, puts up 
 
 
MANUAL FOR LIGHT AETILLEEY. 167 
 
 the sponge ; and the cannoneers about the piece assume 
 their posts as in the order of march, shaft mule hitched in. 
 
 27. To detach the shafts, the instructor commands : 
 
 DETACH SHAFTS. 
 
 The gunner raises the trail, and unkeys the shafts ; 
 No. 3 springs in between them, seizes them about twelve 
 inches from the cross-bar, (the gunner at the same time 
 lowering the trail to the ground,) detaches, and places 
 them as prescribed in No. 12. 
 
 No. 1, with the assistance of No. 3, takes out the 
 sponge ; and the cannoneers about the piece take their 
 posts as in battery. 
 
 MOVING THE PIECE BY MEANS OF THE CANNONEERS. 
 
 28. The shafts detached. The instructor commands : 
 1. By hand to the front (or rear.) 2. MARCH. 
 
 At the first command Nos. 1 and 2, facing to the front, 
 (or rear,) apply themselves to the wheels with the hand 
 nearest to the piece, the former carrying the sponge, and 
 the latter the locking rope in the hand farthest from the 
 piece ; the gunner raises the trail. 
 
 At the second command, all step off. At the com- 
 mand, HALT, they resume their posts. 
 
 29. When bricoles are to be used, the shafts attached. 
 The instructor commands : 
 
 1. By bricoles to the front (or rear.) 2. MARCH. 
 
 At the first command, Nos. 1 and 2 attach the hooks 
 of their bricoles to the washerhooks, and hold the rope 
 with the hand nearest to the piece ; the gunner and No. 
 3 apply themselves to the shafts ; all facing in the direc- 
 tion they are to move. 
 
168 MANUAL FOB LIGHT ARTTLLEKY. 
 
 At the second command, all step off. 
 
 At the command, HALT, they resume their posts ; Nos. 
 1 and 2 unhooking their bricoles with the hand nearest to 
 the piece. 
 
 30. Without bricoles, the shafts attached. The in- 
 structor commands : 
 
 1. Forward. 2. MARCH. 
 
 At the first command, the gunner and No. 3 apply 
 themselves to the shafts ; Nos. 1 and 2 at the wheels, as 
 in No. 28. 
 
 At the second command, all step off. At the com- 
 mand, HALT, they resume their posts. 
 
 When the movement requires it, Nos. 4 and 5 carry 
 the ammunition chests to their new position. 
 
 No. 3 carries the shafts when they are detached. 
 
 SERVICE OF SEVERAL PIECES. 
 
 31. Forming, and marching the detachments to and 
 from the pieces, are executed as in field artillery. 
 
 POSTING AND CHANGING THE POSITION OF DETACHMENTS. 
 
 32. To form the order of march, the detachments 
 being in line in front. The instructor commands : 
 
 1. Detachments, to your posts. 2. MARCH. 
 
 At the first command, the chiefs of pieces face the de- 
 tachments to the right. At the second, the detachments, 
 Nos. 1 and 2 opening out, file to their posts, each member 
 halting at his place. The chiefs of pieces face them to the 
 front by the command, ABOUT FACE. 
 
MANUAL FOK LIGHT AKTILLEKY. 169 
 
 To form the order of march, the detachments being in 
 line, in rear, the instructor gives the same commands. 
 
 At the first command, the chiefs of pieces face the de- 
 tachments to the left; at the second, the detachments 
 march to their posts ; each number halting as before. 
 
 33. From the order of march, to the front (or rear.) 
 The instructor commands : 
 
 1. Detachments front (or rear.) 2. MARCH. 
 
 To the front. At the second command, repeated by 
 the chiefs of pieces, the detachments, No. 3 and the gunner 
 closing to the centre when clear of the mule, march to the 
 front, file to the left, and are halted, and faced to the front 
 by the chiefs of pieces. 
 
 To the rear. At the first command, the chiefs of 
 pieces face the detachments about, Nos. 4 and 5 standing 
 fast. At the second command, the detachments, Nos. 1 
 and 2 closing to the centre as they advance, march to the 
 rear, file to the left, are halted and faced to the front by 
 the chiefs of pieces. In both cases Nos. 4 and 5 take 
 their places on the left, when the detachment is in the 
 position ordered. 
 
 HITCHING AND UNHITCHING. , 
 
 34. To the front. The instructor commands : 
 Hitch to the front. 
 
 At this command, the shafts are attached, (No. 26,) 
 and the gunner and No. 3 bring the piece about, each by 
 means of the shaft on his own side. 
 
 The mule, passing on the right of the piece, is led by 
 its driver to the front and hitched in, the driver backing 
 the mule and buckling the breast straps to the staples ; 
 8 
 
170 MANUAL FOB LIGHT ARTILLERY. 
 
 the gunner and No. 3 buckling the thill straps around the 
 shafts through the staples, and the breech straps to the 
 staples. 
 
 35. To the right (or left.) The instructor commands : 
 
 Hitch to the right (or left.) 
 
 At this command the shafts are attached, and turned 
 in the proper direction, and the mule, inclining to the right 
 or left, is led to its place, and hitched in as before. 
 
 36. To the rear. The instructor commands : 
 
 Hitch to the rear. 
 
 At this command, the shafts are attached, the mule 
 brought up, faced about, and hitched in as before. 
 
 37. In hitching in to the front, the carriage and am- 
 munition mules, the former first passing the latter, are led 
 up to their proper positions. 
 
 In hitching in to the right, (or left,) the mules are, in 
 like manner, led up and wheeled to the right or left, at 
 the proper intervals. 
 
 In hitching in to the rear, the carriage and ammuni- 
 tion mules, following the shaft mule in the order named, 
 are led past the piece to their position in the rear. 
 
 For the position of the mules, see No. 3. 
 
 UNHITCHING AND COM.TNG INTO ACTION. 
 
 38. To the front. The instructor commands : 
 
 Action Front. 
 
 At this command, the mule is unhitched, the driver 
 unbuckling the breast straps, and the gunner and No. 3 
 the breech and thill straps. The driver then leads the 
 mule to its place in rear, and the gunner and No. 3, sup- 
 
MANUAL FOR LIGHT ARTILLERY. 171 
 
 porting the shafts till the mule is taken out, bring the 
 piece about. This done, the shafts are detached and 
 placed as above. 
 
 The carriage and ammunition mules are led at once 
 to their positions, (see No. 3.) 
 
 39. To the right, left, or rear. The instructor com- 
 mands : 
 
 Action right, (left, or rear.) 
 
 At this command, the mule is unhitched ; the piece 
 placed in the required direction ; the shafts detached, and 
 each mule led to its proper position. 
 
 In action rear, the carriage and ammunition mules 
 pass by the right of the piece to their places in rear. The 
 mules face towards the piece as in action front. 
 
 PACKING AND UNPACKING. 
 
 40. The mule unhitched, and shafts detached. The 
 instructor commands : 
 
 1. Prepare to pack the Piece. 2. PACK THE PIECE. 
 
 At the first command, the driver leads the shaft mule 
 three yards in rear of the piece, the crupper towards the 
 trail ; No. 1, after removing the right cap square, takes 
 the sponge and inserts the rammer head to the bottom of 
 the bore ; and No. 2, after removing the left cap square, 
 takes the handspike, and passing one end to No. 3, places 
 it under the knob of the cascable, the loop around the 
 neck. All face towards the mule and prepare to raise 
 the piece. 
 
 At the second command, they raise the piece, No. 1 
 inclining slightly to his left to clear the wheel, and place 
 it upon the saddle, the trunnions in their beds, the vent 
 up, and the cascable towards the head of the mule. No. 1, 
 
172 MANUAL FOB LIGHT AETILLEKY. 
 
 then withdrawing the sponge, places it, and the handspike 
 which he receives from No. 2, upon the carriage, and goes 
 to the shafts. No. 3, with the assistance of No. 2, secures 
 the piece firmly to the saddle by means of the lashing 
 rope. 
 
 For this purpose he passes one end of the rope (the 
 other being fastened to the near hook of the lashing girth) 
 over the piece to No. 2, who passes it back beneath the 
 transoms, receives it again over the piece, and then fastens 
 it, drawing the rope tightly to the off hook of the lashing 
 girth. This done, No. 1 turns the shafts round and car- 
 ries them near the mule, and Nos. 2 and 3 seizing them 
 near the cross-bar, with the assistance of No. 1 acting at 
 the ends, raise and place them upon the mule, resting the 
 cross-bar upon the cascable, and the shafts upon the arcs ; 
 Nos. 2 and 3, the latter first putting the key in its place, 
 then secure t-he shafts firmly by means of the lashing 
 straps. 
 
 PACKING THE CARRIAGE UPON THE MULE. 
 
 41. The instructor commands : 
 1. Prepare to pack the Carriage. 2. PACK THE CARRIAGE. 
 
 At the first command, the driver leads the carriage 
 mule in front of the carriage, and three yards from it, the 
 crupper towards the head of the carriage ; the gunner, 
 first replacing the cap squares, raises the head of the car- 
 riage, and Nos. 4 and 5, at the right and left wheels re- 
 spectively, remove the linchpins and washers, take off the 
 wheels, and lay them on the ground behind them, the 
 larger end of the nave uppermost. This done, Nos. 4 and 
 5 replace the linchpins and washers, and seize the arms of 
 the axle-tree ; and the gunner, quitting the head of the 
 
MANUAL 1<"01 LIGI1T AKTILLEKY. 173 
 
 carriage, seizes the trail ; all face towards the mule, and 
 prepare to raise the carriage. 
 
 At the second command, they raise the carriage and 
 place it upon the saddle, between the transoms ; the axle- 
 tree just in front of the forward arc, the understraps upon 
 the arc, and the nuts of the trunnion plate bolts just in 
 rear of it. The carriage having been placed, No. 4, with 
 the assistance of No. 5, secures it with the lashing cord, 
 taking two turns with the cord round the stock and tran- 
 soms, and then tying it. This done, they suspend the 
 wheels by the fellies, from the arms of the axle-trees ; the 
 large end of the nave between the arcs, and resting against 
 the leather of the outside bar, and secure them firmly by 
 means of the lashing straps. 
 
 The whole is then strongly bound by the lashing rope. 
 For this purpose, No. 5, having fastened one end to the 
 near hook of the lashing girth, passes the rope up from 
 the inside between the nearest convenient felly and spoke, 
 and continues it on, pressing it in front of and against the 
 outside part of the nave, embracing one or more spokes, 
 to the top felly, under which, and over the stock, he passes 
 it to No. 4, who, after passing it round a spoke of the off 
 wheel, returns it under the transoms of the saddle to No. 
 5, by whom it is passed round a spoke and again handed 
 over the stock to No. 4. The latter then carries it down 
 under the top felly, around the spokes, and against the 
 nave, as with the near wheel, to the off hook of the lash- 
 ing girth, and then fastens it. 
 
 For greater security, the gunner may tie the fellies of 
 the two wheels together, behind the elevating screw, with 
 the locking rope. 
 
174: MANUAL FOK LIGHT AETILLERY. 
 
 PACKING THE AMMUNITION CHESTS UPON THE MULE. 
 
 42. The instructor commands : 
 1. Prepare to pack the Chests. 2. PACK THE CHESTS. 
 
 At the first command, the driver leads the mule from 
 the rear to the distance of one yard from the chests, its 
 head still facing them ; Nos. 2 and 4 hasten to the chest 
 on the right, and Nos. 1 and 5 to that on the left, and 
 seize them by the handles ; Nos. I and 2 by those in 
 front, and Nos. 4 and 5 by those in rear. 
 
 At the second command, they raise the chests, carry 
 them to the saddle, and attach the chains to the hooks, the 
 chests inclining slightly towards the rear of the mule ; 
 Nos. 4 and. 5 then secure them with the lashing straps 
 and lashing rope. 
 
 This duty might be done with three men, by first hook- 
 ing on one chest, and letting one man support it until the 
 other is hooked on. 
 
 PACKING THE MULES AT ONE COMMAND. 
 
 43. The instructor commands : 
 Pack the mules. 
 
 At this command, the driver leads the mules to their 
 proper positions ; Nos. 1, 2, and 3 proceed to pack the 
 piece, arid Nos. 4, 5, and the gunner the carriage, as soon 
 as the piece is removed. This done, Nos. 1, 2, 4, and 5 
 pack the ammunition chests. 
 
 Each cannoneer performs his duty as directed in Nos. 
 40, 41, 42. 
 
MANUAL FO14 LIGHT ARTILLERY. 175 
 
 UNPACKING THE CARRIAGE. 
 
 44. The instructor commands : 
 
 1. Prepare to unpack the Carriage. 2. UNPACK THE CAR- 
 RIAGE. 
 
 At the first command, Nos. 4 and 5 unbuckle the lash- 
 ing straps, detach the lashing rope, take off the wheels, 
 and lay them upon the ground, the large end of the nave 
 uppermost. If the locking rope has been used, the gun- 
 ner unties and detaches it. Nos. 4 and 5 then untie and 
 remove the lashing cord, and facing to the rear, seize 
 the arms of the axle-tree ; the gunner facing to the front 
 seizes the trail. All prepare to raise the carriage. 
 
 At the second command, they raise the carriage, and 
 carry it three yards in rear of the mule ; the gunner then, 
 placing the trail upon the ground, seizes the head of the 
 carriage and holds it up ; Nos. 4 and 5, removing the 
 linchpins and washers, retain them in their hands, put 
 on the wheels, and then replace the linchpins and washers. 
 The gunner puts up the locking rope, and Nos, 4 and 5 
 the lashing rope. 
 
 UNPACKING THE PIECE. 
 
 45. The instructor commands : 
 
 1. Prepare to unpack the Piece. 2. UNPACK THE PIECE. 
 
 At the first command, the driver leads the mule in 
 rear of and three yards from the carriage, the crupper 
 towards the trail ; Nos. 2 and 3 unbuckle the lashing 
 straps, and, with the assistance of No. 1 acting at the 
 ends, disengage the shafts from the saddle ; No. 1 then 
 takes hold of them near the cross-bar, turns them round, 
 
176 MANUAL FOli LIGHT ABTILLHUY. 
 
 and lays them on the ground, in the position described in 
 No. 12. This done, Nos. 2 and 3 detach the lashing rope ; 
 and No. 1, having taken the sponge and handspike, hands 
 the latter to No. 2, and inserts the former into the bore of 
 the piece. No. 2 then applies his handspike as in No. 
 40 ; when all, facing towards the carriage, prepare to raise 
 the piece. 
 
 At the second command, they raise the piece, No. 1 
 inclining slightly to his right to clear the wheel, and place 
 it upon its carriage. No. 1 puts up the sponge, No. 2 
 the handspike, and No. 3 secures the cap squares. 
 
 UNPACKING THE AMMUNITION CHESTS. 
 
 46. The instructor commands : 
 
 1. Prepare to unpack the Chests. 2. UNPACK THE CHESTS. 
 
 At the first command, Nos. 2 and 4 seize the handles 
 of the right chest, and Nos. 1 and 5 those of the left ; 
 Nos. 4 and 5 having first unbuckled the lashing straps, 
 and detached the lashing rope. 
 
 At the second command, they raise the chests, unhook 
 them, and lay them on the ground one yard from the 
 mule. 
 
 UNPACKING THE MULES AT ONE COMMAND. 
 
 47. The instructor commands : 
 
 Unpack the mules. 
 
 At this command, the drivers place the shaft and car- 
 riage mules eight yards apart, the crupper towards the 
 place the piece is to occupy ; the gunner, and Nos. 4 and 
 5 proceed to unpack the carriage, and Nos. 1, 2, and 3 
 
MANUAL FOK LIGHT AKTILLEKY. 177 
 
 the piece. The sponge and handspike are not taken from 
 the carriage until it is on the ground, nor is the piece 
 taken from the saddle until the carriage is mounted on its 
 wheels. Each cannoneer performs his duty as directed 
 in Nos. 44 and 45. 
 
 If the ammunition chests are to be unpacked, it is 
 done as soon as the piece is mounted, as prescribed in 
 No. 46. 
 
CHAPTER XII. 
 
 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 SERVICE OF THE PIECE. 
 
 1. The manner of serving heavy artillery varies with 
 the kind of piece, and the carriage upon which it is 
 mounted. 
 
 2. There are four kinds of heavy pieces in the land 
 service, viz. : the GUN, the HOWITZER, the MORTAR, and 
 the COLUMBIAD. 
 
 They are distinguished according to their use, as siege, 
 garrison, and sea-coast artillery. 
 
 For their service six distinct kinds of carriages are 
 necessary, viz. : the siege, the barbette, the casemate, the 
 flank-casemate, the columbiad, and the carriage upon 
 which the MORTAR is mounted, which is technically called 
 its bed. 
 
 Siege artillery is used in the attack of places ; and as 
 it follows armies in their operations, is mounted upon car- 
 riages which serve for its transportation. 
 
 Garrison artillery is employed in the defence of forts, 
 more especially those of the interior ; and sea-coast artil- 
 lery, consisting of the heaviest calibres, is used for the 
 defence of the sea-coast. Their carriages do not subserve 
 the purpose of transportation ; the barbette carriage may, 
 
MANUAL FOE HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 179 
 
 however, be used for moving its piece for short distances, 
 as from one front of a work to another. 
 
 The following are the kinds and calibres of HEAVY 
 ARTILLERY used in the land service of the United States : 
 
 Kind of Ordnance. 
 
 Calibre. 
 
 Material. 
 
 ' 
 
 
 12-pdr. 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 Siege and Garrison. - 
 
 18-pdr. 
 
 
 
 GUNS. 
 
 
 24-pdr. 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 Sea-coast. 
 
 32-pdr. 
 42-pdr. 
 
 
 
 HOWITZERS. ! Siege and Garrison. 
 
 8-inch. 
 24-pdr. 
 
 
 
 COLUMBIADS. 
 
 Sea-coast. 
 
 8-inch. 
 10-inch. 
 
 
 Iron. 
 
 
 
 8-inch. 
 
 
 
 
 
 10-inch. 
 
 
 
 MORTARS. 
 
 Siege. 
 Sea-coast. 
 
 8-inch. 
 10-inch. 
 10-inch. 
 13-inch. 
 
 
 
 Stone. 
 j Coehorn. 
 
 16-inch. 
 24-pdr. 
 
 ! Bronze. 
 
 3. The detachment for serving a piece is formed in 
 two ranks, and numbered from right to left. The odd 
 numbers form the rear rank, and serve on the right of 
 the piece ; the even numbers and the gunner form the 
 front rank, and serve on its left. The right file is num- 
 bered 1 and 2 ; the next file 3 and 4 ; the gunner is un- 
 covered, and generally on the left of No. 4 ; and on his 
 left are as many files as are deemed necessary, numbered 
 5 and 6, 7 and 8, etc. 
 
 4 A piece is in battery when it is in the proper po- 
 sition to be fired. 
 
 The right of a piece, when in battery, is the right of 
 the cannoneer when facing to the object to be fired at ; 
 
 
180 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 the front is tho direction towards which the muzzle 
 points. 
 
 The term "battery is applied to one or more pieces, or 
 to the places where the pieces are fired. 
 
 A platform is the support upon which a piece is ma- 
 noeuvred when in battery. 
 
 5. The detachment is marched to the battery by a 
 flank. It is halted, and faced to the front, when its centre 
 is opposite to the middle of the platform, and (if there be 
 room) four yards from it. 
 
 C. To cause the cannoneers to take their posts, the 
 instructor commands : 
 
 1. Detachment, to your posts. 2. MARCH. 
 
 At the first command, the detachment is faced to the 
 right by the chief of piece. 
 
 At the second command, it files to the left, and the 
 two flanks separate ; the rear rank marching to the right 
 of the piece, and the front rank to the left, in lines parallel 
 to its axis. As each man arrives at his post, he halts 
 and faces to the piece ; Nos. 1 and 2 one yard from the 
 epaulment, parapet, or scarp, their breasts eighteen inches 
 outside of the wheels of the carriage or cheeks of the 
 mortar bed, as the case may be ; and the other numbers 
 and the gunner, dressing on Nos. 1 and 2 respectively at 
 intervals of one yard, except that between Nos. 3 and 5 
 there is an interval of two yards. With the mortar, 
 Nos. 1 and 2 are opposite to the front manoeuvring bolts, 
 and Nos. 3 and 4 opposite to those in the rear. 
 
 Under the fire of the enemy, the men will be directed 
 to cover themselves by the parapet as much as may be 
 consistent with the execution of their duties. 
 
 7. The chief of piece (a non-commissioned officer) 
 assists the instructor in effecting a correct execution of 
 
MANUAL FOB HEAVY AKTILLEIiT. 181 
 
 the movements. While at the battery, he will generally 
 be one yard outside of the cannoneers of the left, facing 
 the piece, and two yards in rear of the platform or rear- 
 most part of the carriage. He communicates and attends 
 to the execution of all orders he may receive in relation 
 to the service of his piece ; as, for instance, the kind of 
 ammunition to be used, the weight of charge, the kind 
 and length of fuze, etc. 
 
 8. The movements of the cannoneers at the battery 
 are in double-quick time. 
 
 9. Posts are changed at the discretion of the in- 
 structor. 
 
 10. To allow the detachment to rest, the instructor^ 
 commands : 
 
 In place. BEST ; or, REST. 
 
 The cannoneers lay down their handspikes. 
 
 In the first case, the men remain at their posts ; in 
 the second case, they may leave their posts, but will re- 
 main near the piece. 
 
 To resume the exercise, the instructor commands : 
 
 Attention DETACHMENT. 
 
 At which command, all resume their posts and hand- 
 spikes. 
 
 11. Until the cannoneer becomes well versed in his 
 duties at the piece, the instructor will himself, by way of 
 example, occasionally execute the movements which he 
 orders. In the intervals of rest he will minutely instruct 
 the men in the names and uses of the implements, and in 
 the nomenclatures of the piece, its carriage or bed, and 
 of the parts of the fortification near the battery. In the 
 course of the instruction, he will require every man to 
 point out and designate by name all the parts enumerated 
 in these nomenclatures, and to answer questions relative 
 
182 MANUAL FOB HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 to the service of the piece ; such as the weight of charge, 
 the manner of making cartridges and wads, of heating 
 shot and throwing hot shot, of laying platforms, pointing, 
 etc. And although he is to consider precision of move- 
 ment as highly essential, yet he is to inculcate that some- 
 thing more is necessary than a merely mechanical per- 
 formance of duty. He will, therefore, endeavor to im- 
 press upon the cannoneer not only the habit of a soldier- 
 like manner of working his gun, but an accurate under- 
 standing of all the elements necessary to the efficiency of 
 its fire. 
 
 12. To leave the battery, the instructor commands : 
 
 1. Detachment, rear. 2. MARCH. 
 
 At the first command, the detachment is faced from 
 the epaulment by the chief of piece. 
 
 At the second command, it marches to the rear the 
 cannoneers of the left closing upon those of the right 
 files to the right, and is halted and faced to the front by 
 the chief of piece, so as to bring its centre opposite to 
 the middle of the platform, and four yards from it. The 
 chief of piece places himself upon the right. 
 
 The detachment is marched from the battery by a 
 flank. 
 
 LESSON I. 
 
 Service of a Gun mounted on a siege carriage. 
 
 Seven men are necessary ; one gunner and six other 
 cannoneers. 
 
 13. The piece is in battery upon its platform. 
 

MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 183 
 
 SPONGE KAMMER, 
 
 PASS-BOX, 
 
 TUBE-POUCH, 
 
 GUNNER'S-POUCH, 
 
 The implements, etc., are arranged as follows : 
 
 r Three on each side of the carriage lean- 
 HANDSPIKES, . 1 ing against the epaulment, in line 
 I with the cannoneers. 
 One yard behind and parallel to the 
 line of cannoneers of the right, the 
 sponge uppermost, the sponge and 
 rammer-heads turned from the epaul- 
 ment, and supported upon a prop, 
 j Against the epaulment, outside of the 
 ( pile of balls. 
 
 Containing friction tubes, and the lan- 
 yard, which is habitually wound in 
 the form of St. Andrew's cross upon 
 its handle. Suspended from the 
 knob of the cascable. 
 Containing the gunner's level, breech 
 sight, fingerstall, priming wire, gim- 
 let, vent-punch, and chalk. Sus- 
 pended from the knob of the cascable. 
 
 CHOCKS, . . 
 
 VENT-COVER, 
 TOMPION, 
 
 BROOM, . 
 
 One on each side of the piece, near 
 
 the ends of the hurter. 
 Covering the vent. 
 In the muzzle. 
 
 j Leaning against the epaulment, out- 
 ( side of the pile of balls. 
 When several guns are served together, there will be 
 only one gunner's level and two vent-punches to each 
 battery, not exceeding six pieces. To the same battery 
 there will be one worm, one ladle, and one wrench. 
 
 The balls are regularly piled on the left of the piece, 
 near the epaulment, and close to the edge of the plat- 
 form. 
 
18i MANUAL FOB HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 The wads ar'e placed between the epaulment and the 
 balls, partly resting on them. 
 
 14. The cannoneers having been marched to their 
 posts, the instructor directs them to place their muskets 
 against the epaulment, and then explains to them the 
 names and uses of the implements, and the nomenclatures 
 of the gun, its carriage and the battery. 
 
 15. To cause the implements to be distributed, the in- 
 structor commands : 
 
 Take Implements. 
 
 The gunner steps to the knob of the cascable ; takes 
 off the vent-cover, handing it to No. 2 to place against the 
 epaulment, outside of the pass-box ; gives the tube-pouch 
 to No. 3 ; equips himself with his own pouch and the 
 fingerstall, wearing the latter on the second finger of the 
 left hand; levels the piece by the elevating screw ; ap- 
 plies his level to ascertain the highest points of the base- 
 ring and swell of the muzzle, which he marks with chalk, 
 and resumes his post. 
 
 No. 3 equips himself with the tube-pouch. 
 
 Nos. 1 and 2, after passing two handspikes each to 
 Nos. 3 and 4, take each one for himself. Nos. 5 and 6 
 receive theirs from Nos. 3 and 4 
 
 16. The handspike is held in both hands ; the hand 
 nearest to the epaulment grasping it near the small end 
 and at the height of the shoulder, back of the hand down, 
 the arm extended naturally ; the butt of the handspike 
 upon the platform on the side farthest from the epaul- 
 ment, and six inches in advance of the alignment. 
 
 17. When the cannoneer lays down his handspike, he 
 places it directly before him, about six inches in ad- 
 vance of and parallel to the alignment, the small end 
 towards the epaulment; and whenever he thus lays it 
 
MANUAL FOK HEAVY APwTILLEKY. 185 
 
 down for the discharge of any particular duty, he will re- 
 sume it on returning to his post after the completion of 
 that duty. 
 
 18. The instructor causes the service of the piece to 
 be executed by the following commands : 
 
 1. FROM BATTERY. 
 
 The gunner moves two paces to his right. 
 
 Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6, facing from the epaulment, 
 unbar ; Nos. 1 and 2 under the front of the wheels ; 
 Nos . 3 and 4 through the rear spokes of the wheels near 
 the felly, under and perpendicularly to the cheeks ; and 
 Nos. 5 and 6 under the manoeuvring bolts. 
 
 All being ready, the gunner gives the command 
 HEAVE, which will be repeated as often as may be neces- 
 sary. He sees Nos. 5 and 6 guide the trail in prolonga- 
 tion of the directrix of the embrasure, and as soon as the 
 face of the piece is about one yard from the epaulment, 
 commands HALT. .All unbar, and resume ^their posts, 
 Nos. 1 and 2 chock the wheels. 
 
 2. Load by Detail. LOAD. 
 
 19. Nos. 1, 2 and 4 lay down their handspikes. 
 
 No. 2 takes out the tompion, and places it near the 
 vent-cover. 
 
 No. 1 faces once and a half to his left ; steps over the 
 sponge and rammer ; faces to the piece ; takes the sponge 
 with both hands, the back down, the right hand three feet 
 from the sponge head, the left hand eighteen inches nearer 
 to it, returns to the piece, entering the staff in the em- 
 brasure ; places the left foot in line with the face of the 
 piece, half way between it and the wheels ; breaks to the 
 right with the right foot, the heels on a line parallel to 
 the direction of the piece, the left leg straightened, the 
 
186 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 right knee bent, the body erect upon the haunches ; and 
 rests the end of the sponge in the muzzle, the staff in the 
 prolongation of the bore, supported by the right hand, the 
 right arm extended, the left hand flat against the side of 
 the thigh. 
 
 No. 3 steps to the muzzle, and occupies a position on 
 the left of the piece corresponding to that of No. 1 on its 
 right. He seizes the staff with the left hand, back down, 
 near to and outside of the hand of No. 1. 
 
 No. 2, facing towards the epaulment, embars under 
 the breech, and maintains the piece in a convenient po- 
 sition for inserting the sponge, until he receives a signal 
 from the gunner to unbar. He then lays down his hand- 
 spike ; steps over the rammer, and seizes the staff with 
 both hands, as prescribed for the sponge; and stands 
 ready to exchange with No. 1. 
 
 No. 4 takes the pass-box and goes to the rear for a 
 cartridge ; returns with it, and p.!aces himself, facing the 
 piece, about eighteen inches to the rear and right of 
 No. 2. 
 
 The gunner places himself near the stock, the left foot 
 advanced, closes the vent with the second finger of the 
 left hand, bending well forward to cover himself by the 
 breech ; turns the elevating screw with the right hand, so 
 as to adjust the piece conveniently for loading : and 
 makes a signal for No. 3 to unbar. 
 
 20. In the mean time Nos. 1 and 2 insert the sponge 
 by the following motions : 
 
 First motion. They insert the sponge as far as the 
 hand of No. 1, bodies erect, shoulders square. 
 
 Second motion. They slide the hand along the staff, 
 and seize it at arm's length. 
 
 Third motion. They force the sponge down as pre- 
 scribed in the first motion. 
 
MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 187 
 
 Fourth motion. They repeat the second motion. 
 
 Fifth motion. They push the sponge to the bottom 
 of the bore. No. 1 replaces the left hand on the staff, 
 back up, six inches nearer to the muzzle than the right. 
 No. 2 places the right hand, back up, between the hands 
 of No. 1. 
 
 If in executing these motions, or the corresponding 
 ones with the rammer, it be found that the sponge or 
 rammer is at home at the third or fourth motion, then 
 what is prescribed for the fifth motion will be performed 
 at the third or fourth. The knee on the side towards 
 which the body is to be inclined is always bent, the other 
 straightened ; and the weight of the body added, as much 
 as possible, to the effort exerted by the arms. 
 
 3. SPONGE. 
 
 21. Nos. 1 and 2, pressing the sponge firmly against 
 the bottom of the bore, turn it three times from right to 
 left, and three times from left to right ; replace the hands 
 on the thighs ; and withdraw the sponge by motions con- 
 trary to those prescribed for inserting it. 
 
 Remark. To handle the sponge when it is new and fits tight, 
 it may become necessary for Nos. 1 and 2 to use both hands. In 
 this case it will be inserted and withdrawn "by short and quick 
 motions. 
 
 No. 2 quits the staff, and turning towards No 4, re- 
 ceives from him the cartridge, which he takes in both 
 hands, back down, and introduces into the bore bottom 
 foremost, seams to the sides ; he then grasps the rammer 
 in the way prescribed for the sponge. 
 
 No. 1, rising upon the right leg and turning towards 
 his left, passes the sponge above the rammer with the left 
 hand to No. 3, and receiving the rammer with the right, 
 presents it as prescribed for the sponge, except that he 
 
188 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 rests the rammer-head against the right side of the face 
 of the piece. 
 
 No. 3, as soon as the sponge is withdrawn, passing 
 the rammer under the sponge into the embrasure with 
 the right hand, receives the sponge from No. 1 with the 
 left, replaces it upon the prop, and resumes his post. 
 
 No. 4, setting down the pass-box, takes out the car- 
 tridge and presents it in both hands to No. 2, the choke 
 to the front; returns the pass-box to its place; and 
 picks up a ball, and afterwards a wad, should one be re- 
 quired. 
 
 Nos. 1 and 2 force down the cartridge by the motions 
 prescribed for forcing down the sponge. 
 
 4. RAM. 
 
 22. Nos. 1 and 2, drawing the rammer out to the full 
 extent of their arms, ram with a single stroke. No. 2 
 quits the staff, and turning towards No. 4, receives from 
 him the ball and wad, whilst No. 1 throws out the ram- 
 mer, and holds the head against the right side of the face 
 of the piece. No. 2, receiving successively the ball and 
 wad, introduces them into the bore, the ball first, and 
 seizes the staff with the left hand. No. 4 then resumes 
 his post. 
 
 Nos. 1 and 2 force down the ball and wad together 
 by the same motions, and ram in the same manner as 
 prescribed for the cartridge. No. 2 quits the rammer ; 
 sweeps, if necessary, the platform on his own side ; passes 
 the broom to No. 1 ; and resumes his post. No. 1 
 throws out the rammer, and places it upon the prop below 
 the sponge ; finishes the sweeping, and resumes his post. 
 
 The gunner pricks, leaving the priming wire in the 
 vent ; resumes his post ; and, if firing beyond point-blank 
 range, adjusts the breech-sight to the distance. 
 
MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 189 
 
 5. IN BATTERY. 
 
 23. Nos. 1 and 2 unchock the wheels, and with Nos. 
 3, 4, 5, and 6, all facing towards the epaulment, embar ; 
 Nos. 1 and 2 through the front spokes of the wheels near 
 the felly, under and perpendicularly to the cheeks ; Nos. 
 3 and 4 under the rear of the wheels ; and Nos. 5 and 6 
 under the manoeuvring bolts perpendicularly to the stock. 
 
 All being ready, the gunner commands HEAVE, and 
 the piece is run into battery ; Nos. 5 and 6 being careful 
 to guide the chase into the middle of the embrasure. As 
 soon as the wheels touch the hurter, he commands HALT. 
 All unbar, and Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 resume their posts. 
 
 6. POINT. 
 
 24. No. 3 lays down his handspike, passes the hook 
 of the lanyard through the eye of a tube from front to 
 rear, and holds the handle of the lanyard with the right 
 hand, the hook between the thumb and forefinger. 
 
 Nos. 5 and 6 embar under and perpendicularly to the 
 trail, near the manosuvring bolts. 
 
 The gunner, placing himself at the stock, as at the 
 command LOAD, withdraws the priming-wire, and, aided 
 by Nos. 5 and G, gives the direction, causing the trail to 
 be moved by commanding LEFT, or RIGHT, tapping at the 
 same time on the right side of the breech for No. 5 to 
 move the trail to the left, or on the left side for No. 6 to 
 move it to the right. 
 
 He then places the centre point of the breech-sight ac- 
 curately upon the chalk mark on the base-ring, and by 
 the elevating screw gives the proper elevation, rectifying 
 the direction, if necessary. 
 
 The moment the piece is correctly pointed, he rises 
 on the left leg, and gives the word READY, making a sig- 
 nal with both hands, at which Nos. 5 and unbar, and 
 
190 MANUAL FOE, HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 resume their posts ; takes the breech-sight with the left 
 hand, and goes to the windward to observe the effect of 
 the shot. 
 
 No. 3 inserts the tube in the vent, drops the handle, 
 allowing the lanyard to uncoil as he steps back to his 
 post, holding it slightly stretched with the right hand, the 
 cord passing between the fingers, back of the hand up ; 
 and breaks to the rear a full pace with the left foot, the 
 left hand against the thigh. ' 
 
 At the word KEADY, Nos. 1 and 2 take the chocks, 
 and breaking off with the feet furthest from the epaul- 
 ment, stand ready to chock the wheels. 
 
 25. In directing the piece to be fired, the instructor 
 will designate it by its number, as, for example : 
 
 7. Number one FIRE. 
 
 No. 3 gives a smart pull upon the lanyard. 
 
 Immediately after the discharge of the piece, Nos. 1 
 and 2 chock the wheels, and resume the erect position. 
 No. 3 resumes the erect position, and rewinds the lanyard 
 in St. Andrew's cross upon its handle, returning it if dry 
 to the tube-pouch. The gunner, having observed the effect 
 of the shot, returns to his post. 
 
 26. Whenever the piece is to be fired by a lock, port- 
 fire, or slow-match, it will be done by No. 3, as prescribed 
 for No. 4, in the instruction for field artillery. 
 
 27. To continue the exercise, the instructor resumes 
 the series of commands, beginning with FROM BATTERY. 
 
 TO CHANGE POSTS. 
 
 28. To change posts the instructor commands : 
 
 1. CHANGE POSTS. 2. MARCH. 3. CALL OFF. 
 At the first command, the cannoneers lay down their 
 
MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 191 
 
 handspikes ; place their equipments on the parts of the 
 carriage nearest to them ; and face to their left. 
 
 At the second command, they step off, each advancing 
 one post ; No. 2 taking that of No. 1. Nos. 2 and 5 pass 
 to the rear of the trail ; No. 2 on the outside of all the 
 cannoneers. On arriving at their posts, they face to the 
 piece, and equip themselves. 
 
 At the third command, they call off, according to tho 
 posts they are to occupy. 
 
 TO LOAD FOR ACTION. 
 
 29. The cannoneers having been sufficiently instructed 
 in the details of the movements, the instructor com- 
 mands : 
 
 Load for action LOAD. 
 
 The piece is run from battery, loaded, run into bat- 
 tery, pointed, and prepared for firing, by the following 
 commands from the gunner : FROM BATTERY LOAD IN 
 BATTERY POINT BEADY. 
 
 At the command or signal from the instructor to com- 
 mence firing, the gunner gives the command FIRE, and 
 continues tho action until the instructor directs the firing 
 to cease. 
 
 TO CEASE FIRING. 
 
 30. To cause the firing to cease, the instructor com- 
 mands : 
 
 CEASE FIRING. 
 
 Whether the cannoneers are loading by detail or for 
 action, the piece is sponged out, and all resume their 
 posts. If the cartridge has been inserted, the loading will 
 
192 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 be completed, unless the instructor should otherwise 
 direct. 
 
 TO SECURE PIECE, AND REPLACE IMPLEMENTS. - 
 
 31. To discontinue the exercise, the instructor having 
 ordered the firing to cease, and caused the piece to be run 
 into battery, gives the following commands : 
 
 1. SECURE PIECE. 
 
 No. 2 returns the tompion to the muzzle, the gunner 
 puts on the vent-cover, which he receives from No. 2, and 
 depresses the piece. 
 
 2. REPLACE IMPLEMENTS. 
 
 Nos. 1 and 2 replace the handspikes against the epaul- 
 ment, those of Nos. 3, 4, 5 and 6 being passed to them 
 by Nos. 3 and 4 for that purpose. The gunner hangs 
 the pouches upon the knob of the cascable. 
 
 TO LEAVE THE BATTERY. 
 
 32. The instructor causes the muskets to be taken ; 
 forms the detachment in rear of the piece ; and marches 
 it from the battery as prescribed in No. 12. 
 
 33. Remarks. The service of a 24-pdr. siege gun, as 
 it respects running from and to battery, and pointing, is 
 performed by five men, as prescribed for the siege 
 howitzer. Five men suffice for the service of the 18 and 
 12-pdrs. To perform, however, all the duties incident to 
 a battery of heavy artillery on a war establishment, in- 
 cluding transportation and the mechanical manoeuvres, 
 the details for its daily service, at three reliefs, should 
 allow at least twenty privates to each piece. 
 
MANUAL FOK HEAVY AKTILLEEY. 193 
 
 TO SERVE THE PIECE WITH REDUCED NUMBERS. 
 
 34. The smallest number of men with which heavy 
 pieces can be served with facility, has been given as five. 
 It may be necessary, however, from the men being dis- 
 abled, or from other circumstances, to serve a gun with a 
 less number. 
 
 With four men. They will be told off as gunner, 
 and Nos. 1, 2, and 3. In this case No. 2 will, in addition 
 to his own duties, perform those of No. 4. 
 
 With three men. They will be told off as gunner, and 
 Nos. 1 and 2. No. 1 performs the duties prescribed for 
 No. 3, as well as his own. No. 2 performs those of No. 
 4, as in the preceding case. 
 
 When No. 2 serves ammunition, he goes for the car- 
 tridge, and places the pass-box behind his post, before as- 
 sisting No. 1 to sponge. 
 
 TRANSPORTATION. 
 
 35. The transportation of a 24-pdr. gun requires ten 
 horses and five drivers ; an 18-pdr. eight horses and four 
 drivers ; a battery wagon six horses and three drivers ; 
 and spare carriages at the rate of one for every five 
 pieces require each six horses and three drivers. 
 
 CHARGES, ETC. 
 
 36. The ordinary service charge of powder for heavy 
 guns is one-fourth the weight of the shot. For firing 
 double shot it is one-sixth that weight. The breaching 
 charge is one-third the weight of the shot. 
 
 
MANUAL FOE HEAVY AETILLEEY. 
 
 Range of a 24-pdr., at an angle of 1 30', (point blank,) 
 
 charge 6 Ibs 950 yards. 
 
 Range of a 24-pdr., at an angle of 5, charge G Ibs 1900 " 
 
 Range of an 18-pdr., at an angle of 1 30', charge 4 Ibs. 800 " 
 
 Range of an 18-pdr., at an angle of 5, charge 4 Ibs... 1600 " 
 
 Proof range of powder 300 " 
 
 The range of a 12-pdr. is about the same as that of an 
 18-pdr. 
 
 Greatest elevation that a 24-pdr. carriage admits 12 
 
 Greatest elevation that an 18-pdr. carriage admits 12 
 
 Greatest elevation that a 12-pdr. carriage admits 13 
 
 Greatest depression that a 24-pdr. carriage admits 4 
 
 Greatest depression that an 18-pdr. carriage admits 4 
 
 Greatest depression that a 12-pdr. carriage admits 4 
 
 37. Wads are not generally necessary, except when 
 firing at angles of depression ; and then only one is used, 
 and that on the ball. When, however, the piece has been 
 fired so often that the ball has caused a lodgment in the 
 bore, it is well to use wads differing in length, according 
 to the position and extent of the lodgment, between the 
 shot and the cartridge. 
 
 Hay wads may be made by twisting hay into a rope 
 of about one inch in diameter, folding it together of any 
 desired length, and then winding the folds from one end 
 to the other, leaving the wad a little larger than the bore. 
 
 BREACHING BATTERIES. 
 
 38. Breaching latteries established against walls are, 
 First. To make a horizontal section the length of the 
 
 desired breach along the scarp, at one-third its height from 
 the bottom of the ditch, and to a depth equal to the thick- 
 ness of the wall. 
 
MANUAL FOR HEAVY AETILLEEY. 195 
 
 Secondly. To make vertical cuts through the wall, not 
 further than ten yards apart, and not exceeding one to 
 each piece ; beginning at the horizontal section, and as- 
 cending gradually to the top of the wall. 
 
 Thirdly. To fire at the most prominent points of the 
 masonry left standing ; beginning always at the bottom, 
 and gradually approaching to the top. 
 
 Fourthly. To fire into the broken mass with howitzers 
 until the breach is practicable. 
 
 Breaches of more than twenty yards in length have 
 been opened by way of experiment, and rendered prac- 
 ticable, in less than ten hours, by about two hundred and 
 thirty 24-pdr. balls and forty shells in one case, and by 
 three hundred 18-pdr. balls and forty shells in another. 
 
 RAPIDITY OF FIRING. 
 
 39. Iron guns sustain long-continued and rapid firing 
 better than brass guns. An iron gun should sustain 
 twelve hundred discharges, at the rate of twelve an hour ; 
 but whatever may be the rate of fire, it is deemed unsafe 
 after that number of discharges. As many as twenty an 
 hour have been made for sixteen consecutive hours. 
 
 PENETRATION OF SHOT. 
 
 40. The penetration of balls increases to a certain ex- 
 tent with their calibre. The mean result, from several 
 experiments, gives the penetration of a 24-pdr. ball, with 
 the charge of one- third its weight, at the distance of one 
 hundred yards, as follows : 
 
 Feet. Inches. 
 
 In earth of old parapets 8 G 
 
 In earth recently thrown up 15 
 
 In oak wood, sound and hard 4 6 
 
 In rubble stone and masonry 1 10 
 
 In brick ,.,, 3 
 
196 
 
 MANUAL FOE HEAVY ARTILLEEY. 
 
 LESSON II. 
 
 Service of an 8-inch Siege Howitzer, mounted on a 
 Siege Carriage. 
 
 Five men are necessary : one gunner and four other 
 cannoneers. 
 
 41. The piece is in battery upon its platform. 
 The implements, etc., are arranged as follows : 
 
 Three on the left of the carriage, and 
 
 O " 
 
 two on the right, leaning against the 
 epaulment, in line with the cannon- 
 eers. 
 
 HANDSPIKES, 
 
 SPONGE & RAM- 
 MER, . . 
 
 HAVERSACK, 
 
 TUBE-POUCH, . 
 
 GUNNER'S-POUCH, 
 
 On props, eighteen inches behind ana 
 parallel to the cannoneers of the 
 right, the sponge-head turned to- 
 wards the epaulment. 
 
 Containing fuzes, a pair of sleeves, and 
 a priming-wire, bent at right angles 
 at the point for withdrawing the 
 cartridge used in instruction. Sus- 
 pended from the knob of the cas- 
 cable. 
 
 Containing friction tubes, and the lan- 
 yard, wound in St. Andrew's cross 
 upon its handle. Suspended from 
 the knob of the cascable. 
 
 Containing the gunner's level, breech- 
 sight, finger-stall, priming-wire, gim- 
 let, vent-punch, and chalk. Sus* 
 pended from the knob of the cas- 
 cable. 
 
MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 1D7 
 
 LOADING-TONGS, ") 
 
 QUADRANT, 
 
 TJ In a basket or on a shelf, against the 
 
 PLUMMET. . 
 
 > epaulment, outside of and near the 
 
 SCRAPER, 
 
 -r TT handspikes 01 the left. 
 
 WIPER, . . 
 
 SPLINTS, . . . J 
 
 GRUMMET-WAD, . On the end of the hurter, near No. 2. 
 
 ( One on each side of the piece, near the 
 CHOCKS, . . . < 
 
 ( ends of the hurter. 
 
 VENT-COVER, . Covering the vent. 
 TOMPION, . . In the muzzle. 
 QUOIN, . . . Under the breech. 
 R C Leaning against the epaulment, outside 
 
 1 of the basket or shelf. 
 
 When several howitzers are served together, there 
 will be only one gunner's level and two vent-punches to 
 each battery, not exceeding six pieces. To the same bat- 
 tery there will be one wrench. 
 
 One shell and one bombazine cartridge bag for in- 
 struction the bag filled with sawdust, and having loops 
 of thread at the choke end are at the magazine, or other 
 safe place in rear of the piece. 
 
 42. The cannoneers having been marched to their 
 posts, the instructor directs them to place their muskets 
 against the epaulment, and then explains to them the 
 names and uses of the implements, and the nomenclatures 
 of the howitzer, its carriage, and the battery. 
 
 43. To cause the implements to be distributed, the 
 instructor commands : 
 
 TAKE IMPLEMENTS. 
 
 The gunner steps to the knob of the cascable ; takes 
 off the vent-cover, handing it to No. 2 to place against the 
 epaulment, outside of the basket ; gives the tube-pouch to 
 
198 MANUAL FOB HEAVY AKTILLEKY. 
 
 No. 3, and the haversack to No. 4 ; and equips himself 
 with his own pouch and the finger-stall, wearing the lat- 
 ter on the second finger of the left hand. 
 
 No. 2 puts on the sleeves. 
 
 No. 3 equips himself with the tube-pouch. 
 
 No. 4 equips himself with the haversack, which he 
 wears from the right shoulder to the left side ; takes out 
 the sleeves ; and assists No. 2 to put them on. 
 
 Nos. 1 and 2, after passing handspikes to Nos. 3 and 
 4 and the gunner, take each one for himself. The gunner, 
 receiving his from No. 4, lays it in the allignment, the 
 small end towards the epaulment, and two yards to his 
 right. The other handspikes are held, laid down, and re- 
 sumed, as prescribed in Nos. 15 and 16. 
 
 The gunner directs No. 3 to raise the breech to enable 
 hirn to level the piece ; applies his level to ascertain the 
 highest points of the base-ring and muzzle-band, which he 
 marks with chalk ; and resumes his post. 
 
 44. The instructor causes the service of the piece to 
 be executed by the following commands ; 
 
 1. FROM BATTERY. 
 
 The gunner moves two paces to his right. 
 
 Nos. 1,2, 3, and 4, facing from the epaulment, embar : 
 Nos. 1 and 2 through the rear spokes of the wheels, near 
 the felly, under and perpendicularly to the cheeks ; and 
 Nos. 3 and 4 under the manoeuvring bolts. 
 
 All being ready, the gunner gives the command 
 HEAVE, which will be repeated as often as may be neces- 
 sary. He sees that Nos. 3 and 4 guide the trail in pro- 
 longation of the directrix of the embrasure, and as soon 
 as the wheels are about one yard from the epaulment, 
 commands HALT. All unbar, and resume their posts. 
 Nos. 1 and 2 chock the wheels. 
 
MANUAL FOFw HEAVY AKT1LLEEY. 199 
 
 2. Load by detail LOAD. 
 
 45. Nos. 1, 2, and 4 lay down their handspikes. 
 
 No. 2 takes out the tompion, and places it near the 
 vent-cover ; sweeps, if necessary, his side of the platform ; 
 passes the broom to the right side of the piece ; and re- 
 sumes his post. 
 
 No. 1 faces to his right, and seizes the sponge-staff at 
 its middle with the right hand, back up ; places himself 
 at the muzzle ; forces the sponge to the bottom of the 
 chamber ; and grasps the staff with both hands : all nearly 
 as in field artillery. 
 
 No. 3, facing towards the epaulment, embars under 
 the breech or knob of the cascable, until he receives a sig- 
 nal from the gunner to unbar, when he resumes his post. 
 
 No. 4 goes to the rear for a cartridge and shell ; puts 
 the cartridge in his haversack ; takes the shell in both 
 hands ; returns and places it on the grummet-wad ; and 
 stands, facing the piece, about eighteen inches to the rear 
 and left of No. 2. 
 
 The gunner places himself near the stock, as in No. 
 18, and closes the vent with the second finger of the left 
 hand ; adjusts the piece with the quoin to about one de- 
 gree's elevation ; and makes a sign for No. 3 to unbar. 
 
 3. SPONGE. 
 
 46. No. 1, pressing the sponge firmly against the bot- 
 tom of the chamber, turns it three times from right to 
 left, and three times from left to right ; draws it out to 
 the front of the chamber ; wipes out the bore ; reinserts 
 the sponge along the upper side of the bore as far as the 
 chamber ; draws it entirely out, pressing it upon the 
 lower side of the bore ; turns the sponge over towards 
 the embrasure ; and presents the rammer-head against 
 
200 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 the right side of the face of the piece, holding the staff in 
 both hands. 
 
 No. 2, as soon as the sponging is completed, takes the 
 tongs and occupies a position at the muzzle corresponding 
 to that prescribed for No. 1 on the right ; turns to his 
 left on the right heel, advancing the left foot, and presents 
 the tongs in both hands, the left hand nearest him, the 
 tongs opened, their legs in the same vertical plane. 
 
 No. 4 takes out the cartridge and inserts it as far as 
 its middle in the tongs, choke foremost, the seam down- 
 wards ; removes the stopper from, and inserts the fuze 
 into, the fuze plug ; scrapes its end ; and takes the wiper. 
 
 No. 2, having received the cartridge in the tongs, 
 makes a face and a half to his right on the right heel, and 
 breaks off with the left foot ; places the right hand against 
 the head of the left cheek of the carriage, and with the 
 left hand introduces the cartridge into the chamber, keep- 
 ing the legs of the tongs in a vertical plane ; then slightly 
 withdrawing and closing the tongs, he presses them in the 
 direction of the axis of the piece against the end of the 
 cartridge, and shoves it home. Withdrawing the tongs, 
 he makes a face and a half to his left on the right heel, 
 and puts the hooks of the tongs into the ears of the shell, 
 which he lifts and holds about two feet from the ground, 
 w r hilst No. 4 wipes it. 
 
 No. 1, as soon as the tongs are withdrawn, inserts the 
 rammer, and holds it with the head against the cartridge, 
 the staff in the axis of the piece. 
 
 4. RAM. 
 
 47. No. 1 presses firmly upon the cartridge ; throws 
 out the rammer, and places it upon the props ; sweeps, 
 if necessary, his side of the platform ; passes the broom 
 to the left side of the piece ; and resumes his post. 
 
MANUAL FOlt HEAVY ARTILLERY. 201 
 
 No. 2 introduces the shell, and shoves it home in a 
 manner similar to that prescribed for the cartridge ; with- 
 draws the hooks, and looks to see that the fuze is in the 
 axis of the piece. 
 
 If the piece is to be fired horizontally, or at an angle 
 of depression, No. 4, having replaced the wiper, hands a 
 splint to No. 2, and resumes his post. 
 
 No. 2 presses the splint under the shell with the left 
 hand ; replaces the tongs and broom ; and resumes his 
 post. 
 
 The gunner pricks, leaving the priming-wire in the 
 vent, and resumes his post. 
 
 5. IN BATTERY. 
 
 48. Nos. 1 and 2 unchock the wheels, and with Nos. 
 3 and 4, all facing towards the epaulment, embar : Nos. 1 
 and 2 through the front spokes of the wheels, near the 
 felly, under and perpendicularly to the cheeks ; and Nos. 
 3 and 4 under the rear of the wheels. 
 
 The gunner, seizing his handspike, embars under the 
 manoeuvring bolts ; gives the command HEAVE ; and 
 guides the piece to the middle of the embrasure ; as soon 
 as the wheels touch the hurter, he commands HALT. All 
 unbar, and resume their posts. 
 
 G. POINT. 
 
 49. Nos. 1 and 4 embar under and perpendicularly to 
 the trail, near the manoeuvring bolts. 
 
 No. 2, facing towards the epaulment, embars under 
 the breech or knob of the cascable. 
 
 No. 3 lays down his handspike ; passes the hook of 
 the lanyard through the eye of a tube from front to rear ; 
 and holds the handle of the lanyard with the right hand, 
 the hook between the thumb and forefinger. 
 9* 
 
202 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 The gunner, placing himself at the stock, as at the 
 command LOAD, withdraws the priming-wire, and, aided 
 by Nos. 1 and 4, gives the direction ; causing the trail to 
 be moved by commanding LEFT, or EIGHT, tapping, at the 
 same time, on the right side of the breech for No. 1 to 
 move the trail to the left, or on the left side of No. 4 to 
 move it to the right. 
 
 He then places the centre point of the breech-sight ac 
 curately upon the chalk mark on the base-ring, and com-, 
 mands LOWER, or EAISE, tapping, at the same time, on 
 the upper side of the knob of the cascable with the left 
 hand, and drawing out the quoin with the right, in order 
 to elevate, or tapping upwards on the lower side, and 
 shoving in the quoin, in order to depress the piece ; rec- 
 tifying the direction, if necessary. 
 
 If the piece is to be fired point-blank, horizontally, or 
 at an angle of depression, he does not apply the breech- 
 sight. 
 
 If the piece is masked from the object fired at, he 
 places himself astride the stock, or in rear of the trail, and 
 gives the direction by the plummet. 
 
 To give the elevation when the piece is masked, or 
 when the desired range is greater than the breech-sight 
 ranges, he applies the quadrant to the upper surface of 
 the lock-piece, making the allowance due to its inclination 
 with the axis of the piece, which ought to be previously 
 determined. 
 
 The moment the piece is correctly pointed, he rises 
 on the left leg, and gives the word KEADY, making a sig- 
 nal with both hands, at which Nos. 1, 2, and 4 unbar, and 
 resume their posts; takes the breech-sight with the left 
 hand, and goes to the windward to observe the effect of 
 the shot. 
 
 No. 3 inserts the tube in the vent ; drops the handle, 
 
MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 203 
 
 allowing the lanyard to uncoil as he steps back to his 
 post, holding it slightly stretched with the right hand, the 
 cord passing between the fingers, back of the hand up ; 
 and breaks to the rear a full pace with the left foot, the 
 left hand against the thigh. 
 
 Nos. 1 and 2, on resuming their posts, break off with 
 the feet furthest from the epaulment, inclining well to 
 that side in order to avoid the blast. 
 
 7. Number one (or the like) FIRE. 
 
 50. Executed as in No. 25, except that the wheels are 
 not chocked. 
 
 What is prescribed in No. 26 will apply to this 
 piece. 
 
 51. To continue the exercise, the instructor resumes 
 the series of commands, beginning with FROM BATTERY. 
 
 TO UNLOAD. 
 
 52. The piece having been run from battery, the in- 
 structor directs No. 2 to take out the shell and cartridge ; 
 No. 4 carrying them to their place in rear of the piece. 
 No. 3 assists No. 2, by raising the breech until the shell 
 rolls to the muzzle. 
 
 TO SCRAPE THE PIECE. 
 
 53. In the course of firing, it may become necessary 
 to scrape the piece. To cause this to be done, the in- 
 structor directs the piece to be moved from battery, and 
 then commands : 
 
 SCRAPE THE PIECE. 
 
 Nos. 1 and 2 lay down their handspikes. 
 
204: MANUAL FOIl HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 No. 2 takes the scraper and wiper, giving the lattf 
 to No. 1 ; thoroughly scrapes the chamber and bore 
 draws out the scrapings with the spoon ; returns the 
 scraper to its place, and resumes his post. 
 
 No. 1, enveloping the sponge-head in the wiper, wipes 
 out the bore, and returns the wiper to N. 2, who replaces 
 it; puts the sponge upon the props, and resumes his 
 post. 
 
 To change posts. 
 
 To load for action. 
 
 To cease firing. 
 
 To secure piece, and replace implements. 
 
 To leave the battery. 
 
 Executed as in Nos. 28, 29, 30, 31 and 32 ; No. 4 
 assisting No. 2 to take off the sleeves. 
 
 TO SERVE THE PIECE WITH REDUCED NUMBERS. 
 
 Executed as in No. 34. 
 
 TRANSPORTATION. 
 
 54. The transportation of an 8-inch siege howitzer re- 
 quires eight horses and four drivers. 
 
 CHARGES, ETC. 
 
 55. 
 
 Greatest charge of powder 4 Ibs. 
 
 Greatest charge, shell filled with bullets 3 Ibs. 
 
 Charge of the shell filled with powder 2 Ibs. 9 oz. 
 
 Bursting charge of the shell 1 Ib. 
 
 Charge to blow out the fuze 4 oz. 
 
 Greatest elevation the carriage admits 15 
 
 Greatest depression the carriage admits 10 
 
MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 205 
 
 Range at an angle of 1, charge 4 Ibs 430 yards. 
 
 Range at an angle of 5, charge 4 Ibs 1150 " 
 
 Range at an angle of 15, charge 4 Ibs 2300 " 
 
 Proof range of powder 300 " 
 
 Weight of shell 45 Ibs. 
 
 Weight of the shell filled with bullets C5 Ibs. 
 
 The black fuze burns to the inch 2 Ibs. 
 
 The red fuze burns to the inch 3 Ibs. 
 
 The green fuze burns to the inch 4 Ibs. 
 
 The yellow fuze burns to the inch 5 Ibs. 
 
 At 2 elevation, black fuze, full charge ~] ( 500 to 600 yds. 
 
 At 3 25' " red fuze, " I The shell I 800 to 900yds. 
 
 At 4 25' " green fuze, " j bursts at j 900 to 1000 yds. 
 
 At 5 25' " yellow fuze, " J [lOOO to 1100 yds. 
 
 A proper charge for enfilading, at the distance of 600 
 yards, on a horizontal plane, relief of the epaulment seven 
 feet, elevation 2. 75, red fuze, is three pounds. 
 
 TO PREPARE AMMUNITION. 
 
 56. If the ammunition for howitzers is to be prepared 
 and issued by the artillery, two men, numbered 5 and 6, 
 are added to each detachment for that purpose. They 
 are sent to the magazine, where they are provided with 
 the following implements and stores : 
 
 1 Set of Powder Measures. 
 
 1 Funnel* 
 
 1 Fuze-mallet 
 
 1 Fuze-setter. 
 
 \ Fuze plug-reamer. 
 
 1 Rasp. 
 
 1 Basket. Containing fuze-plugs. 
 
 2 Grummet-wads, or ) On which to place the shells 
 2 Hollow-blocks . ) while putting in the charge 
 
 1 Wiper. 
 
 
f 
 
 206 MANUAL FOB HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 1 Budge-barrel. 
 
 1 Dark Lantern. 
 
 Tow. For stoppers. 
 
 Cartridge bags. Of bombazine. 
 
 Twine. 
 
 Poivder. 
 
 Musket bullets. 
 
 Incendiary composition. 
 
 They first fill and tie a number of cartridges, accord- 
 ing to the directions received from the battery, and then 
 prepare a corresponding number of shells. 
 
 To fill the cartridges. One holds the bag, while the 
 other (by means of the funnel) pours in the powder. The 
 cartridges thus filled are placed upright in a box until 
 tied, when they are transported to the budge-barrel. 
 
 Cartridges of reduced charges for ricochet firing may 
 be made thus : The charge having been poured into the 
 bag, a wad of hay about six inches in length is placed upon 
 it. This wad is made by laying wisps of hay evenly to- 
 gether, so as to form a cylinder nearly of the diameter of 
 the cartridge bag. The wad is tied about an inch from 
 each end, and the ends are cut squarely off, so as to pre- 
 sent an even surface to the powder. In handling these 
 cartridges, the powder end of the bag should always be 
 kept downwards. 
 
 To prepare the shells. No. 5 places one upon a grum- 
 met-wad ; cleanses it, if necessary, with a rasp ; drives in 
 a fuze-plug until it does not project more than the tenth 
 of an inch ; and reams it out with the reamer. No. 6, 
 transferring it to the other grummet- wad, charges it with 
 powder ; puts in a stopper of tow ; marks it with chalk ; 
 and places it conveniently for No. 4. 
 
 If the shell is to be loaded with bullets or incendiary 
 composition, it is charged before the fuze-plug is driven. 
 
MANUAL FOE HEAVY AETILLEKY. 
 
 207 
 
 It should contain about three hundred and twenty bullets 
 and one pound and a quarter of powder. 
 
 If filled only with powder, No. 6 marks the shell with 
 a cross ; if with incendiary composition, he makes a circle 
 around the fuze-plug ; and if with bullets, he makes two 
 circles on one side. The shells thus differently charged 
 are kept separate. 
 
 LESSON III. 
 Service of a 10-inc7i Siege Mortar. 
 
 Five men are necessary ; one gunner and four other 
 cannoneers. 
 
 57. The mortar is upon its platform. 
 
 The implements, etc., are arranged as follows : 
 
 ' Two on each side of the bed, against 
 the cheeks, leaning upon the four 
 manoeuvring bolts, the small ends 
 towards the epaulment, those of the 
 front handspikes even with the front 
 of the cheeks. 
 
 f Containing fuzes and a pair of sleeves. 
 Attached to the tompion, and lying 
 upon the mortar. 
 
 Containing the priming-wire, friction 
 tubes, and the lanyard, wound in 
 St. Andrew's cross upon its handle. 
 Attached to the tompion, and lying 
 upon the mortar. 
 
 I Containing the gunner's level, gimlet, 
 vent-punch, and chalk. Attached to 
 the tompion, and lying upon the 
 mortar. 
 
 HANDSPIKES, 
 
 HAVEUSACK, 
 
 TUBE-POUCH, 
 
 GUNNER'S-POUCH, - 
 
 
208 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 QUADRANT, . 
 PLUMMET, . . 
 POINTING-CORD, 
 SCRAPER, 
 
 In a basket between the cheeks of the 
 mortar bed. 
 
 WIPER, . . . 
 
 SHELL-HOOKS, . 
 
 TOMPION, . . In the muzzle. 
 
 Q j Under the mortar upon the bolster, 
 
 ( its handle to the left. 
 POINTING-STAKES, J 
 MAUL, . . . V With the basket. 
 BROOM, . . . ) 
 
 When several mortars are served together, there will 
 be only one gunner's level, and two vent-punches to each 
 battery, not exceeding six pieces. To the same battery 
 there will be one hammer-wrench. 
 
 One shell and one paper cartridge bag for instruction, 
 are at the magazine or other safe place in rear of the 
 piece. 
 
 58. The cannoneers having been marched to their 
 posts, the instructor directs them to place their muskets 
 against the epaulment, and then explains to them the 
 names and uses of the implements, and the nomenclatures 
 of the mortar, its bed, and the battery. 
 
 59. To cause the pointing-stakes to be established in 
 position, the instructor commands : 
 
 PLANT THE POINTING-STAKES. 
 
 The gunner, assisted by Nos. 1 and 2, plants the stakes. 
 
 No. 1, having driven the pointing-stakes, drives an- 
 other stake one yard behind his post for holding the 
 wiper, and replaces the maul near the basket. 
 
 The gunner lays the slack of the pointing-cord at the 
 
MANUAL FOB HEAVY AKTILLEKY. 200 
 
 foot of the epaulment, leaving the plummet at the stake 
 in rear of the piece. 
 
 All resume their posts. 
 
 60. To cause the implements to be distributed, the in- 
 structor commands : 
 
 TAKE IMPLEMENTS. 
 
 The gunner steps to the front of the piece ; gives to 
 No. 1 the sleeves and the wiper ; to No. 2 the basket and 
 maul ; to No. 3 the tube-pouch and broom ; and to No. 
 4 the haversack ; equips himself with the gunner's 
 pouch ; applies his level to ascertain the line of metal, 
 which he marks with chalk ; and resumes his post. 
 
 No. 1 places the wiper upon the stake behind him, 
 and, assisted by No. 3, puts on the sleeves. 
 
 No. 2 removes the tompion, which he places with the 
 basket and maul, one yard behind him, and lays the shell- 
 hooks on the ground between himself and the basket. 
 
 No. 3 lays the broom on the ground behind him, and 
 equips himself with the tube-pouch. 
 
 No. 4 equips himself with the haversack, which he 
 wears from the right shoulder to the left side. 
 
 All take their handspikes. 
 
 61. The handspikes are held as in No. 16. When 
 laid down, they are returned, except in one case, to their 
 places on the manoeuvring bolt. 
 
 62. The instructor causes the service of the piece to 
 be executed by the following commands : 
 
 1. IN BATTERY. 
 
 The gunner, making a half-face to his right, steps off, 
 left foot first, and places himself two paces in rear of the 
 platform, facing the piece. 
 
 Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4, facing towards the epaulment, em- 
 bar : Nos. 1 and 2 under the front manoeuvring bolts, 
 
210 MANUAL FOK HEAVY ARTILLKKY. 
 
 and Nos. 8 and 4 under those in the rear, engaging the 
 butts of their handspikes about three inches. 
 
 All being ready, the gunner gives the command, 
 HEAVE, which will be repeated as often as may be neces- 
 sary. As soon as the piece is on the middle of the plat- 
 form, he commands HALT. All unbar, and resume their 
 posts. 
 
 2. Load by detail LOAD. 
 
 63. Nos. 1, 3, and 4, lay down their handspikes. 
 
 The gunner taking the scraper, places himself in front 
 of the muzzle, and scrapes the bore and chamber ; draws 
 out the scrapings with the spoon ; returns the scraper to 
 the basket, and again places himself at the muzzle, one 
 yard in its front. 
 
 No. 1, turning to his right, takes the wiper with the 
 right hand ; faces to his left, and places the left foot near 
 the manoeuvring bolt, the right in front of the muzzle, 
 the left hand upon the face of the piece ; thoroughly wipes 
 out the chamber and bore, and resumes his post. 
 
 No. 3, as soon, as the piece is wiped, clears the vent 
 with the priming-wire ; sweeps the platform, if necessary, 
 and resumes his post and handspike. 
 
 Nos. 2 and 4, facing to their right No. 2 holding his 
 handspike at the middle under the left arm, butt end 
 foremost, and taking the shell-hooks in the right go to 
 the rear for a cartridge and shell. "While No. 4 is getting 
 the cartridge, No. 2 inserts the shell-hooks in the ears of 
 the shell, and passes the small end of the handspike 
 through the ring. In carrying the shell they hold the 
 handspike with their right hands, No. 4 at the small end 
 and in advance of No. 2. Passing by the left of the 
 piece, between the gunner and the muzzle, they rest the 
 shell upon the platform against the middle of the transom. 
 
MANUAL FOK HEAVY ARTILLKBY. 211 
 
 No. 1, placing the wiper upon the handspike, receives 
 the small end of the handspike from No. 4, who gives the 
 cartridge to the gunner. 
 
 The gunner advances the left foot, and places the left 
 hand upon the face of the piece ; introduces the cartridge 
 into the mouth of the chamber with the right hand, and 
 carefully pours in the powder ; returns the cartridge bag 
 to No. 4, and distributes the powder evenly over the 
 bottom of the chamber. In firing with paper fuzes, he 
 receives one from No. 4, and inserts it in the fuze-plug. 
 
 No. 4, returning the cartridge bag to the haversack, 
 takes the wiper. 
 
 Nos. 1 and 2 raise the shell and hold it about a foot 
 from the ground, while No. 4 wipes it ; they then lift it 
 into the muzzle. 
 
 The gunner steps forward, and with the left hand over 
 the handspike, the right hand under and nearer to it, 
 seizes the shell-hooks and assists to lower the shell gently 
 into its place. No. 2 then withdraws his handspike from 
 the ring, and resumes his post. No. 1 takes his hand- 
 spike. The gunner adjusts the shell so that the fuze is in 
 the axis of the piece ; throws the shell-hooks to their 
 place behind No. 2 ; and, if firing with wooden fuzes, un- 
 caps the fuze. 
 
 No. 4, as soon as he wipes the shell, returns the wiper 
 to its place ; takes the slack of the pointing-cord, which 
 he lays over the left manoeuvring bolts, leaving its end 
 at the rear pointing-stake ; and resumes his post and hand- 
 spike. 
 
 3. POINT. 
 
 64. Nos. 1 and 2, facing towards the epaulment, em- 
 bar upon the bolster, under and perpendicularly to the 
 
212 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 The gunner taking the quadrant from the basket, ap- 
 plies it to the left side of the face of the piece with the 
 left hand, and inserts or draws out the quoin with the 
 right, giving the command EAISE, or LOWER, until the 
 piece is at the elevation required usually 45. Return- 
 ing the quadrant to the basket Nos. 1 and 2 at the same 
 time unbarring and resuming their posts he places him- 
 self in rear of the rear pointing-stake, and holding the 
 pointing-cord in the left hand and the plummet in the 
 right, gives the direction ; commanding MORTAR LEFT, 
 MORTAR RIGHT ; MUZZLE LEFT, MUZZLE RIGHT ; TRAIL 
 LEFT, TRAIL RIGHT, as may be required. 
 
 To throio the mortar to the left. Nos. 2 and 4, facing 
 each other, embar under the manoeuvring bolts. Nos. 1 
 and 3, facing towards the epaulment, embar under the 
 notches near them. When all are ready, the gunner gives 
 the command, HEAVE STEADY. The cannoneers remain 
 embarred until he gives some other command, or makes 
 the signal to unbar. 
 
 To throio the mortar to the right. Nos. 1 and 8 em- 
 bar under the manoeuvring bolts. Nos. 2 and 4 embar 
 under the notches. 
 
 To throw the muzzle to the left. Nos. 1 and 3, facing 
 towards the epaulment, embar under the front notches ; 
 No. 1 under the inside of the left notch. 
 
 To throw the trail to the left. Nos. 1 and 3, facing 
 towards the epaulment, embar under the rear notches ; 
 No. 3 under the inside of the left notch. 
 
 The muzzle or trail is thrown to the right, in a sim- 
 ilar manner to the preceding, by Nos. 2 and 4. 
 
 The direction having been given, the gunner gives the 
 word, READY, and makes a signal with both hands ; leaves 
 the plummet at the stake ; returns the pointing-cord to 
 
MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 213 
 
 the foot of the epaulment ; and goes to the windward to 
 observe the effect of the shot. 
 
 Nos. 1, 2, and 4, taking their handspikes with them, go 
 four yards in rear of the platform, and face to the front ; 
 No. 4 between Nos. 1 and 2, their handspikes held erect 
 by the right side, the right arm extended naturally. 
 
 No. 3 lays down his handspike six inches in his front, 
 parallel to the edge of the platform, and makes ready a 
 friction tube, as in No. 24 ; advancing the right foot, he 
 puts the tube in the vent ; rises on the left leg, and moves 
 three paces to the rear in prolongation of the right cheek ; 
 faces to the front ; holds the handle of the lanyard with 
 the right hand, the lanyard slightly stretched, the cord 
 passing between the fingers, back of the hand up ; and 
 breaks to the rear a full pace with the left foot, the left 
 hand against the thigh. 
 
 Remark. To discharge the mortars now in use by 
 means of a friction tube, the lanyard should be passed 
 under a rope attached to and tightly drawn between the 
 rear manoeuvring bolts, or through a loop of rope at- 
 tached to the rear right manoeuvring bolt. 
 
 4. Number one (or the like) FIRE. 
 
 65. Executed as in No. 25. 
 
 On the discharge of the piece, all resume their posts 
 except the gunner, who waits to observe the effect of the 
 shot. As soon as the shot strikes he resumes his post. 
 
 What is prescribed in No. 26 will apply to this piece, 
 omitting the word " loclc" 
 
 66. To continue the exercise, the instructor causes the 
 piece to be moved towards the rear of the platform, di- 
 rects Nos. 2 and 4 to take out the shell and carry it to 
 the rear, and then resumes the series of commands begin- 
 ning with In Battery. 
 
214: MANUAL FOB HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 TO CHANGE POSTS. TO LOAD FOR ACTION. TO CEASE FIRING. 
 
 Executed as in Nos. 28, 29, and 30, except that in 
 changing posts No. 2 passes by the front of the piece. 
 
 TO SECURE PIECE, AND REPLACE IMPLEMENTS. 
 
 67. To discontinue the exercise, the instructor having 
 ordered the firing to cease, and caused the piece to be 
 placed as at the command, IN BATTERY, gives the com- 
 mand : 
 
 REPLACE IMPLEMENTS. 
 
 All lay down their handspikes. No. 2 puts in the 
 tompion, and assists No. 1 to pull up the pointing-stakes. 
 The gunner receives the implements from the cannoneers, 
 and replaces them between the cheeks. 
 
 TO LEAVE THE BATTERY, 
 
 Executed as in No. 32. 
 
 TRANSPORTATION. 
 
 68. One mortar wagon is allowed to each 10-inch 
 siege mortar and bed ; to transport which requires eight 
 horses and four drivers. 
 
 CHARGES, ETC. 
 
 69. 
 
 Greatest charge of powder 4 Ibs* 
 
 Ordinary service charge 3 " 
 
 Charge of the shell filled with powder 5 " 
 
 Bursting charge of the shell 2 " 
 
 Charge to blow out the fuze 6 oz. 
 
MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 215 
 
 Range, charge 4 Ibs., time of flight 21" 2100 yards. 
 
 Range, charge 3 Ibs., time of flight 19" 1700 " 
 
 Range, charge 2 Ibs., time of flight 14" 1000 " 
 
 Proof range of powder 300 " 
 
 Weight of the shell 90 Ibs. 
 
 Five balls, according to their size, are fired from mor- 
 tars of corresponding calibres. With a charge of one- 
 twenty-fifth of its weight the ball is thrown from six hun- 
 dred to seven hundred yards. 
 
 TO PREPARE AMMUNITION. 
 
 70. If the ammunition for mortars is to be prepared 
 and issued by the artillery, two men, numbered 5 and 6, 
 are added to each detachment for that purpose. Their 
 duties at the magazine are similar to those prescribed in 
 No. 56. 
 
 Should wooden fuzes be used, in addition to the im- 
 plements therein mentioned, a fuze-saio will be required 
 for reducing the fuzes to the proper lengths. The shell 
 being first charged, the fuze, cut at the right length, is 
 then driven. 
 
 The paper fuze is marked with the number of seconds 
 which it burns per inch. It may be cut with a knife to 
 any desired length. 
 
 TIME OF FLIGHT. 
 
 71. The time of flight for siege mortars, at an eleva- 
 tion of 45, with ordinary charges, is nearly equal to the 
 square root of the range in feet divided by four. 
 
 The experimental length of the fuze may be given ac- 
 cording to this rule. 
 
216 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLEEY. 
 
 TO ASCERTAIN THE DISTANCE BY THE REPORT OF FIRE-ARMS. 
 
 72. Multiply the number of seconds which elapse be- 
 tween seeing the flash and hearing the report by 1,100 ; 
 the product will be nearly the distance in feet. 
 
 RAPIDITY OF FIRING. 
 
 73. Siege mortars can be fired conveniently at the 
 rate of twelve rounds an hour continuously ; but they 
 may in case of need, be fired with greater rapidity. 
 
 LESSON IV. 
 
 Service of an 8-inch Siege Mortar. 
 
 Three men are necessary : one gunner and two other 
 cannoneers. 
 
 74. The mortar is upon its platform. 
 
 The implements, etc., omitting two handspikes, and 
 adding one grummet-wad, are the same as prescribed for 
 the 10-inch siege mortar in No. 57. They are arranged 
 as prescribed in that number. The wad is in the basket. 
 
 75. The instruction for this piece is the same as that 
 prescribed in Lesson III., with the following modifica- 
 tions : 
 
 At the command TAKE IMPLEMENTS, No. 1 performs 
 the duties enjoined on No, 3, and No. 2 those of No. 4, 
 each in addition to his own. No. 2 assists No. 1 to put 
 on the sleeves, and places the wad on the platform in 
 front of the transom. 
 
 76. At the command IN BATTERY, No. 1 embars under 
 the right front manoeuvring bolts. No. 2 embars under 
 the left rear manoeuvring bolts. 
 
- 
 
 1 
 
 a 
 
 Jf 
 
 3 
 
 PQ 
 
MANUAL FOR HEAVY AUTILLEKY. 217 
 
 77. At the command LOAD, No. 1, having wiped out 
 the mortar, places the wiper upon the stake ; pricks ; and, 
 if necessary, sweeps the platform. 
 
 No. 2, laying down his handspike, goes for a cartridge 
 and shell ; carries the shell in the right arm ; passes be- 
 tween the gunner and the muzzle, and places it on the 
 wad ; gives to the gunner the cartridge, and if firing with 
 paper fuzes, a fuze ; and takes the wiper from the 
 stake. 
 
 The gunner, on returning the scraper to the basket, 
 takes the shell-hooks and lays them on the ground be- 
 tween himself and the muzzle. Having carefully poured 
 in the powder, he returns the cartridge-bag to No. 2, 
 and distributes the powder evenly over the bottom of the 
 chamber ; puts the fuze in the fuze-plug ; inserts the 
 hooks in the ears of the shell ; raises it about a foot from 
 the ground and holds it, while No. 2 wipes it ; and then 
 places it in the bore. 
 
 No. 2 replaces the wiper upon the stake ; lays the 
 slack of the pointing-cord over the left manoeuvring bolts ; 
 and resumes his post. 
 
 78. At the command POINT, Nos. 1 and 2 embar 
 under either of the front or rear notches, as required. 
 At the signal from the gunner, No. 1 prepares to fire the 
 piece, as prescribed for No. 3, in No. 64. 
 
 TRANSPORTATION. 
 
 79. One mortar wagon will carry three 8-inch siege 
 mortars, with then "beds; to transport which requires 
 eight horses and four drivers. 
 10 
 
218 MANUAL FOB HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 CHARGES, ETC. 
 80. 
 
 Greatest charge of powder 2 Ibs. 
 
 Ordinary service charge 1 Ib. 12 oz. 
 
 Charge of the shell filled with powder 2 Ibs. 9 oz. 
 
 Bursting charge of the shell 1 Ib. 
 
 Charge to blow out the fuze 4 oz. 
 
 Range, charge 2 Ibs., time of flight 20" 1,837 yards. 
 
 Range, charge ! Ib., time of flight 14" 943 " 
 
 Proof range of powder 300 " 
 
 Weight of shell 45 Ibs. 
 
 LESSON V. 
 
 Service of a Coehorn Mortar. 
 
 Three men are necessary : one gunner and two other 
 cannoneers. 
 
 81. The mortar is upon its platform. 
 
 The implements, etc., and their arrangement, are the 
 same as prescribed for the 8-inch siege mortar in No. 74. 
 A 24-pdr. shell is used. 
 
 82. The instruction for this piece is the same as that 
 prescribed in Lesson IV. 
 
 To prepare its ammunition, and to transport it by 
 hand with ease, two additional men are required. The 
 gunner carries the basket and implements. 
 
 83. It is fired either from behind intrenchments, like 
 other mortars, or it may accompany troops in effecting 
 lodgments in towns and fortified places. 
 
 84. As the shell is without ears, it should be strapped 
 with tin, having loops attached, through which a cord is 
 passed for the purpose of lowering it into the bore. The 
 chamber being cylindrical, a sponge is used, which is 
 handled by No. 1. 
 
MANUAL FOB HEAVY ARTILLERY. 219 
 
 CHARGES, ETC. 
 
 85. 
 
 Greatest charge of powder 8 OZ. 
 
 Charge of the shell filled with powder *.-.. 1 Ib. 
 
 Bursting charge of the shell 8 oz. 
 
 Charge to blow out the fuze 2 oz. 
 
 Range, charge 8 oz 1,200 yards. 
 
 Range, charge 6 oz 900 u 
 
 Range, charge 4 oz 430 " 
 
 Proof range of powder 300 " 
 
 Weight of shell 17 Ibs. 
 
 LESSON VI. 
 Service of a 10-inch Sea-coast Mortar. 
 
 Five men are necessary : one gunner and four other 
 cannoneers. 
 
 86. The mortar is upon its platform. 
 
 The implements, etc., with the addition of one sponge, 
 are the same as prescribed for the 10-inch siege mortar 
 in No. 57. They are arranged as prescribed in that 
 number, except that the sponge is placed upon props one 
 yard behind No. 1, the sponge-head turned towards the 
 epaulment. 
 
 87. The instruction for this piece is the same as that 
 prescribed in Lesson III., with the following modifications : 
 
 No. 1, after wiping the bore, sponges out the cham- 
 ber ; for this purpose mounting upon the right cheek and 
 bolster. 
 
 To scrape the bore, and to put in the cartridge and 
 shell, the gunner mounts upon a block in front of the 
 muzzle. 
 
 The cartridge its bag being of bombazine or flannel 
 is put directly into the chamber by the gunner, and 
 rammed by No. 1. 
 
220 MANUAL FOK HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 To lift the shell into the muzzle, Nos. 2 and 3 mount 
 the cheeks, and are assisted respectively by the gunner 
 and No. 1. 
 
 In giving the elevation, Nos. 1 and 2 are assisted by 
 Nos. 3 and 4. 
 
 Before priming, No. 3 pricks a second time. 
 
 CHARGES, ETC. 
 
 88. 
 
 Greatest charge of powder 10 Ibs. 
 
 Charge of shell filled with powder 5 " 
 
 Bursting charge of the shell 2 " 
 
 Charge to blow out the fuze 5 oz. 
 
 Range, charge 10 Ibs., time of flight 36" 4,250 yards. 
 
 Proof range of powder 300 " 
 
 Weight of shell 90 Ibs. 
 
 LESSON VII. 
 
 Service of a 1%-incli Sea-coast Mortar. 
 
 Five men are necessary : one gunner and four other 
 cannoneers. 
 
 89. The mortar is upon its platform. 
 
 The implements, etc., and their arrangement, are the 
 same as prescribed for the 10- inch sea-coast mortar in 
 No. 86. 
 
 00. The instruction for this piece differs in no respect 
 from that prescribed in Lesson VI. 
 
 CHARGES, ETC. 
 
 91. 
 
 Greatest charge of powder 20 Ibs. 
 
 Charge of the shell filled with powder 11 " 
 
 Bursting charge of the shell 6 " 
 
MANUAL FOR HEAVY AKTILLEKY. 221 
 
 Charge to blow out the fuze 6 oz. 
 
 Range, charge 20 Ibs., time of flight (about) 40" 4,325 yards. 
 
 Proof range of powder 300 " 
 
 Weight of shell 200 Ibs. 
 
 LESSON VIII. 
 
 Service of a Stone Mortar. 
 
 Five men are necessary : one gunner and four other 
 cannoneers. 
 
 92. The mortar is upon its platform. 
 
 The implements, etc., and their arrangement, are the 
 same as prescribed for the 10-inch sea-coast mortar in 
 No. 86. 
 
 93. The instruction for this piece differs in no respect 
 from that prescribed in Lesson VI. 
 
 A wooden bottom is placed over the mouth of the 
 chamber to receive the basket which contains the charge 
 of stones. 
 
 CHARGES, ETC. 
 
 94. With a charge of a pound and a half of powder, 
 and one hundred and twenty pounds of stones, at an ele- 
 vation of 60, the stones are thrown from one hundred 
 and fifty to two hundred and fifty yards. 
 
 With fifteen 6-pdr. shells, fuze fifteen seconds, charge 
 of powder one pound, elevation 33, the shell may be 
 thrown from fifty to one hundred and fifty yards. 
 
 95. As the shells are liable to burst on leaving the 
 bore, the piece is fired by a slow match applied to a train 
 of quick match, giving the men time to place themselves 
 under cover. 
 
222 
 
 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 LESSON IX. 
 Service of a Gun mounted on a Barbette Carriage. 
 
 Remark. The instruction for a barbette gun, although in many 
 respects precisely the same as that for a siege gun, is given in full, 
 because the siege gun is seldom found in the forts on the sea-board. 
 
 Five men are necessary : one gunner and four other 
 cannoneers. 
 
 96. The piece is in battery. 
 
 The implements, etc., are arranged as follows : 
 
 r Two on each side of the carriage, lean- 
 HANDSPIKES, . < ing against the parapet, in line with 
 L. the cannoneers. 
 
 One yard behind the cannoneers of the 
 right, the sponge uppermost, the 
 sponge and rammer-heads turned 
 from the parapet, inclined slightly 
 from the piece, and supported upon 
 a prop ; or, when this cannot be done 
 conveniently, placed against the wall, 
 . the sponge and rammer-heads near- 
 est the piece. 
 Against the parapet, outside of the 
 
 pile of balls. 
 
 Containing friction tubes, and the lan- 
 yard, wound in St. Andrew's cross 
 upon its handle. Suspended from 
 the knob of the cascable. 
 Containing the gunner's level, breech- 
 sight, finger-stall, priming-wire, gim- 
 GUNNER'S-POUCH, 1 let, vent-punch, chalk-line, and chalk. 
 Suspended from the knob of the cas- 
 cable. 
 
 SPONGE-RAMMER, - 
 
 PASS-BOX, 
 
 TUBE-POUCH, 
 
w 
 
 I 
 
 hj 
 
 
 
 SB 
 
 U 
 
 n 
 
MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 223 
 
 r One on each side of the piece, at the 
 CHOCKS, . . . < foot of the parapet, inside the hand- 
 
 L spikes. 
 
 VENT-COVER, . Covering the vent. 
 TOMPION, . . In the muzzle. 
 
 ~ ( Leaning against the parapet, outside 
 
 BROOM, . . . ] b fin 
 
 ( of the pile of balls. 
 
 f Containing cartridges, at the safest and 
 BUDGE-BARREL, < most convenient place in rear of the 
 I piece. 
 
 When several guns are served together, there will be 
 only one gunner's level and two vent-punches to each 
 battery, not exceeding six pieces. To the same battery 
 there will be one ivorm, one ladle, and one wrench. 
 
 The balls are regularly piled on the banquette, on the 
 left of the piece. 
 
 The wads aro placed between the parapet and the 
 balls, partly resting on them. 
 
 97. The cannoneers having been marched to their 
 posts, the instructor explains to them the names and 
 uses of the implements, and the nomenclatures of the gun, 
 its carriage, and the battery. 
 
 98. To cause the implements to be distributed, the 
 instructor commands : 
 
 TAKE IMPLEMENTS. 
 
 The gunner mounts upon the tongue ; takes off the 
 vent-cover, handing it to No. 2 to place against the para- 
 pet, outside of the pass-box ; gives the tube-pouch to No. 
 3 ; equips himself with his own pouch and the finger-stall, 
 wearing the latter on the second finger of the left hand ; 
 levels the piece by the elevating screw ; applies his level 
 to ascertain the line of metal, which, with the assistance 
 of No. 2, he marks with the chalk-line ; and resumes his 
 post. 
 
 
224: MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 No. 3 equips himself with the tube-pouch. 
 Nos. 1 and 2, after passing handspikes to Nos. 3 and 
 4, take each one for himself. 
 
 99. The handspike is held in both hands ; the hand 
 nearest to the parapet grasping it near the small end and 
 at the height of the shoulder, back of the hand down, 
 elbow touching the body ; the other hand back up, the 
 arm extended naturally ; the butt of the handspike upon 
 the ground on the side farthest from the parapet, and six 
 inches in advance of the alignment. 
 
 100. When the cannoneer lays down his handspike, he 
 places it directly before him, about six inches in advance 
 of, and parallel to the alignment, the small end towards 
 the parapet ; and whenever he thus lays it down for the 
 performance of any particular duty, he will resume it 
 on returning to his post after the completion of that 
 duty. 
 
 101. The instructor causes the service of the piece to 
 be executed by the following commands : 
 
 1. FROM BATTERY. 
 
 The gunner moves two paces to his right. 
 
 Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4, facing from the parapet, embar, 
 near the tire ; Nos. 1 and 2 first facing the chocks on the 
 rails in front of the rollers through the front spokes of 
 the wheels, over the front manoeuvring bolts ; and Nos. 
 3 and 4 through the rear spokes, under the rear ma- 
 noeuvring bolts. 
 
 Should there be no rear manoeuvring bolts, Nos. 3 
 and 4 embar under the braces, near the manoeuvring 
 staples. 
 
 All being ready, the gunner gives the command HEAVE, 
 which will be repeated as often as may be necessary. As 
 soon as the face of the piece is about one yard from the 
 
MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 225 
 
 parapet, ho commands HALT. All unbar, and resume 
 their posts. Nos. 1 and 2 chock the rollers. 
 
 2. Load by Detail LOAD. 
 
 102. Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 lay down their handspikes. 
 
 No. 2 takes out the tompion, and places it near the 
 vent-cover. 
 
 No. 1 faces once and a half to his left ; steps over the 
 sponge and rammer ; faces the piece ; takes the sponge 
 with both hands, the backs down, the right hand three 
 feet from the sponge-head, the left hand eighteen inches 
 nearer to it ; returns to the piece, placing the left foot on 
 the rail of the chassis in line with the face of the piece, 
 the right in the most convenient position ; and rests the 
 end of the sponge in the muzzle, the staff in the prolonga- 
 tion of the bore, supported by the right hand, the right 
 arm extended, the left hand flat against the side of the 
 thigh. 
 
 Remark. In order that Nos. 1 and 2 may load with facility with- 
 out standing on the chassis, a banquette should be placed between 
 the head of the chassis and the wall, or a platform attached to the 
 head of the chassis. 
 
 No. 2 steps upon the rail on his side, and occupies a 
 position on the left of the piece corresponding to that of 
 No. 1 on its right. He seizes the staff with the left 
 hand, back down, near to and outside of the hand of 
 No. 1. 
 
 No. 3, as soon as the sponge is inserted in the bore, 
 steps over the rammer and seizes the staff with both 
 hands, as prescribed for the sponge ; returns to his post ; 
 and stands ready to exchange with No. 1. 
 
 No. 4 takes the pass-box and goes to the rear for a 
 cartridge ; returns with it, and places himself, facing the 
 piece, about eighteen inches to the rear and right of 
 No. 2. 
 
 10* 
 
226 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 The gunner mounts upon the tongue of the chassis, 
 placing the left foot about six inches from the rear tran- 
 som of the gun carriage, and breaks well to the rear with 
 the right foot, the toe to the right ; closes the vent with 
 the second finger of the left hand, bending well forward 
 to cover himself by the breech ; and turns the elevating 
 screw with the right hand, so as to adjust the piece con- 
 veniently for loading. 
 
 103. In the mean time, Nos. 1 and 2 insert the sponge 
 by the following motions : 
 
 First motion. They insert the sponge as far as the 
 hand of No. 1, bodies erect, shoulders square. 
 
 Second motion. They slide the hands along the staff 
 and seize it at arm's length. 
 
 Third motion. They force the sponge down as pre- 
 scribed in the first motion. 
 
 Fourth motion. They repeat the second motion. 
 
 Fifth motion. They push the sponge to the bottom 
 of the bore. No. 1 replaces the left hand on the staff, 
 back up, six inches nearer to the muzzle than the right. 
 No. 2 places the Tight hand, back up, between the hands 
 of No. 1. 
 
 If in executing these motions, or the corresponding 
 ones with the rammer, it be found that the sponge or 
 rammer is at home at the third or fourth motion, then 
 what is prescribed for the fifth motion, will be performed 
 at the third or fourth. The knee on the side towards 
 which the body is to be inclined is always bent, the other 
 straightened ; and the weight of the body added, as much 
 as possible, to the effort exerted by the arms. 
 
 3. SPONGE. 
 
 104. Nos. 1 and 2, pressing the sponge firmly against 
 the bottom of the bore, turn it three times from right to 
 
MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 227 
 
 left, and three times from left to right ; replace the hands 
 on the thighs ; and withdraw the sponge by motions con- 
 trary to those prescribed for inserting it. 
 
 Remark. To handle the sponge when it is new and fits tight, 
 it may become necessary for Nos. 1 and 2 to use both hands. In 
 this case it will be inserted and withdrawn by short and quick mo- 
 tions. 
 
 No. 2 quits the staff, and turning towards No. 4, re- 
 ceives from him the cartridge, which he takes in both 
 hands, back down, and introduces into the bore bottom 
 foremost, seams to the sides ; he then grasps the rammer 
 in the way prescribed for the sponge. 
 
 No. 1, rising upon the right leg and turning towards 
 his left, passes the sponge above the rammer with the left 
 hand to No. 3, and receiving the rammer with the right, 
 presents it as prescribed for the sponge, except that he 
 rests the rammer-head against the right side of the face 
 of the piece. 
 
 No. 3, as soon as the sponge is withdrawn, passing 
 the rammer under the sponge with the right hand, re- 
 ceives the sponge from No. 1 with the left, replaces it 
 upon the prop, and resumes his post. 
 
 No. 4, setting down the pass-box, takes out the car- 
 tridge and presents it in both hands to No. 2, the choke 
 to the front ; returns the pass-box to its place ; and 
 picks up a ball, and afterwards a wad, should one be re- 
 quired. 
 
 Nos. 1 and 2 force down the cartridge by the motions 
 prescribed for forcing down the sponge. 
 
 4. RAM. 
 
 105. Nos. 1 and 2, drawing the rammer out to the 
 full extent of their arms, ram with a single stroke. No. 
 2 quits the staff, and turning towards No. 4, receives from 
 him the ball and wad, while No. 1 throws out the ram- 
 
228 MANUAL FOE HEAVY AKTILLEKY. 
 
 mer, and holds the head against the right side of the face 
 of the piece. No. 2, receiving successively the ball and 
 wad, introduces them into the bore, the ball first, and 
 seizes the staff with the left hand. No. 4 then resumes 
 his post. 
 
 Nos. 1 and 2 force down the ball and wad together 
 by the same motions, and ram in the same manner as 
 prescribed for the cartridge. No. 2 quits the rammer ; 
 sweeps, if necessary, the platform on his own side ; passes 
 the broom to No. 1 ; and resumes his post. No. 1 throws 
 out the rammer, and places it upon the prop below the 
 sponge ; finishes the sweeping ; and resumes his post. 
 
 The gunner pricks, leaving the priming-wire in the 
 vent, and, if firing beyond point-blank range, adjusts the 
 breech-sight to the distance. 
 
 5. IN BATTERY. 
 
 106. Nos. 1 and 2 unchock the rollers, and with Nos. 
 3 and 4, all facing towards the parapet, embar ; Nos. 1 
 and 2 through the front spokes of the wheels, near the 
 tire, under the manoeuvring bolts ; and Nos. 3 and 4 
 under the braces, near the manoeuvring staples. 
 
 All being ready, the gunner commands HEAVE, and 
 the piece is run into battery ; the gunner following up 
 the movement. As soon as the rollers touch the hurters, 
 he commands HALT. All unbar, and Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 
 resume their posts. 
 
 6. POINT. 
 
 107. No. 3 lays down his handspike ; passes the hook 
 of the lanyard through the eye of a tube from front to 
 rear ; and holds the handle of the lanyard with the right 
 hand, the hook between the thumb and forefinger. 
 
 Nos. 1 and 4 go to the traverse wheels, and, facing 
 towards the parapet, embar under the fork-bolts or under 
 
MANUAL FOK HEAVY AKTILLEKY. 229 
 
 the wheels. No. 1, in passing from and to his post, 
 moves on the outside of No. 3. 
 
 The gunner withdraws the priming-wire, and, aided 
 by Nos. 1 and 4, gives the direction ; causing the trail to 
 be moved by commanding LEFT, or RIGHT, tapping, at 
 the same time, on the right side of the breech for No. 1 
 to move the chassis to the left, or on the left side for No. 
 4 to move it to the right. 
 
 He then places the centre point of the breech-sight 
 accurately upon the chalk mark on the base-ring, and by 
 the elevating screw gives the proper elevation, rectifying 
 the direction, if necessary. 
 
 The moment the piece is correctly pointed, he rises 
 on the left leg, and gives the word READY, making a 
 signal with both hands, at which Nos. 1 and 4 unbar, and 
 resume their posts ; takes the breech-sight with the left 
 hand, and receiving the tube from No. 3, inserts it in the 
 vent ; dismounts from the tongue ; and goes to the wind- 
 ward to observe the effect of the shot. 
 
 No. 3 drops the handle, allowing the lanyard to un- 
 coil as he steps back to his post, holding it slightly 
 stretched with the right hand, the cord passing between 
 the fingers, back of the hand up, and breaks to the rear a 
 full pace with the left foot, the left hand against the thigh. 
 
 At the word, READY, Nos. 1 and 2 take the chocks, 
 and, breaking off with the feet farthest from the parapet, 
 stand ready to chock the rollers. 
 
 108. In directing the piece to be fired, the instructor 
 will designate it by its number, as, for example : 
 
 7. Number one FIRE. 
 
 No. 3 gives a smart pull upon the lanyard. 
 Immediately after the discharge of the piece, Nos. I 
 and 2 chock the rollers, and resume the erect position. 
 
230 MANUAL FOR HEAVY AKTILLEKY. 
 
 No. 3 resumes the erect position, and rewinds the lanyard 
 in St. Andrew's cross upon its handle, returning it, if dry, 
 to the tube-pouch. The gunner, having observed the ef- 
 fect of the shot, returns to his post. 
 
 109. Whenever the piece is to be fired by a lock, port- 
 fire, or slowmatch, it will be done by No. 3, as prescribed 
 for No. 4, in the instruction for field artillery. 
 
 110. To continue the exercise, the instructor resumes 
 the series of commands, beginning with FROM BATTERY. 
 
 TO CHANGE POSTS. 
 
 111. To change posts, the instructor commands: 
 1. Change posts. 2. March. 3. Call off . 
 
 At the first command, the cannoneers lay down their 
 handspikes ; place their equipments on the parts of the 
 carriage nearest to them ; and face to their left. 
 
 At the second command, they step off, each advancing 
 one post ; No. 2 taking that of No. 1. Nos. 2 and 3 pass 
 to the rear of the chassis ; No. 2 on the outside of all the 
 cannoneers. On arriving at their posts, they face to the 
 piece, and equip themselves. 
 
 At the third command, they call off, according to the 
 posts they are to occupy. 
 
 TO LOAD FOR ACTION. 
 
 112. The cannoneers having been sufficiently instructed 
 in the details of the movements, the instructor commands : 
 
 Load for action LOAD. 
 
 The piece is run from battery, loaded, run into bat- 
 tery, pointed, and prepared for firing, by the following 
 commands from the gunner : FROM BATTERY LOAD IN 
 BATTERY POINT READY. 
 
MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 231 
 
 At tho command, or signal, from the instructor to 
 commence firing, the gunner gives the command, FIRE, 
 and continues the action until the instructor directs the 
 firing to cease. 
 
 TO CEASE FIRING. 
 
 113. To cause the firing to cease, the instructor com- 
 mands : 
 
 CEASE FIRING. 
 
 Whether the cannoneers are loading by detail or for 
 action, the piece is sponged out, and all resume their posts. 
 If the cartridge has been inserted the loading will be com- 
 pleted, unless the instructor should otherwise direct. 
 
 TO SECURE PIECE, AND REPLACE IMPLEMENTS. 
 
 114. To discontinue the exercise, the instructor having 
 ordered the firing to cease, and caused the piece to be run 
 into battery, gives the following commands : 
 
 1. SECURE PIECE. 
 
 No. 2 returns the tompion to the muzzle. The gunner 
 puts on the vent cover, which he receives from No. 2, 
 and depresses the piece. 
 
 2. REPLACE IMPLEMENTS. 
 
 Nos. 1 and 2 replace the handspikes against the para- 
 pet, Nos. 3 and 4 passing theirs to them for that purpose. 
 The gunner hangs the pouches upon the knob of the cas- 
 cable. 
 
 TO LEAVE THE BATTERY. 
 
 115. The instructor forms the detachment in rear of 
 the piece, and marches it from the battery as prescribed 
 in No. 12. 
 
232 MANUAL FOK HEAVY AKTILLERY. 
 
 TO SERVE THE PIECE WITH REDUCED NUMBERS. 
 
 Executed as in No. 34. 
 
 CHARGES, ETC. 
 
 Wads. 
 
 Rapidity of firing* 
 Penetration of shot. 
 See Nos. 37, 39, and 40. 
 
 LESSON XII. 
 Service of a Gun mounted on a Casemate Carriage. 
 
 Five men are necessary : one gunner and four other 
 cannoneers. 
 
 120. The piece is in battery. 
 
 The implements, etc., are arranged as follows : 
 
 f One on each side of the carriage, lean- 
 
 iRUCK-HAND- I . ingt the waU in ^ ^fa ^ Q 
 
 SPIKES. 
 
 L cannoneers. 
 
 f One on each side of the carriage, lean- 
 .LLEVATING-HAND- I . . ,, -,, , , . n , AT 
 
 SPIKES, . . 
 
 . . ,, -,, , , . n , AT 
 
 < ing against the wall, behind Nos. 3 
 
 an(J4 * 
 
 r One on each side of the carriage, lean- 
 IRAVERSING- I . against the wall, opposite to the 
 HANDSPIKES,. [ e nd of the tongue. 
 
 r Leaning against the wall, behind the 
 
 KOLLER-HAND- I gunner> Qr kid down j n the align- 
 
 SPIKE,. . . ^ ment on his right. 
 
 * These are manwuvrinff handspikes. With two pieces in one casemate, or 
 "where the pieces are not separated by piers, they may be placed against tho 
 nearest wall, or laid down in the most convenient position. 
 
MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 233 
 
 SPONGE-RAMMER, -\ 
 
 PASS-BOX, 
 
 TUBE-POUCH, 
 
 GUNNER' S-POUCH, 
 
 CHOCKS, . . 
 
 VENT-COVER, 
 TOMPION, 
 
 BROOM, . . 
 
 BUDGE-BARREL, 
 
 f About one yard behind the cannoneers 
 of the right, the sponge uppermost, 
 the sponge and rammer-heads turned 
 from the embrasure, inclined slight- 
 ly from the piece, and supported 
 upon a proper block. 
 Behind No. 4. 
 
 Containing friction tubes, and the lan- 
 yard, wound in St. Andrew's cross 
 upon its handle. Suspended from 
 the knob of the cascable. 
 
 Containing the gunner's level, breech- 
 sight, finger-stall, priming-wire, gim- 
 let, vent-punch, chalk-line, and chalk. 
 Suspended from the knob of the cas- 
 cable. 
 
 {One on each side of the carriage, on 
 the front transom of the chassis, 
 handles outwards. 
 Covering the vent. 
 In the muzzle. 
 
 j Leaning against the scarp-wall, on the 
 ( left of the piece. 
 r Containing cartridges, at the safest and 
 I most convenient place in rear of 
 I the piece. 
 
 When several guns are served together, there will be 
 only one gunner's level and two vent-punches to each bat- 
 tery, not exceeding six pieces. To the same battery there 
 will be one ivorm, one ladle, and one wrench. 
 
 The balls are regularlv piled against the wall, behind 
 No. 2. 
 
231 MANUAL FOE HEAVY AKTILLEPwY. 
 
 The wads are placed between the wall and the* balls, 
 partly resting on them. 
 
 121. The cannoneers having been marched to their 
 posts, the instructor explains to them the names and uses 
 of the implements, and the nomenclatures of the gun, its 
 carriage, and the battery. 
 
 122. To cause the implements to be distributed, the 
 instructor commands : 
 
 TAKE IMPLEMENTS. 
 
 The gunner mounts upon the tongue ; takes off the 
 vent-cover, handing it to No. 2 to place against the 
 scarp ; gives the tube-pouch to No. 3 ; and equips him- 
 self with his own pouch and the finger-stall, wearing the 
 latter on the second finger of the left hand. With the as- 
 sistance of No. 3 he levels the piece, and applies his level 
 to ascertain the line of metal, which, with the assistance 
 of No. 2, he marks with the chalk line. (If the gun has 
 permanent sights, this is only necessary for instruction, 
 ojr for verifying the sight.) He then takes the roller- 
 handspike, and resumes his post. This handspike is held 
 vertically with the right hand, the lower end upon the 
 ground in line with the toes, the arms extended naturally. 
 
 No. 3 equips himself with the tube-pouch. 
 
 Nos. 1 and 2 take the truck-handspikes with the hand 
 farthest from the wall, and carry them to that side, hold- 
 ing them vertically, the lower end upon the ground in line 
 with the toes, the arms extended naturally. 
 
 123. The instructor causes the service of the piece to 
 be executed by the following commands : 
 
 1. FROM BATTERY. 
 
 The gunner embars in the left mortise of the roller. 
 Nos. 1 and 2, facing from the scarp wall, embar in 
 the most convenient front mortises of the truck-wheels, 
 
MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 235 
 
 the hand farthest from the carriage at the top of the hand- 
 spike, the other hand eight inches lower. 
 
 Nos. 3 and 4 go to the assistance of Nos. 1 and 2, 
 and, facing towards them, seize the handspikes with both 
 hands between those of Nos. 1 and 2. 
 
 Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 in applying themselves to the car- 
 riage either to run it from or to battery, break to the 
 rear with the foot nearest to the carriage. 
 
 All being ready, the gunner presses the roller under 
 the rear transom of the gun carriage, by bearing down 
 upon his handspike, and gives the command, HEAVE. 
 
 Nos. 1, 2, 3. and 4 act together, and bear upon the 
 handspikes until they are nearly down to the rails. The 
 gunner then disengages the roller from under the transom 
 by raising his handspike, and commands, UNBAR. Nos. 1 
 and 2 let go the handspikes with the hand nearest to the 
 the carriage, arid chock the wheels. Nos. 3 and 4 with- 
 draw the handspikes and pass them to Nos. 1 and 2, who 
 re-insert them in the front mortises. 
 
 The gunner again bearing down upon his handspike, 
 gives the command, HEAVE, and so on, until the face of 
 the piece is about one yard from the wall, when, raising 
 his handspike, he commands, HALT, and shifts it into the 
 right mortise of the roller. Nos. 1 and 2 chock the 
 wheels, and replace their handspikes against the wall. 
 All resume their posts. 
 
 2. Load by detail LOAD. 
 
 124. Executed as in Nos. 103 and 104, with the fol- 
 lowing modification : No. 3, facing towards the scarp, 
 embars under the breech, and maintains the piece in a 
 covenient position for inserting the sponge, until he re- 
 ceives a signal from the gunner to unbar. 
 
 3. SPONGE. 
 
 125. Executed as in No. 104. 
 
236 MANUAL FOR HEAVY AKTILLEKY. 
 
 4. EAM. 
 
 126. Executed as in No. 105. 
 
 5. IN BATTERY. 
 
 127. Nos. 1 and 2 unchock the wheels, and, facing 
 from the scarp wall apply their hands to the front of the 
 cheeks. 
 
 Nos. 3 and 4, facing towards the scarp wall, lay hold 
 of the handles. 
 
 The gunner bears down carefully upon the roller- 
 handspike, and the piece is run into battery. As soon as 
 the wheels touch the hurters, he commands, HALT. Nos. 
 1, 2, 3, and 4 resume their posts. 
 
 6. POINT. 
 
 128. Nos. 1 and 4 take the traversing handspikes, and, 
 facing towards the scarp wall, embar under the ends of 
 the rear transom of the chassis. No. 1, in passing to and 
 from his post, moves on the outside of No. 3. 
 
 When the elevation is given by the quoin, No. 2 takes 
 an elevating handspike and embars upon the left cheek 
 under the re-inforce. 
 
 The gunner withdraws the priming-wire, and, aided by 
 Nos. 1 and 4, gives the direction, as in No. 107. 
 
 He then applies the breech sight, if necessary, and 
 points the piece ; commanding LOWER, or RAISE, tapping 
 at the same time on the upper side of the knob of the 
 cascable with the left hand, and drawing out the quoin 
 with the right, in order to elevate, or tapping upwards on 
 the lower side and shoving in the quoin, in order to de- 
 press the piece. 
 
 The moment the piece is correctly pointed, he rises 
 on the left leg, and gives the word, READY, making a sig- 
 nal with both hands, at which Nos. 1, 2, and 4 unbar, re- 
 place their handspikes, and resume their posts ; takes the 
 
MANUAL FOE HEAVY AETILLEEY. 237 
 
 breech-sight with the left hand, the roller-handspike with 
 the right, and disposes himself to observe the effect of the 
 shot. 
 
 If the elevation is given by a screw, No. 3 turns its 
 handle by direction of the gunner. 
 
 No. 3, having passed the hook of the lanyard through 
 the eye of a tube from front to rear, inserts it in the vent, 
 and stretches the lanyard as in No. 107. 
 
 At the word, EEADY, Nos. 1 and 2 take the chocks, 
 and breaking off with the feet farthest from the wall, 
 stand ready to chock the wheels. 
 
 7. Number one (or the like) FIRE. 
 
 129. Executed as in No. 108. 
 
 What is prescribed in No. 109 will apply to this 
 piece. 
 
 130. To continue the exercise, the instructor resumes 
 the series of commands, beginning with FROM BATTERY : 
 
 ^ To change posts. 
 To load for action. 
 To cease firing. 
 
 To secure piece, and replace implements. 
 Executed as in Nos. Ill, 112, 113, and 115. 
 
 TO LEAVE THE BATTERY. 
 
 131. The instructor forms the detachment in rear of 
 the piece, and marches it from the battery as prescribed 
 in No. 12. 
 
 132. Remark The service of a gun mounted on a case- 
 mate carriage of the old pattern, (which is without the 
 eccentric roller,) will require the following modification : 
 The roller-handspike is dispensed with, and the gunner, at 
 the command, FROM BATTERY, moves two paces to the 
 right. 
 
238 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 TO SERVE THE PIECE WITH REDUCED NUMBERS. 
 
 Executed as in No. 34. 
 
 CHARGES, ETC. 
 
 133. The ordinary service charge of powder for heavy 
 guns is one-fourth the weight of the shot. For firing 
 double shot it is one-sixth that weight. 
 
 Range of a 42-pdr., at an elevation of 1 30', charge 
 
 lOi-lbs 860 yards. 
 
 Range of a 42-pdr., at an elevation of 5, charge 
 
 lOJlbs 1,955 " 
 
 Range of a 32-pdr., at an elevation of 1 30', charge 
 
 8 Ibs 800 " 
 
 Range of a 32-pdr., at an elevation of 5, charge 8 Ibs. 1,922 " 
 
 Proof range of powder 300 " 
 
 Greatest elevation the carriage admits 8 
 
 Greatest depression the carriage admits 4 
 
 Wads. 
 
 Rapidity of firing. 
 Penetration of shot. 
 See Nos. 37 39, and 40. 
 
 LESSON XIII. 
 
 Service of an 8-inch Columliad mounted on a Casemate Car- 
 riage. 
 
 Five men are necessary : one gunner and four otner 
 cannoneers. 
 
 134. The piece is in battery. 
 
 The implements, etc., and their arrangement, are the 
 same as prescribed for the casemate gun in No. 120, sub- 
 stituting haversack worn by No. 4 from the right shoul- 
 der to the left side for pass-box. 
 
MANUAL FOE HEAVY ARTILLERY. 239 
 
 The shells are at the magazine, or other safe position, 
 and are brought, as required, to the place prescribed for 
 the budge-barrel. 
 
 135. The instruction for this piece differs in no ma- 
 terial respect from that prescribed in Lesson XII. 
 
 It is loaded with shell, which is attached to a sabot. 
 The shell is brought up by No. 4 together with the car- 
 tridge, and is set home in the same manner as the ball, ex- 
 cept that it is not rammed. 
 
 CHARGES, ETC. 
 
 136. 
 
 Greatest charge of powder 10 Ibs. 
 
 Charge of the shell filled with powder 2 Ibs. 9 oz. 
 
 Bursting charge of the shell 1 Ib. 
 
 Charge to blow out the fuze 4 oz. 
 
 Range at an angle of 1 , charge 1 Ibs. ) Axis of the piece j 919 yards. 
 Range at an angle of 5, charge 10 Ibs. j the water. V ( 1,813 " 
 
 Proof range of powder 300 " 
 
 Weight of shell 50 Ibs. 
 
 LESSON XIV. 
 
 Service of a 24:-pdr. Howitzer mounted on a Flank Casemate 
 Carriage. 
 
 Three men are necessary : one gunner and two other 
 
 cannoneers. 
 
 137. The piece is in battery. * 
 
 The implements, etc., are arranged as follows : 
 
 ROLLER-HAND- j Leaning against the scarp wall, behind 
 SPIKE, . . . ( No. 2. 
 
 C Leaning against the scarp wall, behind 
 SPONGE & RAM-] , T to , b ,, 
 
 < No. 1, the rammer-head on the 
 
 MEB ' ' ' ' I ground. 
 
24:0 MA2OJAL FOK HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 TT j Suspended from the knob of the cas- 
 
 ( cable. 
 
 Containing the finger-stall, priming- 
 wire, friction tubes, and the lanyard, 
 
 TUBE-POUCH, 
 
 wound in St. Andrew's cross upon 
 
 its handle. Suspended from the 
 
 knob of the cascable. 
 VENT-COVER, . Covering the vent. 
 TOMPION, . . In the muzzle. 
 BROOM, . . . On the left of the piece. 
 
 {Containing cartridges, at the safest and 
 most convenient place in rear of the 
 piece. 
 
 The rounds of canister are arranged against the scarp 
 wall, behind No. 2. The shells, if used, are at the maga- 
 zine, or other safe position, and are brought, as required, 
 to the place prescribed for the budge-barrel. 
 
 138. The cannoneers having been marched to their 
 posts, the instructor explains to them the names and uses 
 of the implements, and the nomenclatures of the howitzer, 
 its carriage, and the battery. 
 
 139. To cause the implements to be distributed, the 
 instructor commands : 
 
 TAKE IMPLEMENTS. 
 
 The gunner takes the priming-wire and finger-stall, 
 wearing the latter on the second finger of the right hand ; 
 gives the tube-pouch to No. 1, and the haversack to No. 
 2 ; takes off the vent-cover and places it against the scarp 
 wall outside of the canisters ; seizes the roller-handspike 
 with the right hand, and resumes his post ; holding the 
 handspike vertically on the right side, its lower end in 
 line with the toes, the arm extended naturally. 
 
 No. 1 equips himself with the tube-poucL 
 
MANUAL FOB HEAVY AKTILLEKY. 24:1 
 
 No. 2 equips himself with the haversack, which he 
 wears from the right shoulder to the left side. 
 
 140. The instructor causes the service of the piece to 
 be executed by the following commands : 
 
 1. FROM BATTERY. 
 
 The gunner, embarring on the left mortise, presses 
 the roller under the rear transom, and seizes the left 
 handle with the left hand. 
 
 Nos. 1 and 2 lay hold of the manoeuvring rings and 
 handles. 
 
 All being ready, the gunner gives the command, 
 HEAVE, and the carriage is run to the rear until the face 
 of the piece is about one yard from the wall, when, dis- 
 engaging the roller, he commands, HALT. All resume 
 their posts. 
 
 2. Load by detail LOAD. 
 
 141. The gunner places himself at the breech ; breaks 
 the rear with the right foot ; closes the vent with the 
 second finger of the right hand ; and manages the elevat- 
 ing screw with the left. 
 
 No. 1 seizing the sponge-staff at its middle, brings it 
 across his body ; plants the left foot opposite to the muz- 
 zle, close to the carriage, and breaks off with the right 
 foot ; at the same time throwing the sponge staff into the 
 left hand, back down, and extending both hands towards 
 the ends of the staff, so as to enter the rammer-head into 
 the embrasure and bring the sponge opposite to the 
 muzzle. He then inserts it, and presses it to the bottom 
 of the chamber with three motions. 
 
 No. 2 goes for a cartridge, and returns to his post. 
 If shells are used, he brings a shell at the same time. 
 
 3. SPONGE. 
 
 142. No. 1, using both hands, sponges the chamber 
 
 11 
 
242 MANUAL FOE HEAVY ARTILLKRY. 
 
 carefully ; withdraws the sponge, pressing it against the 
 bottom of the bore ; turns it over, stepping to his left for 
 this purpose, and rests the rammer-head against the right 
 side of the face of the piece. 
 
 No. 2 introduces the cartridge, bottom foremost, seams 
 downward. No. 1 sets it home by three motions, with 
 the right hand. 
 
 4. RAM. 
 
 143. No. 1, drawing out the rammer to the full ex- 
 tent of his arm, rams once, and throws out the rammer, 
 holding it as before, the rammer-head against the right 
 side of the face of the piece. 
 
 No. 2 introduces the canister or shell home with care ; 
 throws out the rammer ; replaces it ; and resumes his 
 post. 
 
 The gunner, rising upon the left leg, pricks, leaving 
 the priming-wire in the vent, and resumes his post. 
 
 5. IN BATTERY. 
 
 144. All apply themselves to the carriage, as pre- 
 scribed in No. 140, and ease the piece into battery. As 
 soon as it touches the hurters, the gunner commands, 
 HALT. All resume their posts. 
 
 G. POINT. 
 
 145. No. 1 makes ready a tube, as prescribed for No. 
 3, in No. 24. 
 
 No. 2 goes to the rear of the chassis, and, facing to 
 the front, applies himself to it by hand, in order to tra- 
 verse it. 
 
 The gunner withdraws the priming-wire, and, having 
 pointed the piece, gives the word, READY, making a signal 
 with both hands, at which No. 2 resumes his post ; takes 
 out the roller-handspike, and resumes his post. 
 
 No. 1 steps to the vent and inserts the tube, holding 
 
 
MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 24:3 
 
 the lanyard slightly stretched with the right hand, the 
 cord passing between the fingers, back of the hand up, 
 and breaks to his rear a full pace with the left foot, the 
 left hand against the thigh. 
 
 7. Number one (or the like) FIRE. 
 
 146. No. 1 fires as prescribed for No. 3, in No. 25. 
 What is prescribed in No. 26 will apply to this piece, 
 
 substituting No. 1 for No. 3. 
 
 147. To continue the exercise, the instructor resumes 
 the series of commands, beginning with FROM BATTERY. 
 
 To change posts. 
 
 To load for action. 
 
 To cease firing. 
 
 To secure piece, and replace implements. 
 
 To leave the battery. 
 
 Executed as in Nos. Ill, 112, 113, 114, and 115. 
 
 CHARGES, ETC. 
 
 148. 
 
 Charge of powder 2 Ibs. 
 
 Range at an angle of 0, charge 2 Ibs., shell 295 yards. 
 
 Range at an angle of 1, charge 2 Ibs., shell 516 " 
 
 Range at an angle of 5, charge 2 Ibs., shell 1,322 " 
 
 Range at an angle of 2, charge If Ibs., spherical-case, 
 
 time 2" 600 " 
 
 Range at an angle of 5 30', charge If Ibs., spher.-case, 
 
 time 4" 1,050 " 
 
 Range at an angle of 3 30', charge 2 Ibs., spher.-case, 
 
 time 3" 880 " 
 
 Proof range of powder 300 " 
 
 Weight of the 24-pdr. shell 17 Ibs. 
 
 Weight of the round of canister 21 " 
 
 No. of bullets in a round of canister 48 " 
 
244 
 
 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 LESSON XV. 
 
 Service of an 8-inch Columliad, mounted on a Columliad 
 Carriage. 
 
 Five men are necessary : one gunner and four other 
 cannoneers. 
 
 149. The piece is in battery. 
 
 The implements, etc., are arranged as follows : 
 
 ("Two on each side of the carriage, laid 
 TRUCK-HAND- J on the rails, one in rear of each front 
 BPIKES, . . I truck- wheel, and one in rear of each 
 rear truck-wheel. 
 
 MANCEUVRING- 
 HANDSPIKES, 
 
 1 
 
 One on each side of the carriage, laid 
 on the ground in a line with the can- 
 noneers, opposite to the traverse 
 wheels, the small ends towards the 
 parapet. 
 
 ELEVATING-BAR, \ Laid across the ties at tlie junction of 
 - the braces, handle to the left. 
 
 One yard behind the cannoneers of 
 the right, the sponge uppermost, the 
 sponge and rammer-heads turned 
 from the parapet, inclined slightly 
 from the piece, and supported upon 
 a prop. 
 
 j Suspended from the knob of the cas- 
 
 ( cable. 
 
 f Containing friction tubes, and the lan- 
 J yard, wound in St. Andrew's cross 
 ] upon its handle. Suspended from 
 [^ the knob of the cascable. 
 
 SPONGE-RAMMER, 
 
 HAVERSACK, 
 
 TUBE-POUCH, 
 
8-Incli Colu.m~biacL on. a Casemate Carriage. 
 
 \ 
 
MANUAL FOK HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 245 
 
 GUNNER'S-POUCH, 
 
 CHOCKS, . . 
 
 VENT-COVER, 
 TOMPION, 
 
 BROOM, . . 
 
 BUDGE-BARREL, 
 
 Containing the gunner's level, breech- 
 sight, finger-stall, priming-wire, gun- 
 ner's gimlet, vent-punch, chalk-line, 
 and chalk. Suspended from the 
 knob of the cascable. 
 One on each side of the piece, laid on 
 
 the front of the rails. 
 Covering the vent. 
 In the muzzle. 
 
 j Leaning against the parapet, to the left 
 ( of the piece. 
 
 C Containing cartridges, at the safest and 
 < most convenient place in rear of the 
 L piece. 
 
 When several columbiads are served together, there 
 will be only one gunner's level and two vent-punches to 
 each battery, not exceeding six pieces. To the same bat- 
 tery there will be one worm and one wrench. 
 
 The shells are at the magazine, or other safe position, 
 and are brought, as required, to the place prescribed for 
 the budge-barrel. 
 
 150. The cannoneers having been marched to their 
 posts, the instructor explains to them the names and uses 
 of the implements, and the nomenclatures of the colum- 
 biad, its carriage, and the battery. 
 
 151. To cause the implements to be distributed, the 
 instructor commands : 
 
 TAKE IMPLEMENTS. 
 
 The gunner steps to the knob of the cascable ; takes 
 off the vent-cover, handing it to No. 2 to place against the 
 parapet, in rear of his post ; gives the tube-pouch to No. 
 3, and the haversack to No. 4 ; equips himself with his 
 own pouch and the finger-stall, wearing the latter on the 
 
246 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ABTILLERY. 
 
 second finger of the left hand ; takes the elevating-bar, 
 and stepping between the rails, levels the piece conven- 
 iently for loading ; applies his level to verify the line of 
 sight which is marked on the piece, marking it, if neces- 
 sary, with the chalk line, assisted by No. 2 ; and resumes 
 his post, holding the elevating-bar with the right hand. 
 
 No. 3 equips himself with the tube-pouch. 
 
 No. 4 equips himself with the haversack, which he 
 wears from the right shoulder to the left side. 
 
 Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 take the truck-handspikes with the 
 hand furthest from the parapet, and carry them to that 
 side, holding them vertically, the arm extended naturally. 
 
 152. The instructor causes the service of the piece to 
 be executed by the following commands : 
 
 1. FROM BATTERY. 
 
 The gunner moves two paces to the right of his post. 
 
 Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4, facing from the parapet, place the 
 wrenches on the ends of the axle-trees, the handspikes 
 elevated about 30 to the rear, and at the word HEAVE 
 by the gunner, bear down and throw the wheels into gear ; 
 Nos. 3 and 4 immediately after laying their handspikes 
 on the platform in front of their posts. 
 
 Nos. 1 and 2, facing from the parapet, embar in the 
 most convenient front mortises of the truck-wheels, the 
 hand furthest from the carriage at the top of the handspike, 
 the other hand eight inches lower. 
 
 Nos. 3 and 4 go to the assistance of Nos. 1 and 2, and, 
 facing towards them, seize the handspikes with both hands 
 between those of Nos. 1 and 2. 
 
 Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4, in applying themselves to the car- 
 riage, to run it from or to battery, break to the rear with 
 the foot nearest to the carriage. 
 
 All being ready, the gunner gives the command, 
 HEAVE. 
 
MANUAL FOli HEAVY AKTILLERY. 247 
 
 Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 act together, and bear upon tho 
 handspikes until they are nearly down to the rails, when 
 the gunner commands, UNBAR. Nos. 1 and 2 let go the 
 handspikes with the hand nearest to the carriage, and 
 chock the wheels. Nos. 3 and 4 withdraw the handspikes 
 and pass them to Nos. 1 and 2, who re-insert them in the 
 front mortises. 
 
 The gunner again gives the command, HEAVE, and so 
 on, until the face of the piece is about one yard from the 
 parapet, when he commands, HALT. Nos. 3 and 4 take 
 their posts. Nos. 1 and 2 chock the wheels as before, 
 unbar, and place the wrench of their handspikes on the 
 ends of the axle-tree of the front wheels. At the com- 
 mand OUT OF GEAR by the gunner, they throw the wheels 
 out of gear ; lay their handspikes on the rails between 
 the wheels ; and take their posts. 
 
 2. Load by detail LOAD. 
 
 153. Executed as in Nos. 102 and 103. The gunner, 
 if necessary, adjusts the piece conveniently for loading be- 
 fore closing the vent. No. 4 brings up a shell, together 
 with the cartridge. 
 
 3. SPONGE. 
 
 154. Executed as in No, 104. 
 
 4. RAM. 
 
 155. Executed as in No. 105, except that the shell is 
 set carefully home without being rammed. 
 
 5. IN BATTERY. 
 
 156. Nos. 1 and 2 unchock the wheels, and place the 
 chocks on the ties. 
 
 Nos. 1,2, 3, and 4, facing towards the parapet, apply 
 the wrenches of their handspikes to the ends of the axle- 
 trees ; Nos. 1 and 2 so as to throw the front wheels into 
 
24:8 MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 
 
 gear, and Nos. 3 and 4 so as to throw the rear wheels out 
 of gear. 
 
 The gunner commands, HEAVE, when the front wheels 
 are thrown into gear. 
 
 Should the carriage run too easily after it is in mo- 
 tion, the gunner will command, REAR WHEELS OUT OF 
 GEAR, when the rear wheels are thrown out of gear. Nos. 
 3 and 4 each take a chock and hold it in front of the rear 
 wheels, ready to apply it under them if necessary. 
 
 When the head of the cheeks is about one foot from 
 the end of the rails, the gunner commands, CHOCK, when 
 Nos. 3 and 4 chock the rear wheels. The wheels are un- 
 chocked, and the piece is run gently into battery, by Nos. 
 3 and 4 throwing the rear wheels alternately out of and 
 into gear. As soon as the head of the carriage touches 
 the hurters, the gunner commands, OUT OF GEAR, when 
 the front wheels are thrown out of gear ; also the rear 
 wheels, should they be in gear. Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 take 
 their posts, and lay their handspikes on the platform just 
 in front of them. 
 
 6. POINT. 
 
 157. No. 3 passes the hook of the lanyard through 
 the eye of a tube from front to rear ; holds the handle of 
 the lanyard with the right hand, the hook between the 
 thumb and forefinger ; and stands ready to hand it to the 
 gunner. 
 
 Nos. 1 and 2, passing outside of the other cannoneers, 
 move to the rear of the chassis, and, each taking one of 
 the manoeuvring handspikes, embar with the levelled end 
 under the traverse wheels. For traversing large angles, 
 Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 apply themselves by hand at the end 
 of the chassis. 
 
 The gunner withdraws the priming-wire ; inserts the 
 pawl of the elevating machine in the proper notch by 
 
MANUAL FOR HEAVY ARTILLERY. 249 
 
 means of the elevating bar, and with the breech-sight 
 gives the required elevation ; No. 4 turning the handle of 
 the screw according to his direction. 
 
 The moment the piece is correctly pointed, he rises on 
 the left leg, and gives the word READY, making a signal 
 with both hands, at which Nos. 1 and 2 unbar, lay down 
 the handspikes, and resume their post ; receives the tube 
 from No. 3, which he inserts in the vent ; dismounts from 
 the chassis ; and goes to the windward to observe the 
 effect of the shot. 
 
 No. 3 stretches the lanyard as in No. 107. 
 
 7. Number one (or the like) FIRE. 
 
 158. Executed as in No. 108. 
 
 What is prescribed in No. 109 will apply to this piece. 
 
 159. Remark. If the piece is to be fired at high an- 
 gles, it is elevated in the following manner : . 
 
 Nos. 1 and 2 the former carrying his traversing- 
 handspike with him move to the mule ; place the hand- 
 spike in the bore ; pass the bight of a trace-rope over it ; 
 and bear down slightly on the handspike to enable the 
 gunner to free the pawl from the notch. The gunner 
 draws the pawl back by its handle, and commands EASE 
 AWAY. Nos. 1 and 2, holding the ends of the rope, ease 
 down the breech steadily, until the gunner commands, 
 STEADY, when he inserts the pawl in the proper notch. 
 
 160. To continue the exercise, the instructor resumes 
 the series of commands, beginning with FROM BATTERY : 
 
 To change posts. 
 To load for action. 
 To cease firing. 
 
 To secure piece, and replace implements. 
 To leave the battery. 
 Executed as in Nos. Ill, 112, 113, 114, and 115. 
 
CHAPTER XIII. 
 
 AMMUNITION. 
 
 TROOPS in the field should not only be supplied with 
 a sufficient quantity of ammunition, but the men of the 
 command should be taught how to prepare it. Cart- 
 ridges for small-arms are made of paper, in the follow- 
 ing manner : Having prepared the paper, which should 
 be strong, but not too thick, by cutting it first into strips 
 eight and a half inches wide, then cutting these strips 
 crosswise into smaller strips four and a half inches in 
 width, and then cutting these last diagonally, so that the 
 pieces will be three inches on one side and five and a half 
 on the other ; the pieces are then rolled on a small cylin- 
 drical stick of the same diameter as the ball to be used, 
 about six inches long, having a spherical cavity at one 
 end and rounded at the other. The paper is laid on a 
 table with the side perpendicular to the bases next the 
 workman, the broad end to the left ; the stick laid on 
 it with the concave end half an inch from the broad edge 
 of the paper, and enveloped in it once. The right hand is 
 then laid flat on the stick, and all the paper rolled on it. 
 The projecting end of the paper is now neatly folded down 
 into the concavity of the stick, pasted, and pressed on a 
 ball imbedded in the table for the purpose. 
 
AMMUNITION. 251 
 
 Instead of being pasted, these cylinders may be closed 
 by choking with a string, tied to the table, and having at 
 the other end a stick by which to hold it. The convex 
 end of the former is placed to the left, and after the paper 
 is rolled on, the former is taken in the left hand, and a 
 turn made around it with the choking string half an inch 
 from the end of the paper. Whilst the string is drawn 
 tight with the right hand, the former is held in the left 
 with the forefinger resting on the end of the cylinder, fold- 
 ing it neatly down upon the end of the former. The 
 choke is then firmly tied with twine. 
 
 For ball cartridges, make the cylinders and choke 
 them as above described, and the choke tied without cut- 
 ting the twine. The former is then withdrawn, the ball 
 put in, and the concave end of the former put in after it. 
 The half hitches are made a little above the ball, and the 
 twine cut off. 
 
 For ball and buckshot cartridges, make the cylinder 
 as before, insert three buckshot, fasten them with a half 
 hitch, and insert and secure the ball as before. 
 
 For buckshot cartridges, make the cylinder as before, 
 insert four tiers of three buckshot each, as at first, making 
 a half hitch between the tiers, and ending with a double 
 hitch. 
 
 To fill the cartridges, the cylinders are placed upright 
 in a box, and the charge poured into each from a conical 
 charger of the appropriate size ; the mouths of the cylin- 
 ders are now folded down on the powder by two rectan- 
 gular folds, and the cartridges bundled in packages of ten. 
 For this a folding box is necessary ; it is made with two 
 vertical sides at a distance from each other equal to five 
 diameters of the ball, and two diameters high. 
 
 The manner of preparing ammunition for artillery is 
 found in the Manual of Artillery in preceding chapter. 
 
252 
 
 AMMUNITION. 
 
 TABLE. 
 
 DIMENSIONS OP CARTRIDGE-BAGS. 
 
 O 
 
 OQ 
 
 I 
 
 | TO 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 Oi o5 
 .2 ' 00 
 1 1 
 
 O 
 'nj-01 
 
 d ? 
 
 5 ir- CO r-5 IS <N 
 
 eSaig -01-3 
 
 43. o3 
 
 ri< <M rji Ci ^=> T}< 
 i I 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 
 qoui-8 
 
 CO 
 . Ci ^ U5 
 
 So o cs ^2 o 
 
 <M rH ^ rH 
 
 qotn-oi 
 
 CO 
 . 
 S J> rjJ rJ^ ^ CO 
 <M rH '- 1 r-l 
 
 6 
 
 JP<*-5i: 
 
 d ^ "? . 
 
 "- rp C^l r}< O < CO 
 
 rH 
 
 upd-si 
 
 O 
 ^ 10 
 
 2 ^ ,H- ^ ^ ^J 
 
 upd-fg 
 
 3 
 
 Q . . O!3 
 
 ^ \O rH CO C5 O 
 
 upd-5S 
 
 C ^ * ** * 
 
 o 1-1 co o co 
 
 upd-3? 
 
 CO 
 . O . VO 
 So' 0^ rn 
 
 
 I ^o J J 'd : 
 
 illl! 1 
 
 1 * a 2 ! & 
 8 i s | * : 
 
 M ^ ^ ? 
 
 -1i! 1 
 
 g fcO p^ tO c3 
 
 1 J J 1